The beloved city, or, The saints reign on earth a thovsand yeares asserted and illustrated from LXV places of Holy Scripture, besides the judgement of holy learned men both at home and abroad, and also reason it selfe : likewise XXXV objections against this truth are here answered / written in Latine by Ioan Henr. Alstedius ... ; faithfully Englished, with some occasionall notes and the judgement herein ... of some of our owne famous divines.
         Diatribe de mille annis apocalyptis. English
         Alsted, Johann Heinrich, 1588-1638.
      
       
         This text is an enriched version of the TCP digital transcription A25221 of text R19975 in the  English Short Title Catalog (Wing A2924). Textual changes  and metadata enrichments aim at making the text more  computationally tractable, easier to read, and suitable for network-based collaborative curation by amateur and professional end users from many walks of life.  The text has been tokenized and linguistically annotated with  MorphAdorner. The annotation includes standard spellings that support the display of a text in a standardized format that preserves archaic forms ('loveth', 'seekest'). Textual changes aim at restoring the text the author or stationer meant to publish.  This text has not been fully proofread 
       Approx. 272 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 58 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         EarlyPrint Project
         Evanston,IL, Notre Dame, IN, St. Louis, MO
         2017
         A25221
         Wing A2924
         ESTC R19975
         12174319
         ocm 12174319
         55491
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A25221)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 55491)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 243:E90, no 9)
      
       
         
           
             The beloved city, or, The saints reign on earth a thovsand yeares asserted and illustrated from LXV places of Holy Scripture, besides the judgement of holy learned men both at home and abroad, and also reason it selfe : likewise XXXV objections against this truth are here answered / written in Latine by Ioan Henr. Alstedius ... ; faithfully Englished, with some occasionall notes and the judgement herein ... of some of our owne famous divines.
             Diatribe de mille annis apocalyptis. English
             Alsted, Johann Heinrich, 1588-1638.
             Burton, William, 1575-1645.
          
           [4], viii, 84, [39]-46, xvii-xxiv p.
           
             [s.n.],
             London :
             1643.
          
           
             Dedication signed: William Burton.
             Imperfect copy: Prefaces (viii p. following dedication) wanting.
             Reproduction of original in Thomason Collection, British Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Millennium -- Early works to 1800.
           Prophecies.
        
      
    
       A25221  R19975  (Wing A2924).  civilwar no The beloved city or, The saints reign on earth a thousand yeares; asserted, and illustrated from LXV. places of Holy Scripture; besides the Alsted, Johann Heinrich 1643    48499 568 490 0 0 0 0 218 F  The  rate of 218 defects per 10,000 words puts this text in the F category of texts with  100 or more defects per 10,000 words. 
        2003-01 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2003-02 SPi Global
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2003-03 Judith Siefring
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2003-03 Judith Siefring
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2003-04 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
       
         
           THE
           BELOVED
           CITY
           OR
           ,
           THE
           SAINTS
           REIGN
           ON
           EARTH
           A
           THOVSAND
           YEARES
           ;
           Asserted
           ,
           and
           Illustrated
           from
           LXV
           .
           places
           of
           
             Holy
             Scripture
          
           ;
           Besides
           the
           judgement
           of
           
             Holy
             Learned
             men
             ,
          
           both
           at
           home
           and
           abroad
           ;
           and
           also
           
             Reason
          
           it selfe
           .
           Likewise
           XXXV
           .
           
             Objections
          
           against
           this
           
             Truth
          
           are
           here
           answered
           .
        
         
           Written
           in
           
             Latine
          
           by
           
             Ioan.
             
             Henr.
             Alstedius
             ,
             Professor
          
           of
           the
           University
           of
           
             Herborne
             .
          
        
         
           Faithfully
           Englished
           ;
           With
           some
           occasionall
           Notes
           .
           And
           the
           Judgement
           herein
           [
           not
           onely
           of
           
             Tycho
             Brabe
             ,
          
           and
           
             Carol
             ●●●●ltus
          
           ;
           but
           also
           ]
           of
           some
           of
           our
           owne
           famous
           
             Divines
             .
          
        
         
           
             Si
             aqua
             strangulat
             ,
             quid
             insuper
             bibendum
             est
             ?
          
           
             M.
             Antonin.
             Imp.
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ,
             Lib.
             4.
             Sect.
             17.
             
          
        
         
           
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ;
             Could
             he
             say
             of
             
               Athens
               ,
               Thou
               louely
               City
               of
            
             Cec●ops
             ?
             And
             shalt
             not
             thou
             say
             of
             the
             CHVRCH
             OF
             CHRIST
             ,
             Thou
             
               Lovely
               City
               of
            
             GOD
             ?
          
           
             *
             
               Apoc.
               xx
               .
            
             9.
             
          
        
         
           LONDON
           ,
           Printed
           in
           the
           yeare
           of
           the
           last
           expectation
           of
           the
           SAINTS
           .
           M.DC.XLIII
           .
        
      
       
       
       
         
           To
           the
           Right
           VVorshipfull
           ,
           Sir
           
             Iohn
             Cordwell
          
           Knight
           ,
           and
           Alderman
           ,
           Master
           of
           the
           Company
           of
           the
           Mercers
           ;
           
             
               Mr.
               
                 Lybbe
                 Chapman
              
               —
               Surveyor
               .
            
             
               Captaine
               
                 Thomas
                 Chambrelan
              
               Mr.
               
                 George
                 Burrish
              
               Wardens
               .
            
          
           And
           to
           the
           Worshipfull
           ,
           the
           Assistants
           and
           Communalty
           of
           the
           same
           Antient
           and
           flourishing
           Society
           of
           MERCERS
           in
           the
           Famous
           City
           of
           
             London
             .
          
        
         
           
             RIGHT
             WORSHIPFVL
             ,
          
        
         
           MY
           ordinary
           employment
           being
           of
           late
           for
           some
           time
           interrupted
           ,
           and
           the
           usuall
           course
           of
           my
           studies
           ,
           not
           so
           much
           diverted
           ,
           as
           quite
           stopt
           by
           the
           late
           generall
           and
           miserable
           distractions
           of
           the
           Kingdome
           ,
           and
           especially
           of
           the
           place
           I
           live
           in
           ,
           I
           bethought
           my selfe
           of
           some
           meanes
           whereby
           I
           might
           mitigate
           my
           apprehension
           of
           the
           miseries
           issuing
           from
           these
           present
           distempers
           ;
           When
           (
           I
           thinke
           God
           so
           directing
           it
           )
           this
           Treatise
           ,
           with
           some
           others
           of
           the
           same
           nature
           ,
           came
           to
           my
           hands
           .
           The
           
             Author
          
           is
           of
           as
           generall
           repute
           among
           us
           for
           learning
           ,
           as
           any
           late
           Writer
           we
           have
           received
           from
           beyond
           the
           Seas
           these
           many
           yeares
           :
           and
           the
           
             Worke
          
           is
           an
           
             Explanation
          
           of
           the
           xx
           .
           
             Chapter
          
           of
           the
           
             Revelation
             .
          
           The
           
             Subject
          
           thereof
           is
           The
           
             assertion
             of
             the
             Glorious
             Kingdome
             of
          
           Christ
           
             here
             on
             earth
          
           ;
           a
           matter
           no
           doubt
           of
           great
           comfort
           ,
           and
           consolation
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           
             God
             .
          
           And
           as
           I
           am
           not
           ignorant
           that
           
             Apocalypticall
             Discourses
          
           in
           generall
           are
           liable
           to
           many
           censures
           ,
           and
           that
           this
           
             Divine
             Prophecy
          
           it selfe
           is
           as
           yet
           a
           
             sealed
             book
             ,
          
           in
           so
           much
           that
           the
           great
           
             Calvin
          
           was
           forced
           to
           acknowledge
           ,
           (
           if
           the
           
           reportes
           wrong
           him
           not
           )
           that
           
           he
           knew
           not
           what
           so
           difficult
           and
           obscure
           a
           Writer
           ,
           as
           the
           Author
           thereof
           ,
           meant
           :
           so
           I
           am
           sure
           this
           part
           thereof
           hath
           beene
           subject
           to
           most
           divers
           and
           contrary
           interpretations
           ;
           that
           what
           
           
             Hierome
          
           saith
           of
           the
           whole
           ,
           may
           well
           be
           said
           of
           this
           passage
           thereof
           :
           
             So
             many
             words
             ,
             so
             many
             mysteries
             .
          
           Yet
           receiving
           my selfe
           much
           satisfaction
           and
           se●lednesse
           of
           mind
           from
           this
           
             exposition
          
           thereof
           ,
           I
           thought
           that
           
             Gods
          
           people
           also
           might
           reape
           some
           benefit
           and
           fruit
           thereby
           :
           And
           this
           is
           the
           maine
           cause
           ,
           that
           I
           have
           made
           it
           publique
           .
           Now
           that
           I
           have
           inscribed
           it
           onto
           Your
           
             Names
          
           I
           have
           deal●
           but
           right
           and
           〈◊〉
           therein
           .
           For
           owing
           the
           first
           groundes
           and
           foundation
           of
           my
           studies
           to
           Your
           large
           bounty
           and
           benevolence
           ,
           I
           must
           acknowledge
           the
           first
           fruites
           thereof
           communicated
           abroad
           (
           and
           indeed
           I
           ever
           intended
           them
           so
           whatsoever
           they
           had
           been
           )
           to
           be
           Yours
           by
           ●
           due
           claime
           and
           challenge
           of
           them
           .
           The
           
             Persians
          
           (
           in
           whose
           Schooles
           
             gratitude
          
           was
           taught
           ,
           as
           
             Letters
          
           and
           
             Arts
          
           in
           ours
           ,
           whose
           
             *
          
           
             Laws
          
           punished
           the
           contrary
           almost
           as
           deepe
           as
           wee
           doe
           
             Homicide
             ,
          
           )
           had
           an
           Order
           in
           their
           
             *
          
           
             Colledges
             ,
          
           which
           were
           for
           the
           education
           of
           them
           whose
           service
           was
           appointed
           for
           the
           
             King
             ,
          
           that
           after
           their
           greatest
           promotions
           ,
           and
           abilities
           in
           publick
           attendance
           ,
           they
           were
           to
           acknowledge
           all
           as
           received
           from
           the
           
             Classis
          
           of
           their
           first
           institution
           .
           My
           naturall
           propension
           to
           thankfulnesse
           makes
           me
           confesse
           I
           owe
           all
           that
           I
           am
           in
           good
           letters
           (
           I
           best
           know
           how
           little
           that
           is
           )
           to
           the
           foundation
           I
           laid
           thereof
           in
           Your
           excellent
           Seminary
           of
           learning
           ,
           and
           to
           your
           extraordinary
           favour
           ,
           and
           encouragement
           to
           good
           studies
           and
           endeavours
           .
           I
           pray
           
             God
          
           lead
           You
           alwaies
           along
           by
           the
           hand
           in
           all
           Your
           affaires
           and
           occasions
           .
        
         
           
             I
             am
             Your
             very
             respectfull
             servant
             to
             be
             commanded
             ,
             
               William
               Burton
               .
            
          
        
      
       
       
         
           To
           those
           who
           shall
           light
           upon
           this
           Booke
           .
        
         
           TO
           prefix
           a
           word
           or
           two
           ,
           by
           way
           of
           preface
           ,
           may
           concerne
           thee
           ,
           Reader
           ,
           perhaps
           as
           well
           as
           my selfe
           .
        
         
           That
           I
           might
           not
           therefore
           be
           censured
           for
           the
           onely
           idle
           person
           in
           these
           busie
           times
           ,
           in
           which
           (
           GOD
           in
           Mercy
           looke
           upon
           us
           !
           )
           every
           man
           ,
           either
           with
           his
           Sword
           ,
           or
           Pen
           ,
           strives
           to
           make
           the
           noise
           and
           tumult
           greater
           ,
           I
           have
           thrust
           out
           this
           booke
           into
           the
           publique
           ,
           in
           the
           generall
           crowd
           of
           those
           many
           :
           but
           with
           expectation
           of
           a
           better
           blessing
           ,
           I
           hope
           ,
           from
           God
           ,
           then
           some
           of
           them
           can
           looke
           for
           .
        
         
         
           And
           although
           I
           am
           not
           ignorant
           ,
           that
           there
           are
           a
           generation
           of
           men
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           
           〈…〉
           alabaster
           
             ●●guent
             is
             plenns
             putere
             videtur
             ,
          
           a
           〈…〉
           ,
           having
           t●eir
           understanding
           corrupted
           by
           their
           fancy
           ,
           can
           relish
           and
           judge
           aright
           of
           nothing
           ▪
           yet
           so
           arrogant
           ,
           and
           self-conceited
           ,
           that
           they
           〈…〉
           exterminate
           all
           learning
           and
           kno
           〈…〉
           ●●●eth
           not
           just
           with
           their
           owne
           〈…〉
           humours
           ,
           )
           with
           farre
           more
           super
           〈…〉
           
             Plato
          
           ejected
           
             Homer
          
           out
           of
           his
           Common-wealth
           :
           (
           
             Sed
             quid
             suibus
             cum
             amaracino
             ?
          
           They
           love
           the
           mi●e
           best
           ?
           )
           Notwithstanding
           all
           this
           ,
           I
           say
           ,
           the
           generall
           welcome
           and
           long
           entertainment
           ,
           which
           the
           other
           learned
           workes
           of
           this
           same
           
             Authour
          
           have
           had
           in
           our
           
             Schooles
             ,
          
           as
           well
           as
           in
           those
           beyond
           the
           Seas
           ,
           where
           he
           professed
           with
           admirable
           applause
           ,
           seemed
           to
           me
           not
           to
           deny
           this
           piece
           an
           
             endenizing
             ,
          
           or
           freedome
           ,
           from
           some
           hands
           of
           a
           
             better
             note
             .
          
           Yet
           perhaps
           ,
           if
           thou
           hadst
           any
           acquaintance
           with
           me
           ,
           thou
           wouldst
           wonder
           to
           see
           a
           subject
           of
           this
           nature
           to
           come
           forth
           into
           the
           
             light
             of
             learned
             men
          
           by
           my
           meanes
           ,
           and
           assistance
           .
        
         
           True
           it
           is
           ,
           I
           have
           under
           my
           command
           some
           
             Discourses
             ,
          
           I
           will
           not
           say
           of
           greater
           consequence
           ,
           but
           I
           dare
           say
           ,
           that
           cost
           me
           greater
           labour
           ,
           and
           longer
           enquiry
           ,
           to
           which
           these
           times
           doe
           deny
           a
           propitious
           birth
           .
           And
           having
           lost
           almost
           my
           employment
           for
           the
           time
           ,
           through
           the
           present
           distractions
           ;
           and
           my
           bookes
           and
           I
           being
           in
           a
           manner
           quite
           severed
           from
           one
           another
           ,
           I
           thought
           I
           could
           doe
           nothing
           better
           by
           way
           of
           l●ffning
           my
           apprehension
           of
           these
           publique
           calamities
           ,
           which
           
             Gods
          
           justice
           ,
           and
           our
           
           owne
           unthankfulnesse
           ,
           by
           repining
           at
           his
           Mercies
           ,
           have
           brought
           upon
           us
           .
        
         
           I
           had
           no
           intent
           hereby
           to
           impose
           upon
           any
           one
           ,
           or
           abuse
           mens
           beliefe
           ,
           by
           forcing
           their
           assent
           to
           an
           
             Heresie
             ,
          
           condemned
           in
           the
           
             Church
             ,
          
           as
           some
           would
           perswade
           us
           ,
           so
           many
           ages
           agoe
           .
           Yet
           I
           know
           well
           enough
           ,
           
           that
           nothing
           pleaseth
           the
           fancy
           ,
           and
           feedeth
           the
           humour
           of
           this
           age
           so
           much
           ,
           as
           
             novelties
          
           ;
           men
           no
           lesse
           inquiring
           now
           after
           new
           
             Doctrines
          
           and
           
             opinions
             ,
          
           then
           of
           old
           the
           
             Athenians
          
           did
           after
           new
           
             Deities
             .
          
           
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           must
           I
           say
           to
           these
           .
           I
           took
           not
           this
           paines
           for
           them
           .
        
         
           Neither
           indeed
           do
           I
           my selfe
           goe
           about
           to
           assert
           ,
           or
           maintaine
           any
           un-grounded
           Doctrine
           ;
           knowing
           well
           ,
           that
           
             opinion
             ,
          
           that
           
             Holy
             Disease
             ,
          
           how
           great
           soever
           her
           admires
           ,
           and
           a
           betters
           are
           ,
           can
           never
           be
           able
           to
           stand
           in
           competition
           with
           the
           holy
           Word
           of
           
             God
             ,
          
           and
           the
           
             *
          
           
             sound
          
           and
           undeniable
           doctrine
           thereof
           .
        
         
           Such
           is
           alwaies
           my
           temper
           and
           moderation
           ,
           that
           if
           by
           
             *
          
           one
           conviction
           thou
           demonstrate
           my
           error
           ,
           (
           much
           more
           it
           the
           
             CHVRCH
          
           shall
           interpose
           her
           judgement
           ,
           )
           whether
           it
           be
           in
           matter
           of
           
             opinion
          
           or
           
             action
             ,
          
           I
           will
           retract
           the
           one
           ,
           and
           relinquish
           the
           other
           .
           And
           till
           thou
           dost
           this
           in
           the
           matter
           ,
           which
           we
           have
           in
           hand
           ,
           be
           not
           offended
           ,
           if
           I
           stand
           close
           by
           my
           
             Author
             ,
          
           but
           especially
           to
           reason
           ,
           and
           plaine
           Scripture
           it selfe
           alleaged
           by
           him
           .
           Truth
           it
           is
           the
           onely
           thing
           I
           se●ke
           after
           ,
           for
           the
           pu●●ui●
           of
           which
           ,
           no
           man
           ought
           to
           be
           blame
           any
           more
           ,
           then
           they
           are
           to
           be
           execused
           ,
           who
           wilfully
           continue
           in
           known
           error
           ,
           and
           ignorance
           .
        
         
         
           By
           the
           way
           then
           ,
           good
           Reader
           ,
           let
           me
           tell
           thee
           ,
           (
           what
           credit
           soever
           I
           gaine
           from
           thee
           ,
           )
           that
           it
           was
           the
           constant
           opinion
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           in
           the
           very
           next
           age
           to
           the
           
             Apostles
             ,
          
           that
           there
           should
           be
           a
           
             resurrection
          
           before
           the
           generall
           
             rising
          
           at
           the
           last
           day
           ,
           and
           an
           happy
           condition
           of
           the
           faithfull
           upon
           earth
           for
           CIO
           .
           yeeres
           .
           This
           we
           may
           learne
           from
           
             a
          
           
             Tertullias
             ,
          
           and
           
             b
          
           
             Irenaeus
          
           :
           And
           
             c
          
           
             Iustin
          
           the
           
             Martyr
             ,
          
           (
           who
           of
           a
           
             Philosopher
          
           became
           a
           
             Christian
          
           some
           xxx
           .
           yeeres
           after
           the
           death
           of
           
             Iohn
          
           the
           
             Evangelist
          
           and
           Penman
           of
           this
           holy
           
             Prophecy
          
           )
           tels
           us
           plainly
           ,
           that
           not
           only
           himselfe
           ,
           but
           what
           
             d
          
           
             Christian
          
           soever
           in
           his
           time
           were
           in
           all
           respects
           
             Orthodox
             ,
          
           maintained
           the
           same
           ,
           grounding
           their
           opinion
           upon
           these
           words
           of
           
             Esay
             .
          
           
             *
          
           
             Behold
             I
             create
             new
             Heavens
             ,
             and
             a
             new
             Earth
             :
             and
             the
             former
             shall
             not
             be
             remembred
             ,
             nor
             come
             into
             my
             mind
             .
             But
             be
             glad
             ,
             and
             rejoyce
             for
             ever
             in
             th●t
             which
             I
             create
             .
          
           I
           know
           not
           whether
           so
           great
           a
           testimony
           ,
           as
           this
           of
           
             Iustin
             Martyrs
             ,
          
           may
           be
           brought
           concerning
           any
           opinion
           among
           
             Christians
             ,
          
           if
           you
           expect
           the
           maine
           articles
           of
           our
           
             Beliefe
             .
          
           And
           the
           generall
           consent
           of
           all
           the
           
             orthodox
             ,
          
           and
           in
           the
           age
           too
           next
           the
           
             Apostles
             ,
          
           is
           no
           small
           argument
           ,
           or
           prejudice
           against
           the
           contrary
           opinion
           ,
           or
           succeeding
           ages
           .
           It
           seemed
           the
           
             Heretiques
          
           of
           those
           times
           ,
           especially
           ,
           or
           indeed
           onely
           ,
           beleeved
           it
           not
           ,
           and
           that
           for
           some
           private
           respect
           ,
           because
           ,
           admitting
           thereof
           ,
           they
           must
           needs
           also
           confesse
           a
           resurrection
           of
           the
           flesh
           ,
           and
           that
           the
           same
           
             God
             ,
          
           who
           was
           mentioned
           in
           the
           
             Law
          
           and
           
             Prophets
             ,
          
           is
           also
           the
           Father
           of
           our
           Lord
           
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
          
           I
           am
           sure
           
             Cerinthus
             ,
          
           that
           
             Arch
             Heretique
          
           in
           those
           daies
           ,
           whom
           the
           after-ages
           do
           make
           the
           first
           
             e
          
           broacher
           
           of
           this
           opinion
           (
           and
           they
           would
           also
           have
           him
           the
           Author
           of
           the
           
             f
          
           
             Revelation
             ,
          
           )
           is
           never
           taxed
           for
           it
           by
           them
           
             g
          
           who
           have
           diligently
           noted
           his
           
             heresies
             .
          
           And
           perhaps
           if
           he
           had
           any
           sensuall
           conceit
           hereabout
           ,
           (
           as
           it
           seemes
           he
           had
           )
           he
           was
           beholding
           to
           Judaisme
           for
           it
           :
           and
           he
           himselfe
           being
           a
           
             Iew
          
           it
           was
           not
           taken
           notice
           of
           in
           him
           .
           But
           for
           a
           
             Christian
          
           to
           have
           any
           such
           doting
           imaginations
           ,
           would
           render
           him
           more
           wild-headed
           ,
           and
           besides
           himselfe
           ,
           in
           sober
           mens
           judgements
           ,
           then
           any
           Poet
           of
           
             Dithyrambique
          
           verse
           .
           Yet
           no
           man
           ought
           to
           be
           blamed
           for
           maintaining
           a
           
             Truth
          
           in
           a
           
             Iewes
          
           company
           ,
           either
           in
           this
           matter
           or
           in
           any
           else
           ,
           if
           with
           heed
           he
           passe
           by
           those
           grosse
           fancies
           ,
           and
           stupid
           absurdities
           ,
           which
           doe
           infatuate
           and
           blemish
           the
           same
           truth
           .
           More
           deservedly
           may
           we
           finde
           fault
           with
           
             Dionysius
          
           of
           
             Alexandria
             ,
          
           and
           his
           followers
           ,
           the
           great
           impugners
           of
           this
           opinion
           ,
           who
           when
           about
           the
           end
           of
           the
           
             third
             age
             ,
          
           the
           dispute
           about
           it
           grew
           very
           hot
           ,
           to
           lessen
           the
           authority
           of
           the
           
             Revelation
             ,
          
           by
           the
           evident
           and
           undeniable
           proofes
           whereof
           the
           matter
           in
           question
           was
           asserted
           ,
           (
           O
           foule
           shame
           ,
           and
           impiety
           !
           )
           they
           fathered
           it
           upon
           I
           know
           not
           whom
           ,
           yet
           one
           of
           the
           same
           name
           ,
           against
           the
           manifest
           witnesse
           of
           
             h
          
           
             Iustin
             Martyr
             ,
             Irenaeus
             ,
          
           and
           all
           the
           Fathers
           before
           them
           ,
           who
           inscrib●
           it
           to
           
             Iohn
             ,
          
           the
           beloved
           Disciple
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           
             Evangelist
          
           :
           Neither
           can
           
             Hierome
          
           himselfe
           be
           ex●used
           ,
           though
           a
           very
           learned
           man
           otherwise
           ,
           but
           easie
           to
           be
           deceived
           ,
           who
           with
           the
           same
           
             Dionysius
          
           doth
           (
           upon
           an
           uncertaine
           report
           )
           fals●ly
           affix
           to
           the
           opinion
           of
           them
           ▪
           who
           according
           to
           truth
           beleeved
           the
           
             thousand
             yeeres
          
           happinesse
           on
           
           earth
           ,
           the
           
             i
          
           
             injury
             of
             Circumcision
             ,
             the
             blood
             of
             Sacrifices
             ,
             and
             rest
             durati●n
             of
             all
             the
             ceremonies
             of
             the
             Law
             .
          
           Which
           old
           pieces
           and
           rags
           of
           
             Indaisme
             ,
          
           or
           perhaps
           the
           dreames
           of
           some
           
             Heretiques
             ,
          
           being
           gathered
           ,
           out
           of
           a
           study
           of
           contention
           ,
           and
           ill
           will
           ,
           were
           patched
           to
           this
           opinion
           of
           the
           
             Primitive
             Church
          
           But
           if
           he
           certainely
           knew
           that
           the
           first
           
             Christians
          
           and
           holy
           
             Martyrs
          
           did
           expect
           Circumcision
           ,
           and
           Sacrifices
           in
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           Christ
           ,
           how
           is
           he
           to
           be
           blamed
           ,
           that
           condemned
           them
           not
           for
           it
           ,
           but
           
             k
          
           left
           every
           man
           to
           the
           freedome
           of
           his
           owne
           judgement
           ,
           either
           to
           approve
           ,
           or
           dislike
           thereof
           .
        
         
           But
           what
           countenance
           soever
           this
           opinion
           hath
           ,
           or
           shall
           finde
           in
           this
           age
           ,
           let
           me
           tell
           thee
           this
           one
           thing
           ,
           Reader
           ,
           which
           I
           will
           leave
           to
           be
           considered
           of
           by
           thee
           ,
           that
           seeing
           there
           are
           so
           manifest
           proofes
           of
           a
           glorious
           Kingdome
           of
           the
           
             Saints
          
           here
           on
           earth
           out
           of
           the
           old
           Testament
           ,
           there
           will
           be
           no
           better
           or
           easier
           way
           ,
           to
           deale
           with
           the
           
             Iewes
          
           in
           matter
           of
           their
           conversion
           ,
           then
           not
           to
           wrest
           the
           plaine
           prophecies
           of
           a
           second
           and
           glorious
           appearance
           of
           Christ
           ,
           to
           his
           first
           comming
           ;
           but
           rather
           to
           perswade
           them
           ,
           that
           they
           must
           expect
           no
           other
           
             Messias
             ,
          
           who
           should
           fulfill
           all
           these
           promises
           ,
           expecting
           what
           is
           to
           be
           expected
           ,
           (
           for
           we
           are
           not
           herein
           wholly
           to
           agree
           with
           the
           
             Iewes
             ,
          
           but
           to
           examine
           all
           things
           according
           to
           the
           rules
           of
           
             Christian
             faith
          
           ▪
           )
           besides
           that
           
             Iesus
          
           of
           
             Nazareth
             ,
          
           whom
           their
           Ancestors
           crucified
           .
           And
           this
           way
           is
           every where
           almost
           through
           the
           whole
           
             Revelation
          
           diligently
           insisted
           upon
           .
           For
           whilst
           we
           force
           those
           most
           cleare
           prophecies
           concerning
           things
           promised
           in
           the
           second
           ,
           to
           his
           first
           comming
           ,
           
           the
           
             Iewes
          
           scorne
           and
           deride
           us
           ,
           and
           are
           more
           and
           more
           confirmed
           in
           their
           infidelity
           .
           But
           for
           the
           cours
           which
           I
           have
           here
           set
           downe
           ,
           I
           am
           much
           mistaken
           if
           it
           be
           not
           the
           same
           which
           was
           observed
           among
           them
           by
           
             Peter
          
           himselfe
           ,
           
             Act.
          
           3.19
           ,
           20
           ,
           21.
           
           
             Repent
             ye
             therefore
             ,
             and
             be
             converted
             ,
             that
             your
             sins
             may
             be
             blotted
             out
             ,
             when
             the
          
           times
           of
           refreshing
           
             shall
             come
             from
             the
             presence
             of
             the
          
           Lord
           .
           
             And
             he
             shall
             send
          
           Jesus
           Christ
           ,
           
             which
             before
             was
             preached
             unto
             you
             .
             Whom
             the
             Heaven
             must
             receive
             ,
             untill
             the
          
           times
           of
           restitution
           of
           all
           things
           ,
           
             which
             God
             hath
             spoken
             by
             the
             ●●uth
             of
             all
             his
             holy
          
           Prophets
           
             since
             the
             World
             began
             .
          
        
         
           But
           I
           forget
           my selfe
           ;
           For
           indeed
           I
           thinke
           it
           more
           fit
           to
           set
           downe
           and
           publish
           ,
           what
           might
           be
           safely
           and
           piously
           beleeved
           concerning
           this
           
             Tene●
             ,
          
           rather
           in
           another
           mans
           sense
           and
           expressions
           ,
           then
           in
           mine
           owne
           ,
           being
           more
           willing
           
             l
          
           modestly
           to
           learne
           and
           be
           instructed
           from
           the
           abilities
           of
           others
           ,
           then
           impudently
           to
           obtrude
           mine
           owne
           weaknesses
           upon
           the
           world
           .
           And
           to
           this
           end
           I
           have
           also
           collected
           what
           some
           of
           the
           most
           eminent
           ▪
           
             Divines
          
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           
             England
             ,
          
           Dr.
           
             Hakewill
             ,
          
           Dr.
           
             Twisse
             ,
          
           Mr.
           
             Mede
             ,
          
           &c.
           (
           that
           thou
           mightest
           not
           thinke
           it
           onely
           an
           outlandish
           toy
           ,
           or
           a
           fancy
           of
           yesterday
           ,
           muchlesse
           savouring
           of
           Popery
           ,
           )
           have
           thought
           ,
           and
           published
           concerning
           this
           opinion
           .
           Besides
           ,
           the
           irrefragable
           judgement
           of
           the
           Divine
           
             Tycho
             Brahe
             ,
          
           that
           singular
           ornament
           both
           of
           the
           
             Heavens
             ,
          
           and
           his
           owne
           
             Denmarke
             ,
          
           and
           with
           him
           the
           termination
           herein
           of
           
             Carolus
             Gallus
             ,
          
           omitted
           by
           
             Asted
             ,
          
           and
           not
           long
           agoe
           one
           of
           the
           
             States
          
           Professors
           of
           Divinity
           in
           their
           University
           of
           
             Leyden
             .
          
        
         
         
           If
           thou
           finde
           any
           discrepancy
           in
           their
           resolutions
           about
           this
           matter
           ,
           perswade
           thy selfe
           ,
           that
           time
           ,
           and
           the
           holy
           
             Spirit
          
           will
           more
           and
           more
           enlighten
           the
           deepe
           mysteries
           of
           
             God●
          
           word
           ,
           and
           of
           its
           unspeakable
           goodnesse
           of
           the
           
             Saints
          
           of
           God
           ,
           will
           yet
           in
           these
           latter
           times
           make
           us
           all
           of
           one
           heart
           ,
           and
           one
           mind
           in
           
             Christ
             Iesu●
             ▪
             That
             all
             we
             that
             doe
             conf●sse
             his
             holy
             Name
             ,
             may
             agree
             in
             the
             truth
             of
             his
             holy
             Word
             ,
             and
             live
             in
             unity
             and
             godly
             love
          
           ;
           which
           is
           the
           prayer
           of
           our
           
             Church
             .
          
           In
           the
           meane
           time
           ,
           good
           Reader
           ,
           consider
           that
           it
           is
           as
           lawfull
           for
           men
           ,
           yea
           for
           good
           
             Christians
          
           themselves
           ,
           to
           differ
           in
           circumstances
           of
           opinions
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           requisite
           and
           seemely
           ,
           that
           they
           should
           grow
           up
           together
           ,
           like
           
             m
          
           fellow
           branches
           ,
           in
           matter
           of
           good
           correspondence
           ,
           and
           affection
           ,
           
             Farewell
             .
          
        
         
           
             SCRIB
             .
          
           LIMNOPOROPOLI
           Antiquorum
           Saxonum
           ,
           five
           Regiovici
           in
           Regni●
           X.
           ab
           V.L.
           
           Ad
           Jamissam
           Ptolomaei
           ,
           (
           
             si
             non
             omnes
             depravati
             cod●
          
           )
           In
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           ,
           quod
           
             Iohannes
             Loukinn
          
           LONDINI
           ,
           IV.
           
             Mater
             .
          
           39.
           Edw.
           R.
           3.
           P.
           Elizabeth●
           Regina
           ,
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           ,
           SCHOLPUBL
           .
           GR.
           LAT.
           LL.
           E.
           V.
           Regni
           sui
           III.
           
        
      
       
       
         
           To
           the
           Christian
           Reader
           .
        
         
           THere
           are
           three
           things
           necessary
           for
           him
           ,
           who
           takes
           upon
           him
           to
           expound
           
             Prophecies
          
           published
           by
           the
           
             Holy
             Ghost
             .
          
           And
           first
           ,
           truely
           the
           light
           and
           Grace
           of
           the
           holy
           Spirit
           is
           requisite
           .
           For
           seeing
           that
           
             Prophecie
          
           proceedeth
           from
           the
           holy
           Spirit
           ,
           It
           is
           necessary
           that
           by
           the
           same
           also
           it
           should
           be
           expounded
           .
           Next
           ,
           Apious
           and
           diligent
           reading
           of
           Prophecies
           ,
           and
           conferring
           them
           one
           with
           another
           ,
           much
           avayleth
           hereunto
           .
           Lastly
           ,
           The
           fulfilling
           of
           any
           Prophecie
           ,
           and
           an
           experience
           in
           a
           manner
           thereof
           ,
           is
           as
           it
           were
           the
           Key
           ,
           with
           which
           it
           is
           unlockt
           ,
           and
           opened
           .
           Wherefore
           that
           saying
           of
           
             Irenaeus
          
           is
           true
           :
           
           
             Every
             Prophecy
             before
             it
             is
             fulfill'd
             is
             a
             Riddle
             .
             But
             when
             it
             is
             fulfill'd
             ,
             it
             hath
             a
             plain
             exposition
             ,
             and
             understanding
             of
             it self
             .
          
           These
           three
           things
           ,
           as
           in
           all
           holy
           Prophecies
           ,
           so
           in
           the
           Divine
           
             Revelation
             ,
          
           may
           be
           joyned
           together
           ,
           and
           namely
           in
           this
           piece
           thereof
           ,
           which
           now
           according
           to
           my
           Ability
           I
           am
           about
           to
           Illustrate
           ,
           and
           at
           this
           day
           too
           ,
           Wherein
           to
           the
           light
           of
           the
           Gospel
           there
           is
           added
           a
           great
           
             Catastrophe
             ,
          
           or
           
             Issue
             ,
          
           of
           many
           things
           foretold
           by
           God
           himself
           ;
           except
           indeed
           any
           one
           happily
           chance
           to
           be
           bewitched
           with
           a
           prejudicate
           opinion
           .
           Let
           us
           set
           sail
           therefore
           in
           the
           Name
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           comfort
           the
           desolation
           of
           
             Germany
          
           with
           this
           pious
           meditation
           .
        
      
       
       
         
           Revelation
           ,
           
             Chap.
          
           20.
           
        
         
           ANd
           I
           saw
           an
           Angel
           come
           down
           from
           heaven
           ,
           having
           the
           Key
           of
           the
           bottomelesse
           pit
           ,
           and
           a
           great
           chain
           in
           his
           hand
           .
        
         
           
             2.
             
          
           And
           he
           laid
           hold
           on
           the
           Dragon
           ,
           that
           old
           Serpent
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           devill
           and
           Satan
           ,
           and
           bound
           him
           a
           thousand
           yeers
           .
        
         
           
             3.
             
          
           And
           cast
           him
           into
           the
           bottomlesse
           pit
           ,
           and
           shut
           him
           up
           ,
           and
           set
           a
           seal
           upon
           him
           ,
           that
           he
           should
           deceive
           the
           Nations
           no
           more
           ,
           till
           the
           thousand
           yeers
           should
           be
           fulfilled
           :
           and
           after
           that
           he
           must
           be
           loosed
           a
           little
           season
           .
        
         
           
             4.
             
          
           And
           I
           saw
           thrones
           ,
           and
           they
           sate
           upon
           them
           ,
           and
           judgement
           was
           given
           unto
           them
           :
           And
           I
           saw
           the
           souls
           of
           them
           that
           were
           beheaded
           for
           the
           witnesse
           of
           Iesus
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           Word
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           which
           had
           not
           worshipped
           the
           beast
           ,
           neither
           his
           image
           ,
           neither
           had
           received
           his
           mark
           upon
           their
           foreheads
           ,
           or
           in
           their
           hands
           ,
           and
           they
           lived
           and
           reigned
           with
           Christ
           a
           thousand
           y●ers
           .
        
         
           
             5.
             
          
           But
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           dead
           lived
           not
           again
           untill
           the
           thousand
           yeers
           were
           finished
           .
           This
           is
           the
           first
           resurrection
           .
        
         
           
             6.
             
          
           Bless●d
           and
           holy
           is
           he
           that
           hath
           part
           in
           the
           first
           resurrection
           :
           on
           such
           the
           second
           death
           hath
           no
           power
           ,
           but
           th●y
           shall
           be
           Priests
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           of
           Chr●st
           ,
           and
           shall
           reign
           with
           him
           a
           thousand
           yeers
           .
        
         
           
             7.
             
          
           And
           wh●n
           the
           thousand
           yeers
           are
           expired
           ,
           Satan
           shall
           be
           loosed
           out
           of
           his
           prison
           .
        
         
           
             8.
             
          
           And
           shall
           goe
           out
           to
           deceive
           the
           Nations
           ,
           which
           are
           in
           the
           four
           quarters
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           Gog
           and
           Magog
           ,
           to
           gather
           them
           together
           to
           battell
           :
           the
           number
           of
           whom
           is
           as
           the
           sand
           of
           the
           Sea
           .
        
         
           
             9.
             
          
           And
           th●y
           went
           up
           on
           the
           breadth
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           and
           compassed
           the
           campe
           of
           the
           Saints
           about
           ,
           an●●he
           beloved
           Citie
           :
           and
           fire
           came
           down
           from
           God
           out
           of
           heaven
           ,
           and
           devoured
           them
           .
        
         
           
             10.
             
          
           And
           the
           d●vill
           that
           deceived
           them
           was
           cast
           into
           the
           lake
           of
           fire
           and
           brimstone
           ,
           where
           the
           beast
           and
           the
           false
           Prophet
           
             are
             ,
          
           and
           shall
           be
           tormented
           day
           and
           night
           for
           ever
           and
           ever
           .
        
         
           
             11.
             
          
           And
           I
           saw
           a
           great
           white
           Throne
           ,
           and
           him
           that
           sate
           on
           it
           ,
           from
           whose
           face
           the
           earth
           and
           the
           heaven
           fled
           away
           ,
           and
           there
           was
           found
           no
           place
           for
           them
           .
        
         
         
           
             12.
             
          
           And
           I
           saw
           the
           dead
           ,
           small
           and
           great
           stand
           before
           God
           ,
           and
           the
           books
           were
           opened
           :
           and
           another
           book
           was
           opened
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           
             Book
          
           of
           life
           ▪
           and
           the
           dead
           were
           judged
           out
           of
           those
           things
           which
           were
           written
           in
           the
           books
           ,
           according
           to
           their
           works
           .
        
         
           
             13.
             
          
           And
           the
           sea
           gave
           up
           the
           dead
           which
           were
           in
           it
           :
           and
           death
           and
           hell
           delivered
           up
           the
           dead
           which
           were
           in
           them
           :
           and
           they
           were
           judged
           every
           man
           according
           to
           their
           works
           .
        
         
           
             14.
             
          
           And
           death
           and
           hell
           were
           cast
           into
           the
           lake
           of
           fire
           ▪
           this
           is
           the
           second
           death
           .
        
         
           
             15.
             
          
           And
           whosoever
           was
           not
           found
           written
           in
           the
           book
           of
           life
           ,
           was
           cast
           into
           the
           lake
           of
           fire
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         
           PROLEGOMENA
           ,
           OR
           THE
           PREFACE
           ,
           Concerning
           The
           
             Author
             ,
          
           and
           
             Subject
          
           of
           this
           Chapter
           ,
           and
           the
           
             Connexion
          
           thereof
           ,
           with
           the
           foregoing
           ,
           and
           following
           Chapters
           .
        
         
           
             §
             
               1.
               
            
             Of
             the
             
               Author
            
             of
             this
             Chapter
             .
          
           
             THe
             Principall
             Author
             of
             this
             Chapter
             is
             the
             same
             ,
             who
             is
             Author
             of
             the
             whole
             Book
             ,
             namely
             
               Iesus
               Christ
            
             ;
             who
             ,
             as
             a
             faithfull
             Steward
             of
             our
             Salvation
             ,
             received
             this
             Revelation
             from
             God
             the
             Father
             ,
             and
             sent
             the
             same
             by
             his
             Angel
             to
             
               Iohn
            
             the
             Evangelist
             ,
             
               Revel.
            
             1.1
             .
             Wherefore
             the
             
               Principall
               Author
            
             is
             the
             
               Spirit
            
             of
             God
             ;
             the
             Minister
             or
             Messenger
             partly
             the
             
               Angel
               ,
            
             partly
             
               Iohn
               ,
            
             who
             
               Chap.
            
             1.1
             and
             4.
             setteth
             down
             his
             name
             
             in
             generall
             ;
             but
             a
             little
             after
             in
             the
             ninth
             Verse
             ,
             restraining
             that
             generality
             ,
             He
             doth
             as
             it
             were
             with
             his
             finger
             point
             at
             it
             .
             
               I
            
             John
             ,
             
               your
               brother
               ,
               and
               companion
               in
               the
               affliction
               ,
               and
               Kingdom
               ,
               and
               patience
            
             
               *
            
             
               which
               is
               in
            
             Jesus
             Christ
             ▪
             
               was
               in
               the
               Island
               ,
               which
               is
               called
            
             Patmos
             .
             The
             history
             which
             
               Eusebius
            
             relates
             ,
             tells
             us
             ,
             That
             
               Iohn
            
             the
             Evangelist
             ,
             and
             Apostlé
             ,
             was
             banished
             into
             the
             Island
             of
             
               Patmos
            
             by
             
               Domitian
               .
            
             Whence
             it
             is
             collected
             ,
             that
             
               Iohn
            
             the
             Evangelist
             ,
             and
             Apostle
             ,
             was
             Gods
             Po●-man
             in
             the
             delivery
             of
             this
             Prophecy
             ;
             and
             hence
             ,
             That
             the
             Authority
             of
             this
             Book
             ,
             and
             so
             of
             this
             Chapter
             ,
             which
             we
             intend
             to
             expound
             ,
             is
             
               Divine
               .
            
             Wherefore
             deservedly
             ,
             we
             most
             highly
             esteem
             of
             this
             
               Revelation
               ,
            
             as
             a
             part
             of
             Scripture
             ,
             which
             hath
             God
             for
             it's
             
               Author
               .
            
             But
             especially
             this
             Prophecy
             ought
             in
             this
             respect
             to
             be
             welcome
             to
             us
             ,
             because
             it
             contains
             the
             last
             Divine
             Revelation
             of
             Gods
             will
             ;
             after
             which
             ,
             no
             Prophecy
             following
             is
             to
             be
             expected
             ;
             and
             because
             this
             Book
             is
             very
             profita●le
             in
             this
             Age
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             lively
             performance
             of
             things
             hitherto
             abstruse
             and
             concealed
             ,
             is
             presented
             before
             our
             eyes
             .
          
        
         
           
             §
             
               2.
               
            
             Of
             the
             
               Subject
            
             of
             this
             Chapter
             .
          
           
             THis
             Chap●er
             discourseth
             of
             the
             singular
             happinesse
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             both
             under
             it's
             
               Warfare
               ,
            
             and
             
               Triumph
               .
            
             The
             singular
             happinesse
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             during
             it's
             warfare
             ,
             or
             being
             
               militant
               ,
            
             is
             let
             down
             in
             three
             respects
             ;
             1.
             
             In
             its
             security
             from
             the
             hostile
             incursions
             of
             the
             wicked
             for
             a
             1000
             yeers
             .
             2.
             
             In
             the
             resurrection
             of
             the
             
               Martyrs
            
             before
             the
             generall
             resurrection
             .
             3.
             
             In
             the
             wonderfull
             d●liv●rance
             of
             the
             godly
             ,
             from
             the
             last
             persecution
             of
             the
             wicked
             ,
             which
             shall
             happen
             after
             those
             
               thousand
            
             yeers
             .
             The
             happinesse
             of
             the
             Church
             
               Triumphant
               ,
            
             is
             h●re
             described
             so
             farre
             forth
             ,
             as
             the
             beginning
             of
             its
             Triumph
             in
             the
             last
             
               Iudgement
               .
            
             That
             these
             things
             may
             be
             made
             more
             plain
             ,
             I
             will
             from
             the
             very
             beginning
             ,
             make
             a
             repetition
             of
             the
             state
             of
             the
             Church
             here
             upon
             earth
             ;
             and
             I
             will
             say
             something
             briefly
             ,
             concerning
             the
             State
             and
             condition
             thereof
             ,
             in
             
               Heaven
               .
            
             The
             State
             of
             the
             Church
             hereupon
             earth
             ,
             was
             either
             that
             
               before
               the
               fall
            
             of
             the
             first
             man
             ,
             and
             that
             was
             wholly
             
               Legall
            
             ;
             or
             that
             
               after
               the
               fall
               ,
            
             and
             this
             is
             wholly
             
               Evangelicall
               .
            
             Again
             ,
             The
             State
             of
             the
             Church
             after
             the
             fall
             is
             ,
             either
             
               Internall
               ,
            
             and
             perpetuall
             ;
             
             or
             
               Externall
               ,
            
             and
             temporall
             .
             The
             State
             of
             the
             Church
             
               Internall
            
             and
             perpetuall
             ,
             consists
             in
             the
             Union
             and
             Communion
             with
             
               Christ
               ,
            
             as
             also
             in
             the
             enlightning
             ,
             and
             guidance
             of
             the
             
               Spirit
               ,
               Isa.
            
             54.5
             .
             
               Hos.
            
             2.15
             ,
             19
             ,
             20.
             
             
               Iob.
            
             6.56
             .
             1
             
               Cor.
            
             6
             17.
             
             
               Eph.
            
             5.30
             .
             1
             
               Cor.
            
             10.17
             .
             2
             
               Cor.
            
             11.2
             .
             
               Eph.
            
             3.6
             .
             
               Gal.
            
             3.28
             .
             
               C●l
               .
            
             3.15
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Church
             is
             one
             ,
             Holy
             ,
             and
             Invincible
             .
             The
             
               Externall
               ,
            
             or
             temporall
             State
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             is
             as
             well
             under
             the
             
               Crosse
            
             and
             Persecution
             ;
             as
             
               Light
            
             and
             
               Comfort
               ,
            
             or
             refreshing
             :
             which
             two
             changes
             the
             Church
             undergoes
             here
             on
             earth
             by
             turns
             ,
             as
             well
             under
             the
             
               Old
               Testament
               ,
            
             as
             the
             
               New
               ,
            
             and
             that
             either
             more
             ,
             or
             lesse
             .
             For
             
               Adam
               ,
            
             and
             
               Eve
               ,
            
             after
             their
             most
             grievous
             fall
             ,
             were
             raised
             up
             again
             by
             the
             most
             sweet
             promise
             of
             the
             Gospel
             ;
             and
             after
             they
             had
             begot
             
               Cain
            
             and
             
               Abel
               ,
            
             and
             their
             Sisters
             ,
             they
             were
             comforted
             with
             this
             Infancy
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             ,
             and
             first
             foundation
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             But
             no
             small
             grief
             followed
             hard
             upon
             this
             joy
             ,
             when
             as
             
               Cain
            
             slew
             his
             brother
             
               Abel
               .
            
             However
             this
             breach
             was
             made
             up
             again
             in
             
               Seth
               ,
            
             whose
             posterity
             propagated
             the
             Church
             ,
             although
             not
             without
             grievous
             persecution
             by
             the
             race
             of
             
               Cain
               ,
            
             which
             had
             an
             end
             put
             unto
             it
             by
             the
             del●ge
             in
             the
             yeer
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             1656.
             
             From
             whence
             the
             Church
             was
             enlarged
             to
             the
             yeer
             1757
             ,
             without
             any
             notable
             persecution
             ,
             which
             at
             that
             time
             the
             building
             of
             the
             Tower
             of
             
               Babel
            
             brought
             ,
             and
             hence
             sprung
             the
             division
             of
             Languages
             .
             In
             the
             yeer
             of
             the
             world
             2023
             ,
             the
             Church
             was
             contracted
             into
             the
             Posterity
             of
             
               Abraham
            
             only
             ;
             And
             here
             begin
             the
             four
             hundred
             and
             thirty
             yeers
             ,
             dwelling
             of
             the
             
               Israelites
            
             in
             
               Egypt
            
             ;
             where
             
               Abraham
               ,
               Isaac
               ,
               Iacob
               ,
            
             and
             
               Ioseph
               ,
            
             underwent
             manifold
             changes
             both
             of
             prosperity
             ,
             and
             affliction
             .
             And
             their
             posterity
             after
             the
             death
             of
             
               Ioseph
            
             was
             detained
             under
             a
             most
             horrid
             slavery
             ,
             from
             the
             yeer
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             2360
             ,
             even
             to
             yeer
             2453
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             
               Israelites
            
             were
             brought
             out
             of
             
               Egypt
               .
            
             From
             which
             time
             to
             the
             yeer
             2493
             ,
             they
             had
             experience
             of
             divers
             blessings
             and
             judgements
             of
             God
             in
             the
             Wildernesse
             .
             Now
             after
             they
             were
             brought
             into
             the
             Land
             of
             
               Canaan
            
             ▪
             which
             happened
             in
             the
             yeer
             of
             the
             world
             2493.
             
             
               Iosuah
            
             with
             very
             good
             successe
             ,
             for
             the
             six
             first
             yeers
             conquered
             the
             Canaanites
             ,
             vanquishing
             one
             and
             thirty
             Kings
             .
             After
             the
             death
             of
             
               Iosuah
               ,
            
             to
             the
             yeer
             of
             the
             world
             2879
             ,
             the
             
               Isra●lites
            
             were
             vexed
             with
             divers
             slaveries
             and
             persecutions
             ,
             and
             rescued
             from
             the
             same
             by
             severall
             Judges
             ,
             
             namely
             
               Deborah
               ,
               Ged●on
               ,
               Samson
               ,
            
             and
             
               Samuel
               .
            
             And
             now
             the
             Kingly
             power
             being
             established
             in
             the
             dayes
             of
             
               Saul
               ,
            
             or
             yeer
             2879
             ,
             the
             Church
             presently
             in
             the
             very
             beginning
             thereof
             ▪
             suffered
             persecution
             from
             
               Saul
            
             himself
             .
             After
             that
             it
             underwent
             divers
             chance●
             ,
             and
             changes
             ;
             namely
             ,
             under
             
               David
            
             and
             
               Solomon
            
             it
             exceedingly
             flourished
             ;
             under
             
               Rehoboam
            
             it
             suffered
             a
             great
             los●e
             ,
             ten
             Tribes
             falling
             of
             to
             
               Ieroboam
               .
            
             By
             occasion
             whereof
             ,
             a
             most
             sad
             rent
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             happened
             ,
             the
             Church
             by
             little
             and
             little
             degenerating
             in
             
               Israel
               ,
            
             whose
             ten
             Tribes
             under
             
               Hoshea
            
             in
             the
             yee●
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             3228.
             were
             led
             away
             into
             a
             most
             grievous
             ,
             and
             yet
             continuing
             captivity
             ,
             as
             farre
             as
             the
             
               Col.
               hi
               ,
               Iberi
               .
            
             &c.
             As
             for
             the
             Church
             remaining
             in
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             
               Iuda
               ,
            
             it
             had
             severall
             entercourses
             of
             deformation
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             reformation
             ,
             of
             calamities
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             victories
             ,
             unto
             the
             yeer
             3350.
             in
             which
             began
             the
             
               Babylonian
            
             captivity
             ,
             continuing
             Lxx
             yeers
             .
             In
             the
             yeer
             3419
             ,
             
               Cyrus
            
             released
             this
             captivity
             giving
             the
             
               Iews
            
             free
             leave
             to
             return
             into
             their
             Country
             ,
             and
             to
             establish
             their
             own
             Laws
             ,
             and
             Religion
             ,
             as
             farre
             as
             their
             own
             Country
             did
             reach
             .
             But
             not
             withstanding
             ,
             this
             Priviledge
             of
             using
             their
             own
             Laws
             ,
             was
             many
             wayes
             interrupted
             untill
             the
             yeer
             3527
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             for
             107
             yeers
             .
             From
             which
             time
             to
             the
             yeer
             3781.
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             
               Iews
            
             enjoyed
             happy
             ,
             and
             
               Halcyonian
            
             dayes
             under
             the
             
               Persians
            
             ;
             and
             in
             like
             manner
             under
             
               Alexander
            
             the
             
               Great
               .
            
             But
             under
             the
             
               Successors
            
             of
             
               Alexander
               ,
            
             especially
             the
             Kings
             of
             
               Syria
               ,
            
             they
             were
             divers
             wayes
             afflicted
             ,
             untill
             in
             the
             yeer
             of
             the
             world
             3783
             ,
             and
             so
             downward
             ;
             the
             
               Maccabees
            
             fought
             with
             happy
             successe
             for
             their
             Religion
             and
             possessions
             .
             From
             the
             yeer
             3887.
             
             
               Iudea
            
             was
             laid
             wast
             ,
             and
             severall
             wayes
             oppressed
             by
             the
             
               Romans
               ,
            
             and
             
               Parthians
               ,
            
             so
             that
             the
             whole
             State
             thereof
             was
             exceedingly
             troubled
             .
          
           
             Let
             us
             now
             come
             to
             the
             estate
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             
               New
               Testament
               ,
            
             which
             we
             will
             divide
             into
             
               four
            
             periods
             .
             The
             
               first
            
             period
             is
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             godly
             
               Iews
            
             in
             
               Iudea
               ,
            
             from
             the
             time
             of
             
               Iohn
            
             the
             
               Baptist
               ,
            
             to
             the
             
               Councell
               of
               Ierusalem
            
             ;
             that
             is
             ,
             from
             the
             yeer
             of
             the
             world
             3948.
             to
             the
             fiftieth
             yeer
             of
             
               Christ
               .
            
          
           
             In
             all
             which
             space
             of
             time
             ,
             
               Christ
            
             was
             born
             ,
             
               Baptism
            
             instituted
             ,
             
               Iohn
            
             put
             to
             death
             ,
             the
             twelve
             
               Apostles
               ,
            
             and
             Lxx.
             
               Disciples
            
             called
             by
             
               Christ
               ;
               Christ
            
             himself
             suffered
             ,
             the
             
               Holy
               Ghost
            
             was
             powred
             out
             
             upon
             the
             
               Apostles
            
             ;
             the
             
               Apostles
            
             were
             whipped
             for
             their
             bold
             preaching
             of
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             
               Christ
               ,
            
             &c.
             
          
           
             The
             
               se●ond
            
             period
             is
             ,
             of
             the
             Church
             spread
             over
             the
             whole
             world
             ,
             and
             contains
             the
             calling
             and
             conversion
             of
             most
             nations
             ,
             from
             the
             51.
             yeer
             of
             
               Christ
               ,
            
             to
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             
               thousand
               yeers
               .
            
             And
             this
             period
             hath
             
               four
            
             branches
             .
          
           
             
               I.
               Under
               the
               
                 Henth●n
                 Roman
                 Emperours
                 ,
              
               till
               
                 Const●ntine
              
               the
               
                 Great
                 's
              
               time
               ,
               wherein
               the
               Church
               was
               propagated
               under
               divers
               Persecutions
               ,
               of
               which
               ,
               tenne
               were
               more
               notable
               ,
               from
               the
               64.
               yeer
               of
               Christ
               ,
               to
               the
               3●3
               .
            
             
               II.
               Under
               
                 Christian
                 Emperours
                 ,
              
               from
               
                 Constantine
              
               the
               
                 Great
                 ,
              
               to
               
                 Phocas
              
               ;
               in
               which
               time
               ,
               it
               was
               adorned
               with
               divers
               priviledg●s
               by
               
                 Constantine
              
               the
               
                 Great
                 ,
              
               and
               other
               godly
               Princes
               :
               yet
               so
               ,
               That
               notwithstanding
               it
               felt
               great
               persecutions
               by
               the
               
                 Arians
                 ,
              
               by
               
                 Iulian
                 ,
              
               by
               the
               
                 Persians
                 ,
                 Sandals
                 ,
                 Goth●●
                 ,
              
               &c.
               to
               the
               yeer
               of
               
                 Christ
                 ,
              
               606.
               
            
             
               III.
               Under
               the
               
                 Popes
              
               of
               
                 Rome
                 ,
              
               while
               they
               extended
               their
               power
               farre
               and
               wide
               ,
               from
               the
               yeer
               of
               
                 Christ
              
               606
               ,
               to
               the
               yeer
               1517
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               from
               
                 Boniface
              
               the
               
                 third
              
               ▪
               to
               
                 Leo
              
               the
               
                 tenth
                 .
              
               In
               all
               which
               time
               the
               
                 Church
              
               was
               most
               miserably
               pressed
               ,
               and
               only
               not
               quite
               oppressed
               ,
               partly
               by
               the
               
                 Sarazens
              
               and
               
                 Turks
              
               in
               the
               
                 East
                 ,
              
               partly
               by
               the
               
                 Popes
              
               of
               
                 Rome
              
               in
               the
               
                 West
                 .
              
            
             
               IV.
               Under
               the
               
                 Popes
              
               of
               
                 Rome
                 ,
              
               now
               perceiving
               an
               inclination
               and
               decay
               of
               their
               Kingdom
               ,
               from
               the
               yeer
               of
               
                 Christ
              
               1517
               ,
               to
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               
                 thousand
              
               yeers
               .
               What
               the
               condition
               of
               the
               
                 Church
              
               hath
               been
               ,
               and
               now
               is
               ,
               since
               the
               yeer
               1517
               ,
               to
               this
               prsent
               ,
               is
               known
               unto
               us
               partly
               from
               Histories
               ,
               partly
               from
               our
               own
               notice
               ,
               and
               remembrance
               .
               What
               it
               shall
               be
               hereafter
               ,
               from
               the
               time
               wherein
               we
               write
               this
               ,
               to
               the
               beginning
               of
               the
               1000.
               yeers
               ,
               we
               cannot
               in
               particular
               determine
               .
               But
               this
               we
               know
               in
               generall
               ,
               That
               the
               
                 Church
              
               is
               to
               be
               purged
               ,
               purified
               ,
               and
               cleansed
               ,
               by
               this
               persecution
               ,
               which
               at
               this
               day
               it
               suffers
               ;
               That
               by
               this
               means
               it
               may
               be
               by
               little
               and
               little
               prepared
               for
               that
               great
               
                 Reformation
                 ,
              
               which
               the
               
                 Epocha
              
               ;
               or
               
                 Account
              
               of
               those
               
                 thousand
                 yeers
              
               shall
               bring
               .
            
          
           
             The
             
               third
            
             Period
             of
             the
             
               Church
            
             of
             the
             
               New
               Testament
               ,
            
             is
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             
               thousand
               yeers
               ,
            
             to
             the
             end
             thereof
             .
             And
             it
             shall
             contain
             ,
             as
             well
             the
             
               Martyrs
            
             that
             shall
             then
             rise
             ,
             as
             the
             
               Nations
            
             not
             yet
             
               converted
               ,
            
             and
             the
             
               Iews
            
             ;
             and
             it
             shall
             be
             
               free
               from
               persecutions
               .
            
             
             Which
             
               four
            
             things
             ,
             because
             they
             are
             called
             into
             question
             ,
             are
             the
             more
             at
             large
             to
             be
             proved
             .
             And
             first
             of
             all
             ,
             for
             the
             
               Resurrection
               of
               the
               Martyrs
               ,
            
             The
             truth
             thereof
             is
             demonstrated
             
               *
            
             to
             the
             eye
             ,
             in
             a
             manner
             out
             of
             the
             20
             of
             the
             
               Revelation
               ,
            
             the
             5.
             verse
             .
          
           
             Then
             for
             the
             
               Conversion
               of
               the
               Gentiles
               ,
            
             which
             are
             not
             yet
             called
             into
             the
             Church
             ,
             the
             
               Apostle
            
             describeth
             it
             most
             lively
             ,
             
               Rom.
            
             I●
             .
             25
             .
             where
             he
             plainly
             teacheth
             us
             ,
             That
             the
             
               fulnesse
               of
               the
               Gentiles
            
             is
             to
             be
             gathered
             to
             the
             Church
             .
             Hitherto
             also
             appertaineth
             that
             which
             we
             read
             
               Gen.
            
             48.19
             .
             that
             
               the
               seed
               of
            
             Ephraim
             
               shall
               become
               a
               multitude
               of
               Nations
               .
            
             For
             it
             cannot
             be
             interpreted
             of
             the
             numerous
             off-Spring
             ,
             of
             
               Ephraim
            
             ;
             for
             therein
             the
             Tribe
             of
             
               Iudah
            
             especially
             excelled
             .
             
             And
             the
             word
             
               Gojim
            
             is
             most
             properly
             meant
             by
             the
             
               Heathens
               .
            
             Therefore
             this
             is
             the
             meaning
             ,
             
               Out
               of
            
             Ephraim
             
               shall
               descend
               in
               numerable
               Nations
               ,
               which
               in
               their
               time
               shall
               flow-in
               plentifully
               to
               the
               Gospel
               .
            
             Moreover
             ,
             Christ
             
               Luk.
            
             21.24
             teacheth
             us
             that
             
               the
               times
               of
               the
               Gentiles
               shall
               be
               fulfilled
               .
            
             So
             
               Gen.
            
             17.4
             ,
             5.
             
             God
             promiseth
             
               Abraham
               ,
            
             that
             he
             should
             
               become
               a
               father
               of
               a
               multitude
               of
               Nations
            
             ;
             and
             
               Gen.
            
             18.18
             .
             
               that
               in
               him
               all
               the
               Nations
               of
               the
               Earth
               should
               be
               bl●ssed
               .
            
             To
             these
             places
             you
             may
             adde
             ,
             
               Psal.
            
             22.28
             .
             
               Matth.
            
             24.14
             .
             and
             
               Revel.
            
             12.5
             .
             
             If
             any
             one
             should
             object
             ,
             that
             the
             
               Conversion
            
             of
             the
             
               Gentiles
            
             was
             a
             little
             after
             the
             first
             coming
             of
             
               Christ
            
             ;
             He
             must
             know
             that
             at
             that
             time
             all
             nations
             were
             not
             called
             .
             
             Therefore
             we
             must
             understand
             a
             double
             
               Conversion
            
             or
             calling
             of
             the
             
               Gentiles
               ,
            
             a
             
               former
               ,
            
             and
             a
             
               latter
               .
            
             The
             
               former
            
             was
             in
             the
             time
             of
             the
             
               Apostles
               ,
            
             and
             their
             Successors
             .
             This
             
               latter
            
             hath
             not
             been
             as
             yet
             ,
             but
             it
             shall
             be
             at
             length
             ,
             a
             little
             before
             the
             Conversion
             of
             the
             
               Iews
               .
            
             So
             that
             these
             
               two
               Conversions
            
             are
             joyned
             together
             ,
             
               Isai.
            
             11.12
             .
             
               Zach.
            
             2.10
             ,
             &c.
             For
             the
             maintaining
             of
             this
             opinion
             see
             among
             others
             ,
             
               Iustus
               Heurnius
               De
               Legatione
               Evangelicâ
               ad
               Indos
               capessendâ
               ,
            
             
             and
             
               Kepler
               De
               Stellâ
               novâ
               Serpentarii
               ,
            
             where
             
               fol.
            
             206.
             he
             writs
             ,
             That
             all
             the
             contentions
             which
             are
             at
             this
             day
             among
             
               Christians
               ,
            
             and
             the
             difference
             of
             their
             worships
             ,
             tends
             to
             this
             ,
             That
             from
             their
             mutuall
             destroying
             one
             another
             ,
             an
             occasion
             may
             arise
             ,
             on
             one
             side
             of
             converting
             the
             
               Indians
               ,
            
             on
             another
             of
             converting
             the
             
               Iews
               ,
            
             and
             
               Turks
               .
            
             Now
             let
             us
             enter
             into
             consideration
             of
             the
             
               conversion
            
             of
             the
             
               Iews
               .
            
          
           
             The
             promises
             thereof
             ,
             are
             
               Gen.
            
             49.18
             ,
             19.
             
             
               Num.
            
             23.23
             .
             
               Deut.
            
             30.3
             ,
             6
             ,
             8.
             and
             
               chap.
            
             32.
             from
             the
             19.
             to
             the
             43.
             
             
               Isai.
            
             11.11
             ,
             12.
             and
             
             
               chap.
            
             43.5
             .
             and
             so
             forward
             ,
             
               chap.
            
             45.22
             ,
             25.
             
               chap.
            
             59.20
             ,
             21.
             
             
               Iere.
            
             16.14
             .
             
               chap.
            
             23.3
             ,
             4.
             
               chap.
            
             31.31
             ,
             32
             ,
             33
             ,
             34.
             
             
               Ezech.
            
             36.26
             .
             and
             forward
             ,
             
             
               Hos.
            
             1.11
             .
             
               chap.
            
             3.4
             ,
             5
             
               Mich.
            
             2.12
             .
             
               chap.
            
             4.6
             .
             and
             forward
             ,
             
               chap.
            
             5.5
             ,
             6
             ,
             7.
             
             
               Zeph.
            
             3.11
             ,
             12
             ,
             13
             ,
             19
             ,
             20.
             
             
               Amos
            
             9.14
             ,
             15.
             
             
               Zach.
            
             11.16
             .
             
               Rom.
            
             11.25
             ,
             26
             ,
             27.
             2
             
               Cor.
            
             3.16
             .
             
               Matth.
            
             23.39
             .
             
               Luk.
            
             21.24
             .
             The
             explications
             of
             which
             places
             ,
             look
             for
             in
             the
             following
             questions
             ,
             and
             almost
             every where
             in
             the
             author
             cited
             in
             the
             
               Margine
               .
            
             And
             to
             them
             adde
             these
             
               two
               reasons
            
             ;
             1
             ;
             The
             
               Iews
            
             wander
             to
             and
             fro
             through
             the
             whole
             world
             dispersed
             ,
             scattered
             ▪
             and
             banished
             from
             their
             own
             ayr
             and
             soil
             .
             God
             therefore
             without
             doubt
             reserveth
             them
             for
             some
             great
             ,
             and
             admirable
             work
             .
             2.
             
             
               Christ
            
             being
             born
             of
             the
             
               Iews
               ,
            
             he
             is
             promised
             unto
             them
             with
             very
             many
             and
             most
             glorious
             promises
             .
             Therefore
             it
             is
             not
             to
             be
             beleeved
             ,
             that
             they
             should
             not
             at
             some
             time
             or
             other
             acknowledge
             him
             as
             the
             
               Messias
               .
            
             Neither
             can
             you
             object
             that
             the
             
               Iews
            
             were
             converted
             in
             the
             time
             of
             
               Christ
               ,
            
             and
             the
             
               Apostles
               .
            
             For
             they
             were
             but
             the
             first
             fruits
             of
             the
             
               Iews
               .
            
             And
             that
             
               Conversion
            
             was
             but
             in
             part
             onely
             .
             See
             concerning
             this
             Argument
             
               Iustus
               Heurnius
               ,
            
             in
             his
             Book
             before
             cited
             ,
             who
             handles
             it
             most
             accurately
             ,
             and
             is
             of
             opinion
             ,
             that
             this
             order
             shall
             happen
             in
             the
             
               Reconciliation
            
             of
             the
             
               Iews
               .
            
             That
             in
             the
             first
             place
             those
             
               ten
               Tribes
            
             ;
             which
             were
             carried
             away
             by
             the
             
               Assyrians
               ,
            
             shall
             be
             converted
             ,
             to
             whom
             afterwards
             the
             Tribes
             of
             
               Iudah
               ,
            
             and
             
               Benjamin
            
             shall
             joyn
             themselves
             .
             In
             the
             same
             place
             also
             he
             conjectureth
             very
             probably
             ,
             That
             the
             converted
             remainder
             of
             the
             
               Iews
               ,
            
             united
             with
             the
             converted
             Church
             of
             the
             
               Heathen
               ,
            
             shall
             resist
             the
             attempts
             of
             the
             adversaries
             of
             GOD
             ,
             and
             beat
             down
             
               Antichrist
               .
            
             Yet
             I
             should
             rather
             suppose
             that
             the
             
               Iews
            
             should
             entertain
             the
             ruine
             of
             
               Antichrist
               ,
            
             as
             an
             occasion
             of
             their
             Conversion
             .
             But
             this
             nothing
             to
             the
             main
             matter
             and
             substance
             of
             the
             question
             .
          
           
             It
             remains
             now
             that
             I
             make
             it
             plain
             that
             this
             Church
             ,
             gathered
             together
             of
             
               Iews
            
             and
             
               Gentiles
               ,
               shall
               be
               freed
               from
               the
               persecutions
               of
               their
               enemies
               .
            
             This
             is
             proved
             out
             of
             
               Deut.
            
             32.40
             ,
             41
             ,
             42
             ,
             43.
             
             
               Psal.
            
             96.
             
             
               Psal.
            
             110.5
             ,
             6
             ,
             7.
             
             
               Isai.
            
             11.1
             ,
             2.3.4
             .
             
               chap.
            
             24.23
             ,
             
               chap.
            
             25.
             
               chap.
            
             26.1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             
               &c.
               chap.
            
             33.20
             ,
             21
             ,
             22
             ,
             23
             ,
             24.
             
               chap.
            
             34.
             from
             the
             1
             ,
             to
             the
             18
             
               verse
               .
               chap.
            
             49.24
             ,
             25
             ,
             26.
             
               chap.
            
             54.14
             ,
             15
             ,
             16
             ,
             17.
             
               chap.
            
             59.16
             ,
             
             17
             ,
             18
             ,
             19
             ,
             20
             ,
             21.
             
               chap.
            
             63.1.2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5
             ,
             6.
             
             
               Dan.
            
             12.1
             
               Ioel
            
             3.1
             ,
             2.9
             ,
             10
             ,
             11
             ,
             12
             ,
             13
             ,
             14.
             
             
               Micah
               .
            
             4.
             the
             whole
             Chapter
             .
             
               Zeph.
            
             3.
             from
             the
             9
             
               ver.
            
             to
             the
             end
             .
             
               Zach.
            
             11
             10.
             to
             the
             17.
             
               chap.
            
             12.1
             .
             to
             the
             9.
             
               chap.
            
             14.
             
             ●
             .
             to
             the
             end
             .
             
               Mal.
            
             4.1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             
               Revel.
            
             14.8.14
             ,
             15
             ,
             16
             ,
             17
             ,
             18
             ,
             19
             ,
             20.
             
               chap.
            
             18.
             quite
             thorow
             .
             
               chap.
            
             19.1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.11
             .
             and
             the
             following
             
               verses
               .
               chap.
            
             20.
             
             In
             these
             places
             is
             described
             the
             setting
             at
             
               liberty
            
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             
               New
               Testament
            
             from
             the
             persecution
             of
             the
             enemies
             of
             the
             
               Gospel
               ,
            
             by
             an
             utter
             overthrow
             of
             them
             ;
             from
             whence
             shall
             arise
             it's
             continuall
             Peace
             ,
             together
             with
             an
             enlightment
             and
             Regeneration
             greater
             then
             now
             it
             hath
             ;
             as
             also
             the
             Majesty
             or
             glory
             thereof
             shall
             appear
             ,
             joyned
             with
             an
             absolute
             and
             sincere
             joy
             .
             All
             which
             are
             here
             and
             there
             to
             be
             found
             in
             the
             places
             quoted
             ,
             and
             are
             unfolded
             in
             the
             following
             
               Questions
               .
            
             And
             this
             is
             that
             happy
             condition
             and
             estate
             of
             the
             
               Church
               ,
            
             which
             shall
             be
             in
             this
             life
             ,
             and
             shall
             last
             for
             a
             thousand
             years
             :
             And
             it
             consisteth
             of
             these
             Parts
             :
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 Of
                 the
                 
                   Resurrection
                   of
                   the
                   Martyrs
                   ,
                
                 and
                 of
                 rheir
                 Reign
                 here
                 upon
                 Earth
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 Of
                 the
                 
                   increase
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                   ,
                
                 and
                 multitude
                 thereof
                 ,
                 through
                 the
                 
                   conversion
                
                 of
                 the
                 
                   Gentiles
                
                 and
                 
                   Iews
                   .
                
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 Of
                 the
                 setting
                 of
                 the
                 Church
                 at
                 
                   liberty
                   from
                   the
                   persecution
                
                 of
                 Enemies
                 thereof
                 ,
                 by
                 the
                 small
                 destruction
                 of
                 them
                 .
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 Of
                 the
                 continuall
                 and
                 lasting
                 
                   peace
                
                 thereof
                 .
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 Of
                 the
                 
                   Reformation
                
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 both
                 in
                 
                   doctrine
                
                 and
                 
                   life
                   .
                
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 Of
                 the
                 
                   Majesty
                   ,
                
                 and
                 great
                 
                   glory
                
                 thereof
                 .
              
               
                 7.
                 
                 Of
                 it
                 's
                 true
                 and
                 sincere
                 
                   Ioy
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
             The
             fourth
             
               Period
            
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             
               New
               Testament
               ,
            
             is
             from
             the
             end
             of
             the
             
               Thousand
               yeares
            
             to
             the
             last
             :
             Judgement
             .
             In
             which
             time
             the
             estate
             of
             the
             Church
             shall
             be
             very
             miserable
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             War
             of
             
               Gog
            
             and
             
               Magog
               ,
            
             unto
             which
             Christ
             shall
             put
             an
             end
             by
             his
             glorious
             coming
             to
             the
             generall
             Judgement
             ,
             
               Revel.
            
             20.3.7
             .
             8
             ▪
             9
             ,
             10.
             
             And
             thus
             we
             have
             described
             the
             estate
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             old
             and
             new
             Testament
             here
             
               upon
               earth
               .
            
          
           
             The
             estate
             of
             the
             Church
             
               in
               heaven
            
             is
             of
             perfect
             glory
             ,
             everlasting
             triumph
             ,
             absolute
             regeneration
             ,
             exact
             illumination
             ,
             and
             unspeakable
             joy
             .
          
           
             And
             this
             is
             the
             full
             
               Doctrine
            
             concerning
             the
             
               Estate
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
            
             which
             we
             thus
             set
             forth
             .
          
           
           
             The
             State
             of
             the
             Church
             is
             either
             
               
                 On
                 Earth
                 
                   
                     Before
                     the
                     fall
                     of
                     man
                     ,
                     fully
                     happy
                     .
                  
                   
                     After
                     the
                     fall
                     ,
                     and
                     is
                     ,
                     either
                     
                       
                         Internall
                         ,
                         perpetuall
                         ,
                         and
                         common
                         to
                         all
                         places
                         ,
                         and
                         times
                         in
                         respect
                         of
                         the
                         Elect
                         in
                         generall
                         .
                      
                       
                         Externall
                         ,
                         temporall
                         ,
                         and
                         proper
                         ,
                         and
                         it
                         is
                         either
                         of
                         the
                         
                           
                             Old
                             Testament
                             under
                             
                               
                                 Patriarches
                                 .
                              
                               
                                 Iudges
                                 .
                              
                               
                                 Kings
                                 .
                              
                               
                                 Divers
                                 kindes
                                 of
                                 Government
                                 after
                                 the
                                 Babylonian
                                 captivity
                                 .
                              
                            
                          
                           
                             New
                             Testament
                             where
                             are
                             4
                             periods
                             
                               
                                 1.
                                 
                                 Of
                                 the
                                 Jews
                                 to
                                 the
                                 yeare
                                 of
                                 Christ
                                 ,
                                 51.
                                 
                              
                               
                                 2.
                                 
                                 Of
                                 the
                                 Gentiles
                                 under
                                 
                                   
                                     Emperours
                                     
                                       
                                         Roman
                                         Heathen
                                         .
                                      
                                       
                                         Christian
                                         ,
                                         untill
                                         
                                           Phocas
                                           .
                                        
                                      
                                    
                                  
                                   
                                     Popes
                                     of
                                     
                                       Rome
                                    
                                     
                                       
                                         Fully
                                         exercising
                                         their
                                         power
                                         .
                                      
                                       
                                         Suffering
                                         some
                                         abatement
                                         thereof
                                         .
                                      
                                    
                                  
                                
                              
                               
                                 3.
                                 
                                 Of
                                 Jews
                                 and
                                 Gentiles
                                 for
                                 a
                                 1000
                                 yeares
                                 .
                              
                               
                                 4.
                                 
                                 Of
                                 the
                                 same
                                 after
                                 those
                                 1000
                                 yeares
                                 finished
                                 .
                              
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 In
                 Heaven
                 ,
                 where
                 is
                 the
                 
                   
                     Beginning
                     of
                     the
                     triumph
                     in
                     the
                     last
                     Judgement
                     .
                  
                   
                     Consummation
                     thereof
                     in
                     life
                     Eternall
                     .
                  
                
              
            
          
           
           
             
               The
               Affections
               of
               this
               manifold
               Estate
               are
               thus
               delineated
               .
            
             
               The
               Estate
               of
               the
               Church
               is
               either
               of
               
                 
                   One
                   kinde
                   ;
                   to
                   wit
                   
                     
                       Onely
                       happy
                       
                         
                           On
                           Earth
                           
                             
                               Before
                               the
                               fall
                               .
                            
                             
                               For
                               the
                               1000.
                               yeers
                               now
                               at
                               hand
                               .
                            
                          
                        
                         
                           In
                           Heaven
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       Onely
                       unhappy
                       by
                       reason
                       of
                       severall
                       persecutions
                       
                         
                           Already
                           past
                           before
                           these
                           1000.
                           yeares
                           .
                        
                         
                           To
                           come
                           after
                           these
                           1000.
                           yeares
                           .
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
                 
                   Divers
                   kindes
                   ;
                   to
                   wit
                   ,
                   partly
                   happy
                   ,
                   partly
                   unhappy
                   ,
                   or
                   temporate
                   ,
                   and
                   lyable
                   to
                   the
                   enterchange
                   of
                   temporall
                   felicity
                   ,
                   or
                   calamity
                   .
                
              
            
          
        
         
         
           
             Of
             the
             Connexion
             of
             this
             Chapter
             with
             the
             former
             .
          
           
             IOHN
             in
             his
             
               Revelation
            
             which
             he
             received
             from
             
               God
               ,
            
             in
             the
             yeare
             of
             
               Christ
            
             94.
             after
             the
             Preface
             ,
             
               chap.
            
             1
             to
             the
             9
             
               verse
               ,
            
             describes
             
               seven
            
             generall
             
               Visions
            
             in
             this
             order
             .
          
           
             The
             
               first
            
             Vision
             is
             of
             the
             seven
             golden
             
               Candlesticks
               ,
            
             and
             of
             so
             many
             
               Starres
               ,
            
             and
             it
             is
             concerning
             the
             present
             and
             future
             estate
             of
             the
             seven
             Churches
             in
             
               Asia
               ,
            
             in
             the
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3
             
               chapters
               .
            
          
           
             The
             
               second
            
             Vision
             is
             of
             the
             Book
             shut
             up
             ,
             and
             signed
             with
             
               seven
               Seals
               ,
            
             in
             the
             4
             ,
             5
             ,
             6
             
               chapters
               .
            
             And
             it
             is
             concerning
             the
             estate
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             new
             Testament
             after
             the
             departure
             of
             
               Iohn
               ,
            
             to
             the
             yeare
             of
             Christ
             606.
             
          
           
             The
             
               third
            
             Vision
             is
             of
             the
             
               seven
               Trumpets
               ,
            
             in
             the
             8
             ,
             9
             ,
             10
             ,
             11
             
               chapters
               ,
            
             and
             it
             is
             concerning
             the
             state
             of
             the
             Church
             from
             the
             year
             of
             Christ
             606
             ,
             to
             the
             year
             1517.
             
          
           
             The
             
               fourth
            
             Vision
             is
             of
             the
             
               woman
            
             bringing
             forth
             a
             childe
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             
               Dragon
               ,
            
             of
             the
             
               Beast
               ,
            
             and
             the
             
               Lamb
               ,
            
             in
             the
             12
             ,
             13
             ,
             14
             
               chapters
               .
            
             And
             it
             is
             partly
             a
             description
             of
             the
             Birth
             of
             
               Christ
               ,
            
             partly
             a
             recapitulation
             and
             exposition
             of
             the
             
               second
            
             and
             
               third
            
             Visions
             ,
             and
             concerning
             the
             estate
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             New
             Testament
             ,
             from
             the
             Nativity
             of
             Christ
             ,
             to
             the
             yeare
             1517.
             
          
           
             The
             
               fifth
            
             Visiion
             is
             of
             the
             
               seven
               Vials
               ,
            
             in
             the
             15
             and
             16
             
               chapters
            
             ;
             of
             which
             the
             three
             former
             are
             poured
             forth
             from
             the
             year
             of
             Christ
             1517
             ,
             to
             the
             year
             1625.
             the
             four
             following
             shall
             be
             poured
             forth
             from
             the
             year
             1625
             ,
             to
             the
             year
             of
             Christ
             1694.
             in
             which
             the
             1000
             years
             seem
             to
             begin
             .
          
           
             The
             
               sixth
            
             Vision
             is
             partly
             of
             the
             
               punishments
               ,
            
             as
             well
             those
             which
             are
             peculiarly
             appointed
             for
             the
             
               Whore
               ,
            
             and
             her
             worshipyers
             ,
             before
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             1000
             years
             ,
             in
             the
             17
             ,
             18
             ,
             19.
             
               chapters
               ,
            
             as
             also
             those
             which
             shall
             be
             inflicted
             upon
             all
             the
             enemies
             of
             the
             Church
             :
             Partly
             of
             the
             
               future
               happinesse
            
             of
             the
             Church
             here
             upon
             earrh
             ,
             in
             the
             20
             
               chapter
               ,
            
             from
             the
             1
             
               uerse
            
             to
             the
             7.
             
             After
             the
             end
             of
             those
             years
             ,
             
               chap.
            
             20.
             the
             7
             ,
             and
             following
             
               verses
               .
            
          
           
             The
             
               seventh
            
             Vision
             is
             of
             the
             Heavenly
             City
             ,
             
               chap.
            
             21
             ▪
             22.
             
          
        
      
       
       
         
           II.
           The
           Sum
           of
           this
           Chapter
           .
        
         
           AFter
           that
           the
           
             Evangelist
          
           hath
           related
           what
           happened
           to
           the
           
             first
             Beast
             ,
          
           and
           the
           
             false
             Prophet
             ,
          
           and
           their
           followers
           ,
           
             chap.
          
           19.
           
             verse
          
           20
           ,
           21.
           
           He
           tells
           you
           now
           what
           happened
           to
           the
           
             Dragon
          
           himself
           .
           For
           the
           
             Mystery
             of
             Iniquity
          
           being
           overthrown
           ,
           and
           due
           punishments
           inflicted
           upon
           the
           first
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           false
           Prophet
           ,
           the
           
             Angel
          
           descends
           from
           Heaven
           ,
           and
           being
           endowed
           with
           great
           Power
           ,
           he
           takes
           order
           that
           the
           
             Dragon
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           
             Satan
             ,
          
           should
           not
           any
           more
           ,
           by
           the
           ministery
           of
           ungodly
           men
           ,
           stirre
           up
           those
           accustomed
           troubles
           in
           the
           Church
           Militant
           .
           Wherefore
           there
           being
           no
           place
           left
           him
           any
           longer
           for
           his
           wonted
           impostures
           ,
           but
           bound
           up
           in
           the
           bottomlesse
           pit
           for
           a
           
             thousand
             years
             ,
          
           the
           Nations
           are
           not
           seduced
           ●y
           him
           ,
           untill
           being
           loosned
           out
           of
           prison
           ,
           he
           again
           makes
           use
           of
           his
           old
           Engines
           and
           Stratagems
           against
           the
           Church
           .
           Therefore
           for
           the
           space
           of
           those
           whole
           1000
           years
           the
           Church
           shall
           enjoy
           outward
           peace
           ,
           the
           
             Martyrs
          
           being
           raised
           from
           the
           dead
           ,
           and
           the
           Nations
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           Jews
           ,
           being
           converted
           to
           the
           Faith
           of
           Christ
           .
           Now
           after
           the
           end
           of
           these
           thousand
           years
           ,
           
             Satan
          
           is
           again
           let
           loose
           ,
           and
           the
           Church
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           Warre
           of
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
             ,
          
           made
           sensible
           of
           more
           grievous
           afflictions
           then
           she
           had
           suffered
           in
           former
           times
           .
           At
           length
           he
           being
           again
           thrust
           into
           the
           bottomlesse
           pit
           ,
           together
           with
           all
           his
           forces
           and
           power
           ,
           the
           Saints
           shall
           for
           ever
           reign
           with
           Christ
           .
        
      
       
         
           III.
           The
           Analysis
           of
           the
           Chapter
           .
        
         
           
             ANd
          
           ]
           that
           is
           ,
           After
           that
           .
           For
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           is
           to
           be
           taken
           transitively
           here
           in
           this
           sense
           :
           After
           that
           I
           had
           seen
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           false
           Prophet
           thrown
           into
           the
           Lake
           burning
           with
           B●imstone
           ,
           and
           the
           rest
           slain
           with
           the
           sword
           of
           him
           that
           sate
           upon
           the
           horse
           ,
           and
           all
           birds
           satisfied
           with
           the
           flesh
           of
           them
           ;
           I
           saw
           these
           things
           which
           now
           follow
           .
           
             I
             saw
          
           ]
           that
           is
           ,
           In
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           or
           extasie
           of
           my
           minde
           .
           Compare
           
             Revel.
          
           1.10
           .
           
             An
             Angel
          
           ]
           A
           good
           Spirit
           ,
           a
           Minister
           of
           the
           Judgements
           of
           God
           ,
           such
           as
           were
           in
           the
           former
           Visions
           .
           Therefore
           neither
           Christ
           ,
           nor
           any
           Doctor
           of
           the
           Church
           is
           here
           to
           
           be
           understood
           .
           
             Coming
             down
             from
             Heaven
          
           ]
           to
           wit
           ,
           The
           third
           Heaven
           ,
           or
           the
           Heaven
           of
           the
           blessed
           .
           
             Who
             had
             the
             Key
             of
             the
             bottomlesse
             pit
          
           ]
           that
           is
           ,
           Who
           had
           received
           power
           from
           God
           to
           open
           and
           shut
           up
           Hell
           .
           We
           must
           not
           therefore
           by
           
             the
             Key
             of
             the
             bottomlesse
             pit
          
           understand
           any
           inward
           light
           or
           knowledge
           kindled
           by
           some
           famous
           Doctor
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           by
           whose
           help
           the
           Scripture
           may
           be
           the
           more
           enlightned
           ;
           or
           the
           profound
           skill
           in
           Divinity
           of
           such
           a
           one
           .
           
             And
             a
             great
             chain
             in
             his
             hand
          
           ]
           The
           great
           power
           of
           binding
           and
           tying
           up
           the
           enemy
           is
           here
           understood
           .
           This
           
             chain
          
           therefore
           is
           falsly
           expounded
           concerning
           the
           Divine
           Writings
           of
           some
           Angel
           ,
           or
           Teacher
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           whose
           coherence
           like
           a
           chain
           may
           be
           such
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           bring
           Heaven
           and
           Earth
           together
           ,
           and
           draw
           the
           hearts
           of
           the
           believers
           up
           unto
           God
           .
        
         
           2.
           
           
             And
             he
             caught
          
           ]
           as
           if
           he
           had
           laid
           hands
           on
           him
           -
           
             The
             Dragon
          
           ]
           That
           monstrous
           ,
           virulent
           ,
           and
           violent
           enemy
           of
           Christ
           and
           Christians
           .
           
             That
             old
             Sorpent
          
           ]
           Who
           by
           his
           winding
           and
           subtle
           kinde
           of
           Oratory
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           seduced
           our
           first
           parents
           ,
           and
           who
           yet
           keeps
           his
           old
           skin
           .
           
             Who
             is
             the
             Devill
          
           ]
           That
           Slanderer
           ,
           and
           Sophister
           ;
           that
           mis-interpreter
           of
           all
           the
           good
           sayings
           and
           deeds
           ,
           as
           well
           of
           God
           and
           Christ
           ,
           as
           holy
           Angels
           and
           men
           .
           
             And
             Satan
          
           ]
           The
           adversary
           ,
           and
           everlasting
           enemy
           of
           God
           ,
           Christ
           ,
           and
           the
           Church
           .
           
             And
             bound
             him
          
           ]
           By
           hindering
           his
           wicked
           enterprises
           and
           attemps
           .
           
             A
             thousand
             yeers
             ]
             Solar
             ,
          
           and
           usuall
           years
           .
        
         
           3.
           
           
             And
             he
             threw
             him
             into
             the
             bottomlesse
             pit
             .
          
           ]
           that
           is
           ,
           With
           mighty
           power
           he
           restrained
           the
           malignity
           of
           Satan
           ,
           thrusting
           him
           down
           into
           Hell
           .
           
             And
          
           
             *
          
           
             shut
             him
             up
          
           ]
           as
           if
           he
           should
           say
           ,
           He
           laid
           him
           not
           onely
           fast
           in
           prison
           ,
           but
           also
           shut
           up
           the
           prison
           upon
           him
           ,
           with
           him
           in
           it
           .
           
             And
             set
             a
             seal
             upn
             hiom
          
           ]
           Here
           are
           four
           acts
           of
           the
           Angel
           ;
           the
           first
           bindes
           Satan
           ,
           then
           cast
           him
           being
           bound
           into
           the
           bottomlesse
           pit
           ,
           then
           he
           shuts
           up
           the
           pit
           ,
           and
           sets
           a
           seal
           upon
           it
           being
           shut
           up
           .
           
             That
             he
             might
             not
             seduce
          
           ]
           to
           wit
           ,
           Partly
           by
           Idolatry
           ,
           Superstition
           ,
           and
           the
           power
           of
           lyes
           ,
           partly
           by
           bringing
           War
           upon
           the
           Church
           .
           
             Any
             more
          
           ]
           As
           he
           had
           formerly
           done
           .
           
             The
             Nations
          
           ]
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           .
           The
           
             Nations
             ,
          
           ●oth
           Jews
           and
           Gentiles
           .
           This
           word
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           in
           Scripture
           properly
           signifies
           the
           Gentiles
           as
           they
           were
           opposed
           to
           the
           Jews
           .
           But
           that
           in
           this
           place
           the
           signification
           of
           this
           word
           is
           extended
           ,
           it
           doth
           hence
           appear
           :
           The
           power
           of
           the
           devill
           
           is
           so
           fast
           bound
           ,
           he
           can
           no
           more
           seduce
           either
           Jews
           or
           Gentiles
           ,
           for
           the
           space
           of
           those
           thousand
           yeers
           .
           Therefore
           this
           word
           is
           to
           be
           taken
           in
           a
           more
           large
           signification
           .
           So
           that
           the
           Conversion
           of
           the
           Jews
           is
           described
           also
           implicitely
           ,
           in
           these
           words
           ,
           
             Till
             the
             thousand
             yeers
             were
             fulfilled
          
           ]
           to
           wit
           ,
           Untill
           the
           whole
           course
           of
           the
           Churches
           hapyinesse
           here
           on
           earth
           were
           finished
           .
           
             And
             after
             that
             he
             must
             be
             loosed
          
           ]
           For
           these
           thousand
           yeers
           being
           ended
           ,
           the
           Devill
           by
           the
           just
           Judgement
           of
           God
           shall
           again
           recover
           his
           power
           ,
           and
           indeed
           a
           farre
           greater
           .
           
             For
             a
             short
             time
          
           ]
           The
           kingdom
           of
           
             Satan
          
           shall
           not
           fulfill
           a
           thousand
           years
           ,
           but
           shall
           remain
           onely
           for
           a
           small
           time
           .
        
         
           4.
           
           
             And
             I
             saw
             Thrones
          
           ]
           Then
           I
           saw
           a
           Judiciall
           Processe
           prepared
           .
           
             And
             they
             sate
             upon
             them
          
           ]
           that
           is
           ,
           Christ
           and
           his
           holy
           Angels
           .
           
             And
             Iudgement
             was
             given
             unto
             th●m
          
           ]
           The
           power
           of
           Judgement
           was
           given
           by
           God
           as
           well
           to
           Christ
           ,
           as
           to
           the
           chief
           Judge
           ,
           as
           to
           the
           Angels
           ,
           as
           it
           were
           his
           
             Assessors
             .
          
           Compare
           
             Mat.
          
           25.31
           .
           
             And
             the
             souls
          
           ]
           I
           saw
           as
           well
           the
           Judges
           ,
           Christ
           and
           his
           Angels
           ,
           as
           also
           them
           that
           were
           to
           be
           judged
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           To
           be
           absolved
           or
           freed
           in
           this
           Judgement
           .
           And
           in
           this
           place
           
             souls
          
           are
           put
           for
           
             men
             .
             Of
             them
             that
             were
             beheaded
          
           ]
           that
           is
           ,
           Of
           them
           that
           were
           slain
           by
           any
           kinde
           of
           torment
           :
           And
           it
           is
           a
           description
           of
           the
           
             Martyrs
             .
             For
             the
             testimony
             of
             Iesus
          
           ]
           Whereby
           they
           witnessed
           concerning
           Christ
           ,
           that
           he
           was
           the
           onely
           
             Iesus
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           The
           onely
           
             Saviour
          
           both
           by
           merit
           and
           efficacy
           .
           
             And
             for
             the
             Word
             of
             God
          
           ]
           that
           is
           ,
           The
           holy
           Scripture
           ,
           which
           they
           had
           learned
           to
           be
           the
           onely
           rule
           both
           of
           faith
           and
           life
           .
           
             And
             which
             had
             not
             worshipped
             the
             B●ast
          
           ]
           that
           is
           ,
           The
           
             Second
             Beast
             ,
          
           of
           which
           mention
           is
           in
           the
           13
           and
           19
           
             chapters
          
           ;
           which
           had
           arrogated
           to
           it self
           the
           divine
           Honours
           of
           Christ
           .
           
             Nor
             his
             Image
          
           ]
           that
           is
           ,
           Those
           Kings
           and
           Princes
           which
           are
           the
           Image
           of
           the
           Beast
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           which
           represent
           the
           Beast
           in
           their
           likenesse
           of
           doctrine
           and
           life
           .
           Compare
           
             Revel.
          
           13.
           
             v.
          
           14.
           
           
             And
             had
             not
             received
             his
             mark
             in
             their
             foreheads
             .
          
           ]
           By
           
             mark
          
           in
           this
           place
           is
           to
           be
           understood
           some
           characteristicall
           note
           ,
           or
           distinguishing
           signe
           or
           token
           ,
           which
           they
           are
           said
           to
           bear
           in
           their
           foreheads
           ,
           who
           publikely
           professe
           themselves
           to
           be
           addicted
           to
           such
           or
           such
           a
           master
           ,
           or
           leader
           .
           
             Or
             in
             their
             hands
          
           ]
           that
           is
           ,
           In
           their
           actions
           ,
           Rites
           ,
           and
           Ceremonies
           .
           In
           these
           words
           therefore
           is
           contained
           a
           concealed
           
           
             antithesis
          
           or
           opposition
           ,
           whereby
           the
           
             Martyrs
          
           are
           declared
           contrary
           to
           the
           slaves
           and
           servants
           of
           the
           
             Beast
          
           ;
           concerning
           whom
           there
           is
           former
           mention
           ,
           
             chap.
          
           13.
           
           ●●
           ▪
           14
           ,
           15
           ,
           16.
           that
           they
           worshipped
           the
           image
           of
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           received
           his
           mark
           on
           their
           right
           hand
           ,
           or
           on
           their
           foreheads
           .
           From
           which
           words
           it
           is
           manifest
           that
           the
           
             Martyrs
          
           are
           here
           described
           by
           the
           distinction
           of
           their
           sufferings
           and
           doings
           .
           
             And
             they
             lived
          
           ]
           that
           is
           .
           They
           
             lived
             again
             ,
          
           as
           may
           be
           gathered
           from
           the
           fifth
           verse
           ,
           
             But
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             dead
             lived
             not
             again
             .
          
           So
           formerly
           ,
           
             Revel.
          
           2.8
           .
           
             Who
             was
             dead
             ,
          
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           ,
           for
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           
             and
             is
             alive
             ,
          
           for
           ,
           
             hath
             lived
             again
             .
          
           Here
           then
           is
           described
           the
           singular
           reward
           which
           the
           Martyrs
           have
           received
           for
           their
           sufferings
           ▪
           and
           extraordinary
           performances
           .
           
             And
             reign●d
          
           ]
           As
           being
           appointed
           here
           on
           earth
           Governours
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           having
           now
           gained
           it
           's
           most
           welcome
           
             Halcyonia
             ,
          
           or
           dayes
           of
           calmnesse
           .
           
             With
             Christ
          
           ]
           Who
           all
           this
           while
           shall
           raign
           visibly
           in
           heaven
           ,
           invisibly
           upon
           earth
           ,
           his
           visible
           Kingdom
           being
           resigned
           to
           the
           Martyrs
           .
           
             For
             those
             thousand
             yeers
          
           ]
           Of
           whi●h
           in
           the
           former
           verse
           ▪
           For
           that
           the
           thousand
           yeers
           of
           Satans
           binding
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           the
           holy
           Martyrs
           with
           Christ
           ,
           are
           the
           same
           ,
           and
           not
           distinct
           ,
           or
           divers
           ,
           the
           Article
           ,
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           ,
           four
           times
           repeated
           in
           the
           3
           ,
           4
           ,
           5
           ,
           6
           ,
           7
           
             verses
             ,
          
           doth
           sufficiently
           declare
           ,
           and
           the
           term
           of
           time
           appointed
           for
           the
           loosing
           of
           Satan
           doth
           fully
           evince
           .
           It
           is
           a
           forced
           Interpretation
           therefore
           that
           some
           do
           make
           ,
           taking
           the
           thousand
           yeers
           in
           the
           4
           and
           6
           verses
           
             tropically
          
           by
           a
           
             Synecdoche
          
           for
           Eternity
           ;
           in
           the
           other
           verses
           ,
           namely
           ,
           3
           ,
           5
           ,
           7
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           letter
           .
        
         
           
             But
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             dead
          
           ]
           As
           well
           the
           godly
           ,
           as
           the
           ungodly
           .
        
         
           
             *
          
           
             Lived
             not
             again
          
           ]
           that
           is
           ,
           Were
           not
           made
           partakers
           of
           that
           happinesse
           and
           prerogative
           ,
           whereby
           a
           number
           of
           some
           of
           the
           faithfull
           shall
           rise
           before
           the
           Universall
           and
           last
           Resurrection
           ,
           and
           shall
           reign
           with
           Christ
           here
           upon
           earth
           .
           
             Vntill
             those
             thousand
             years
             shall
             be
             finished
          
           ]
           For
           they
           being
           ended
           ,
           Christ
           not
           long
           after
           shall
           come
           to
           Judgement
           ,
           which
           both
           the
           living
           and
           the
           dead
           must
           expect
           .
           
             This
             is
          
           
             *
          
           
             that
             first
             Resurrection
          
           ]
           In
           which
           the
           Bodies
           of
           the
           Martyrs
           shall
           rise
           ,
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           those
           thousand
           years
           .
           
           We
           must
           not
           therefore
           understand
           in
           this
           place
           a
           Spirituall
           Resurrection
           ,
           by
           which
           we
           are
           said
           to
           rise
           out
           of
           the
           sleep
           ,
           and
           death
           of
           sinne
           :
           For
           that
           Resurrection
           is
           common
           unto
           all
           good
           men
           ,
           and
           happeneth
           daily
           .
           Wherefore
           thus
           we
           are
           to
           think
           concerning
           the
           Word
           
             Resurrection
             ,
          
           when
           we
           finde
           it
           mentioned
           in
           Scripture
           .
        
         
           Resurrection
           is
           either
           of
           our
           
             
               Spirit
               .
            
             
               Flesh
               
                 
                   
                     *
                  
                   Particularly
                   ,
                   in
                   the
                   time
                   of
                   
                     
                       
                         Elisha
                         ,
                      
                       whose
                       bones
                       raised
                       the
                       the
                       dead
                       man
                       ,
                       which
                       was
                       thrown
                       upon
                       them
                       .
                    
                     
                       Christ
                       
                         
                           Who
                           raised
                           
                             Lazarus
                             ,
                          
                           and
                           the
                           daughter
                           of
                           the
                           widow
                           of
                           
                             Naim
                             .
                          
                        
                         
                           When
                           divers
                           rofe
                           at
                           his
                           hanging
                           upon
                           the
                           Crosse
                           ,
                           
                             Matth.
                          
                           27.
                           
                        
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         Paul
                      
                       ;
                       who
                       raised
                       a
                       dead
                       man
                       to
                       life
                       .
                    
                     
                       The
                       1000.
                       years
                       .
                       And
                       this
                       is
                       called
                       the
                       
                         First
                         Resurrection
                         .
                      
                    
                  
                
                 
                   Universally
                   ,
                   which
                   shall
                   happen
                   in
                   the
                   end
                   of
                   the
                   World
                   ;
                   And
                   this
                   is
                   the
                   second
                   Resurrection
                   .
                
              
            
          
        
         
           6.
           
           
             Blessed
             .
          
           ]
           With
           a
           speciall
           blessing
           ,
           and
           proper
           onely
           to
           the
           Martyrs
           .
           
             And
             holy
             .
          
           ]
           That
           is
           ,
           Out
           of
           singular
           favour
           set
           apart
           by
           God
           for
           the
           priviledge
           of
           this
           peculiar
           blessing
           ,
           
             Who
             hat'●
             part
             in
             that
             first
             Resurrection
             .
          
           ]
           Who
           shall
           be
           in
           the
           number
           of
           the
           Martyrs
           ,
           who
           shall
           rise
           in
           this
           first
           Resurrection
           .
           
             On
             him
             the
             second
             death
             shall
             have
             no
             power
             .
          
           ]
           The
           second
           death
           is
           the
           casting
           away
           of
           the
           damned
           to
           eternall
           torments
           .
           Compare
           the
           14.
           verse
           with
           this
           .
           
           Otherwise
           it
           is
           called
           
             Eternall
             death
             .
             But
             they
             shall
             be
             Priests
             of
             God
             and
             Christ
             .
          
           ]
           Not
           in
           that
           common
           respect
           ,
           whereby
           all
           the
           elect
           in
           this
           life
           are
           spirituall
           Priests
           ,
           who
           by
           the
           Spirit
           of
           Christ
           offer
           themselves
           up
           unto
           God
           :
           But
           by
           a
           speciall
           prerogative
           ,
           whereby
           ,
           the
           Martyrs
           being
           raised
           from
           the
           dead
           ,
           shall
           obtain
           chief
           power
           in
           the
           Church
           ,
           as
           it
           were
           Priests
           of
           God
           and
           
             Christ
             .
          
           as
           before
           these
           thousand
           yeares
           the
           Priests
           of
           
             Antichrist
          
           were
           cheif
           .
           
             And
             they
             shall
             raign
             with
             him
             for
             a
             thousand
             years
             .
          
           ]
           In
           the
           Church
           ,
           the
           profession
           of
           Christianity
           being
           no
           way
           hindred
           .
           See
           
             Revel.
          
           5.10
           .
           and
           the
           
             Questions
          
           following
           .
           Therefore
           the
           peculiar
           happinesse
           of
           the
           Martyrs
           consisteth
           in
           the
           first
           Resurrection
           in
           their
           reign
           with
           Christ
           ,
           in
           their
           Priesthood
           ;
           in
           the
           same
           manner
           as
           we
           have
           described
           it
           .
        
         
           7.
           
           
             And
             when
             those
             thousand
             years
             shall
             be
             finished
             .
          
           ]
           To
           wit
           ,
           of
           the
           happinesse
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           of
           a
           free
           and
           universall
           profession
           of
           
             Christianity
             .
          
           Satan
           
             shall
             be
             loosed
             out
             of
             his
             prison
             .
          
           ]
           That
           is
           ,
           he
           shall
           recover
           his
           power
           and
           liberty
           to
           attempt
           and
           seduce
           without
           restraint
           ,
           which
           power
           had
           lain
           asleep
           ,
           as
           it
           were
           ,
           and
           been
           buryed
           for
           the
           thousand
           years
           ,
           the
           
             Angel
          
           now
           giving
           him
           leave
           ,
           in
           whose
           hands
           it
           was
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           pleasure
           and
           command
           of
           God
           ,
           to
           binde
           and
           loose
           
             Satan
             .
          
        
         
           8.
           
           
             And
             he
             shall
             go
             forth
             .
          
           ]
           That
           is
           ,
           out
           of
           his
           prison
           ,
           or
           place
           of
           his
           custody
           ,
           whereof
           in
           the
           foregoing
           verse
           ;
           namely
           ,
           Out
           of
           the
           bottomelesse
           pit
           ,
           where
           he
           was
           detained
           .
           
             That
             he
             may
             seduce
             the
             Nations
             in
             the
             four
             corners
             of
             the
             earth
             .
          
           ]
           That
           is
           ,
           Wicked
           men
           ,
           who
           shall
           heer
           and
           there
           remain
           in
           the
           World
           at
           the
           end
           of
           the
           
             thousand
          
           years
           .
           These
           Satan
           shall
           seduce
           ,
           urging
           them
           to
           make
           warre
           against
           the
           Saints
           ,
           Gog
           
             and
          
           Magog
           .
           ]
           That
           is
           ,
           those
           Nations
           which
           at
           that
           time
           Satan
           shall
           seduce
           ,
           and
           which
           at
           the
           end
           of
           those
           1000.
           yeares
           shall
           by
           warre
           make
           an
           attempt
           against
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           shall
           endeavour
           to
           destroy
           it
           ,
           
           as
           in
           old
           time
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
          
           vexed
           the
           people
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             .
          
           Therefore
           by
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
          
           are
           heer
           to
           be
           understood
           all
           the
           professed
           enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           ;
           even
           as
           
             Gog
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           the
           people
           of
           the
           
             Lesser
             ▪
             Asia
             ,
          
           which
           environed
           
             Iudea
          
           on
           the
           North
           ;
           and
           
             Magog
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           the
           
             Scythians
             ,
          
           which
           inhabited
           places
           situate
           on
           the
           South
           of
           
             Iudea
             ,
          
           were
           the
           professed
           enemies
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             .
          
           Thus
           then
           we
           must
           understand
           it
           :
           The
           Devill
           
           shall
           seduce
           the
           Nations
           in
           the
           four
           corners
           of
           the
           Earth
           ;
           the
           Nations
           ,
           I
           say
           ,
           which
           are
           endued
           with
           a
           spirit
           like
           that
           of
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
             .
          
           
           Read
           the
           38.
           and
           39.
           
             chapters
          
           of
           
             Ezekiel
             .
          
           But
           you
           will
           say
           ;
           How
           can
           it
           be
           that
           those
           wicked
           men
           should
           reassume
           their
           power
           after
           these
           thousand
           years
           ?
           
           I
           answer
           ;
           This
           shall
           be
           brought
           to
           passe
           by
           the
           just
           judgement
           of
           God
           ,
           whereby
           not
           only
           the
           great
           
             Antichrist
          
           shall
           flourish
           again
           ,
           but
           also
           
             Pagan
             ,
          
           and
           barbarous
           people
           ,
           and
           other
           monsters
           of
           the
           same
           batch
           shall
           gain
           encrease
           .
           
             And
             shall
             gather
             them
             together
             to
             battle
             .
          
           ]
           Against
           the
           profession
           of
           
             Christ
          
           in
           generall
           ,
           that
           it
           being
           quite
           as
           it
           were
           thrust
           out
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           they
           may
           substitute
           in
           the
           room
           thereof
           
             Antichristianisme
             ,
             Barbarisme
             ,
          
           and
           unbelief
           .
           
             Whose
             number
             shall
             be
             a●●he
             Sand
             of
             the
             Sea
             .
          
           ]
           So
           that
           it
           shall
           be
           a
           most
           compleatly
           furnished
           army
           ,
           whose
           like
           hath
           never
           been
           heretofore
           .
           And
           Satan
           ,
           being
           con●ident
           in
           the
           strength
           of
           these
           forces
           ,
           shall
           hope
           thereby
           to
           swallow
           up
           the
           Church
           .
        
         
           9.
           
           
             And
             they
             went
             up
             on
             the
             breadth
             of
             the
             Earth
             .
          
           ]
           So
           great
           an
           army
           shall
           be
           gathered
           together
           ,
           that
           no
           part
           of
           the
           earth
           shall
           be
           free
           from
           it
           .
           All
           the
           ground
           shall
           be
           covered
           with
           Souldiers
           .
           They
           shall
           
             come
             up
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           they
           shall
           rely
           upon
           much
           force
           and
           ayde
           .
           And
           here
           is
           an
           allusion
           to
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
          
           the
           Type
           ,
           who
           being
           to
           besiege
           
             Ierusalem
             ,
          
           which
           was
           placed
           upon
           a
           hill
           ,
           were
           of
           necessity
           to
           ascend
           .
           
             And
             th●y
          
           
             *
          
           encompassed
           it
           .
           ]
           The
           allusion
           to
           the
           type
           still
           holds
           :
           For
           the
           Church
           at
           that
           time
           shall
           be
           encompassed
           on
           every
           side
           with
           enemies
           ▪
           as
           in
           old
           time
           
             Iudea
          
           was
           encompassed
           by
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
             ,
          
           those
           fierce
           and
           barbarous
           people
           .
           
             The
             campe
             of
             the
             Saints
             .
          
           ]
           That
           is
           ,
           Wheresoever
           the
           true
           souldiers
           of
           Christ
           were
           ,
           making
           warre
           in
           their
           own
           stations
           .
           
             And
             the
             beloved
             City
             .
          
           ]
           The
           whole
           Church
           ,
           which
           is
           one
           City
           at
           that
           time
           scattered
           through
           the
           whole
           world
           .
           
             And
             fire
             came
             down
             from
          
           God
           
             out
             of
             heaver
             ,
             and
             devoured
             them
             .
          
           ]
           Some
           such
           thing
           verily
           shall
           happen
           ,
           as
           we
           read
           of
           
             Gen.
          
           19.
           concerning
           
             Sodome
          
           and
           
             Gomorrha
             .
          
           And
           as
           the
           first
           world
           perished
           with
           the
           deluge
           of
           water
           :
           so
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
          
           shall
           perish
           in
           ●●e
           end
           of
           the
           world
           by
           the
           destruction
           of
           fire
           .
        
         
           10.
           
           
             And
             the
             Devill
             that
             deceived
             th●●
             was
             cast
             .
          
           ]
           Otherwise
           then
           in
           the
           third
           verse
           ;
           for
           here
           he
           is
           so
           cast
           ,
           that
           he
           shall
           not
           beloosed
           
           again
           thence
           for
           ever
           .
           
             Into
             the
             lake
             of
             fire
             ;
             and
             brimstone
             .
          
           ]
           This
           is
           a
           description
           of
           Hell
           .
           
             Where
             the
             beast
             was
             .
          
           ]
           That
           is
           ,
           The
           former
           Beast
           ,
           which
           is
           described
           in
           the
           16.
           
             chapter
             ,
             v.
          
           13.
           
           For
           that
           beast
           is
           distinguished
           from
           the
           
             false-Prophet
             ,
          
           who
           is
           the
           same
           with
           the
           latter
           beast
           .
           
             And
             the
             false-Prophet
             .
          
           ]
           Great
           Antichrist
           ,
           
             Apollyon
             ,
          
           the
           
             Babylonian
          
           whore
           ,
           who
           with
           his
           subtle
           wiles
           seduceth
           men
           ,
           perswading
           and
           pressing
           a
           counterfeit
           religion
           ,
           wholly
           seeking
           after
           the
           honours
           and
           riches
           of
           this
           world
           ,
           no
           otherwise
           then
           the
           false
           Prophets
           in
           the
           old
           Testament
           were
           wont
           to
           do
           .
           Wherefore
           in
           a
           speciall
           manner
           
             Antichrist
          
           is
           called
           the
           
             false-Prophet
             .
             And
             shall
             be
             tormented
             .
          
           ]
           To
           wit
           ,
           they
           three
           :
           The
           
             Devill
             ,
          
           or
           
             Dragon
             ,
          
           and
           his
           two
           companions
           ,
           the
           
             Beast
             ,
          
           and
           the
           
             false-Prophet
             .
             Day
             and
             night
             .
          
           ]
           Continually
           ,
           without
           intermission
           .
           
             For
             ever
             and
             ever
             .
          
           ]
           A
           description
           of
           all
           Eternity
           .
        
         
           11.
           
           
             And
             I
             saw
             a
             great
             white
             Throne
             .
          
           ]
           By
           this
           
             Throne
          
           a
           cloud
           is
           understood
           ;
           and
           being
           termed
           
             a
             great
             Throne
             ,
          
           the
           Universall
           judgement
           is
           figured
           out
           ;
           and
           being
           also
           called
           a
           
             white
          
           one
           ,
           Truth
           ,
           Equity
           and
           Justice
           are
           thereby
           signified
           .
           
             And
             one
             sitting
             thereon
             .
          
           ]
           Namely
           ,
           
             Christ
             ,
          
           God
           and
           Man
           .
           Now
           he
           is
           said
           to
           be
           seen
           to
           sit
           there
           ,
           that
           hereby
           we
           may
           be
           taught
           ,
           That
           he
           is
           prepared
           and
           ready
           to
           passe
           judgement
           .
           
             From
             whose
             face
             .
          
           ]
           Being
           both
           most
           ref●lgent
           ,
           and
           full
           of
           austherity
           .
           
             The
             Earth
             and
             Heaven
             fled
             away
             .
          
           ]
           That
           is
           ,
           the
           fashion
           of
           this
           world
           passed
           away
           ,
           and
           was
           consumed
           with
           fire
           ,
           which
           went
           before
           this
           Judge
           ;
           and
           the
           Creatures
           ,
           the
           Inhabitants
           of
           earth
           and
           heaven
           ,
           did
           all
           tremble
           at
           the
           sight
           of
           him
           .
           
             And
             there
             was
             found
             no
             place
             for
             him
             .
          
           ]
           By
           reason
           of
           the
           resplenden●y
           ,
           and
           Majesty
           of
           the
           Judge
           ,
           which
           no
           creature
           could
           endure
           ,
           without
           being
           changed
           into
           some
           other
           state
           ,
           and
           condition
           .
           Therefore
           there
           shall
           be
           an
           Universall
           change
           of
           the
           whole
           world
           in
           that
           Judgement
           day
           .
        
         
           12.
           
           
             And
             I
             saw
             the
             dead
             .
          
           ]
           That
           is
           ,
           Those
           who
           had
           been
           dead
           ;
           but
           were
           now
           raised
           ,
           and
           restored
           unto
           life
           .
           
             Small
             and
             great
             .
          
           ]
           A
           
             Dichotomy
             ,
          
           or
           division
           ,
           naturally
           to
           be
           understood
           in
           regard
           of
           quantity
           ;
           morally
           in
           regard
           of
           quality
           ,
           or
           dignity
           .
           So
           that
           all
           must
           be
           placed
           before
           the
           
             Tribunall
          
           of
           Christ
           .
           
             Standing
             before
             God
             .
          
           ]
           As
           expecting
           his
           definitive
           sentence
           .
           
             And
             the
             Books
             were
             opened
             .
          
           ]
           Books
           not
           devised
           or
           written
           by
           any
           other
           ,
           then
           by
           every
           
           one
           in
           his
           own
           private
           conscience
           ,
           dictated
           according
           to
           his
           severall
           thoughts
           ,
           words
           ,
           and
           deeds
           .
           These
           Books
           therefore
           thus
           written
           have
           hitherto
           been
           reserved
           ,
           shut
           up
           ,
           and
           not
           taken
           notice
           of
           ,
           as
           it
           were
           in
           some
           private
           closet
           ,
           or
           place
           of
           account
           .
           But
           now
           they
           are
           opened
           ,
           so
           that
           they
           may
           be
           plainly
           read
           by
           every
           particular
           man
           .
           
             And
             another
             book
             was
             opened
             .
          
           ]
           That
           onely
           book
           ,
           written
           by
           God
           himself
           .
           
           
             Which
             is
             the
             book
             of
             Life
             .
          
           ]
           That
           is
           ,
           The
           secret
           and
           hidden
           Decree
           of
           God
           concerning
           our
           Election
           ,
           which
           there
           shall
           in
           publike
           be
           exhibited
           ,
           and
           made
           manifest
           .
           Now
           it
           is
           called
           
             The
             book
             of
             Life
             ,
          
           because
           therein
           God
           hath
           as
           it
           were
           set
           down
           the
           names
           of
           them
           ,
           who
           through
           his
           grace
           and
           favour
           shall
           become
           heirs
           of
           eternall
           life
           .
           Compare
           
             Luke
          
           10.20
           .
           
             And
             the
             dead
             were
             judged
             .
          
           ]
           A
           definitive
           sentence
           passing
           upon
           all
           ;
           acquitting
           some
           ,
           and
           condemning
           others
           .
           
             Out
             of
             those
             things
             which
             were
             written
             in
             the
             Book
             .
          
           ]
           To
           wit
           ,
           In
           the
           books
           of
           mens
           consciences
           .
           Now
           these
           books
           shall
           be
           opened
           after
           a
           severall
           manner
           .
           For
           the
           books
           of
           the
           Consciences
           of
           godly
           men
           shall
           not
           be
           so
           opened
           ,
           that
           their
           sinnes
           shall
           rise
           up
           in
           judgement
           against
           them
           ,
           (
           for
           in
           this
           respect
           they
           are
           still
           sealed
           up
           ,
           )
           but
           they
           shall
           be
           so
           opened
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           read
           indeed
           their
           sinnes
           there
           ,
           many
           and
           g●eat
           ones
           ,
           but
           so
           as
           they
           are
           covered
           by
           
             Christ
             ,
          
           and
           the
           power
           of
           them
           more
           and
           more
           weakened
           by
           the
           Spirit
           of
           Christ
           ,
           through
           repentance
           and
           the
           study
           of
           good
           works
           .
           Therefore
           the
           godly
           shall
           reade
           in
           their
           conscience
           the
           justice
           of
           Christ
           covering
           their
           sinnes
           ,
           and
           through
           him
           bringing
           forth
           good
           works
           .
           But
           the
           condition
           of
           the
           ungodly
           shall
           be
           farre
           otherwise
           ;
           For
           they
           shall
           read
           in
           their
           consciences
           their
           sinnes
           not
           pardoned
           by
           Christ
           .
           
             According
             to
             their
             works
             .
          
           ]
           Which
           shall
           give
           testimony
           either
           of
           their
           faith
           in
           Christ
           ;
           or
           else
           of
           their
           impiety
           ,
           and
           unbeleef
           .
        
         
           13.
           
           
             And.
          
           ]
           T●ansitively
           ,
           for
           
             After
             that
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           After
           the
           sentence
           of
           the
           Judge
           now
           passed
           ,
           and
           published
           .
           
             The
             sea
             gave
             up
             her
             dead
             that
             were
             in
             it
             .
          
           ]
           B●ing
           drowned
           ,
           or
           devoured
           of
           fi●nes
           .
           
             And
             death
             .
          
           ]
           That
           is
           ,
           The
           Fire
           ,
           Aire
           ,
           and
           Beast
           of
           the
           Earth
           ,
           and
           Fowls
           yeelded
           up
           their
           dead
           ,
           which
           had
           not
           been
           bu●yed
           .
           
             And
             Hell
             .
          
           ]
           That
           is
           ,
           The
           
             Grave
             .
          
           In
           these
           words
           then
           is
           contained
           partly
           a
           description
           of
           the
           generall
           Resurrection
           ,
           partly
           a
           distribution
           of
           the
           bodies
           of
           them
           that
           were
           dead
           into
           three
           sorts
           ;
           One
           of
           them
           that
           were
           
           drowned
           in
           the
           Sea
           ;
           Another
           of
           those
           which
           were
           not
           drowned
           in
           the
           Sea
           ,
           but
           being
           dead
           had
           no
           buriall
           ,
           as
           being
           brought
           to
           ashes
           either
           by
           the
           fire
           or
           aire
           ,
           or
           else
           devoured
           by
           beasts
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           or
           by
           flying
           fowls
           ;
           A
           third
           sort
           of
           those
           who
           were
           laid
           in
           their
           graves
           .
           
             Gave
             up
             their
             dead
             .
          
           ]
           By
           the
           command
           and
           appointment
           of
           God
           .
           
             Which
             were
             in
             them
             .
          
           ]
           The
           very
           same
           ,
           and
           not
           others
           :
           the
           same
           in
           number
           .
           
             And
             they
             were
             judged
             every
             man
             .
          
           ]
           Not
           any
           one
           being
           excepted
           .
           
             According
             to
             their
             works
             .
          
           ]
           So
           that
           no
           man
           shall
           have
           cause
           to
           complain
           of
           any
           injury
           done
           unto
           him
           .
        
         
           14.
           
           
             And
             death
             .
          
           ]
           
             And
             ,
          
           for
           
             But
          
           ;
           adversatively
           .
           
             Death
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           some
           ,
           and
           indeed
           most
           ,
           of
           the
           dead
           ,
           but
           not
           buryed
           .
           
             And
             Hell
             .
          
           ]
           The
           Grave
           ,
           which
           is
           here
           put
           for
           them
           that
           were
           buryed
           therein
           .
           And
           again
           ,
           not
           all
           the
           buryed
           are
           here
           to
           be
           understood
           ,
           but
           some
           ,
           and
           indeed
           most
           .
           Now
           by
           
             Death
          
           and
           
             Hell
          
           may
           be
           understood
           men
           deserving
           both
           .
           
             Were
             cast
             into
             the
             lake
             of
             fire
             .
          
           ]
           That
           is
           ,
           made
           subject
           and
           slaves
           to
           eternall
           damnation
           ;
           so
           that
           the
           Saints
           for
           the
           time
           to
           come
           need
           not
           stand
           in
           any
           danger
           or
           fear
           of
           them
           .
           
             Which
             is
             the
             second
             Death
             .
          
           ]
           Or
           ,
           Eternall
           .
           This
           Relative
           
             Which
          
           may
           either
           be
           referred
           to
           the
           word
           
             Lake
             ,
          
           or
           else
           may
           be
           taken
           collectively
           .
           In
           the
           former
           acception
           ,
           the
           
             Lake
          
           is
           called
           the
           second
           death
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           a
           signe
           or
           Symbol
           of
           the
           second
           ,
           or
           eternall
           death
           .
           In
           the
           latter
           ,
           the
           judgement
           of
           condemnation
           committed
           to
           execution
           is
           called
           the
           second
           death
           .
           Now
           this
           is
           called
           the
           second
           death
           ,
           because
           the
           bodies
           and
           souls
           of
           the
           damned
           do
           in
           very
           deed
           dye
           twice
           .
           For
           the
           body
           dyeth
           ,
           both
           when
           it
           is
           separated
           from
           the
           soul
           ,
           and
           also
           ,
           when
           being
           again
           joyned
           to
           the
           body
           ,
           it
           is
           seperated
           from
           God
           :
           And
           the
           soul
           dyeth
           ,
           both
           when
           in
           this
           life
           it
           separateth
           it self
           from
           God
           by
           sinne
           ,
           and
           when
           after
           this
           life
           it
           is
           separated
           from
           God
           by
           everlasting
           punishment
           .
           Lastly
           ,
           This
           punishment
           is
           called
           
             Death
             ,
          
           because
           it
           taketh
           away
           the
           life
           of
           grace
           and
           glory
           ,
           with
           which
           if
           the
           life
           of
           nature
           be
           compared
           ,
           it
           is
           rather
           to
           be
           called
           death
           then
           life
           .
        
         
           15.
           
           
             And
             whosoever
             was
             not
             found
             .
          
           ]
           
             And
             ,
          
           for
           
             For
          
           ;
           a
           
             copulative
          
           particle
           for
           a
           
             declarative
             .
             Finding
          
           is
           here
           applyed
           to
           God
           by
           an
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           ▪
           or
           by
           attributing
           of
           humane
           actions
           ,
           passions
           ,
           and
           affections
           to
           the
           unlimited
           power
           ,
           and
           unsearchable
           operations
           of
           the
           Deity
           .
           
             Written
             in
             the
             book
             of
             Life
             .
          
           ]
           Both
           in
           the
           former
           book
           ,
           
           as
           well
           through
           the
           love
           and
           election
           of
           God
           :
           as
           in
           the
           latter
           by
           faith
           ,
           hope
           ,
           and
           charity
           .
           
             Was
             cast
             into
             the
             lake
             of
             fire
             .
          
           ]
           Through
           the
           just
           judgement
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           by
           his
           own
           default
           .
        
      
       
         
           2.
           
           A
           Logicall-Theologicall
           Analysis
           .
        
         
           This
           Chapter
           is
           divided
           into
           five
           parts
           .
        
         
           
             I.
             THe
             Description
             of
             the
             Angel
             ,
             
               Vers.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             II.
             The
             Effects
             ,
             or
             operations
             of
             the
             Angel
             ;
             that
             is
             ,
             what
             the
             Angel
             did
             .
             
               In
               part
               of
               the
            
             1.
             
             
               Verse
            
             2.3
             .
          
           
             III.
             The
             happy
             estate
             of
             the
             Church
             which
             followed
             upon
             what
             the
             Angel
             had
             effected
             .
             In
             part
             of
             the
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5
             ,
             6.
             
             
               Verses
               .
            
          
           
             IV.
             The
             troubled
             State
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             
               Vers.
            
             7
             ,
             8
             ,
             9
             ,
             10.
             
          
           
             V.
             The
             Description
             of
             the
             last
             judgement
             .
             
               From
               the
            
             11.
             
             
               Verse●●
               the
               end
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             first
             Part.
             
          
           
             The
             Angel
             is
             described
             ,
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 Person
                 imployed
                 therein
                 ,
                 who
                 is
                 
                   Iohn
                
                 the
                 Evangelist
                 ,
                 whose
                 effect
                 illustrated
                 by
                 the
                 time
                 added
                 ,
                 is
                 expressed
                 in
                 these
                 words
                 ,
                 
                   After
                   that
                   I
                   saw
                   .
                
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 proper
                 Person
                 ,
                 or
                 
                   Subject
                   .
                   An
                   Angel
                   .
                
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 
                   effect
                
                 which
                 is
                 illustrated
                 by
                 the
                 place
                 ,
                 
                   Coming
                   down
                   from
                   Heaven
                   .
                
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 double
                 
                   adjunct
                   ,
                
                 illustrated
                 by
                 a
                 threefold
                 similitude
                 ,
                 
                   Having
                   the
                   k●y
                   of
                   the
                   bottomelesse
                   pit
                   ,
                   and
                   a
                   great
                   chain
                   in
                   his
                   hand
                   .
                
              
            
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             second
             Part.
             
          
           
             Five
             effects
             of
             this
             Angel
             are
             recited
             ,
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 first
                 is
                 illustrated
                 by
                 an
                 allegoricall
                 description
                 of
                 the
                 object
                 ,
                 thus
                 ;
                 
                   And
                   he
                   laid
                   hold
                   on
                   the
                   Dragon
                   ,
                   that
                   old
                   Serpent
                   ,
                   which
                   is
                   the
                   Devill
                   ,
                   and
                   Satan
                   .
                
              
               
               
                 The
                 second
                 is
                 illustrated
                 by
                 the
                 circumstance
                 of
                 time
                 .
                 
                   And
                   he
                   bound
                   him
                   for
                   1000.
                   years
                   .
                
              
               
                 3.
                 4.
                 5.
                 
                 The
                 other
                 three
                 are
                 set
                 down
                 with
                 a
                 manifestation
                 of
                 the
                 end
                 for
                 which
                 this
                 was
                 done
                 .
                 
                   And
                   cast
                   him
                   into
                   the
                   bottomelesse
                   pit
                   ,
                   and
                   shut
                   him
                   up
                   ,
                   and
                   set
                   a
                   seal
                   upon
                   him
                   ,
                   that
                   he
                   should
                   deceive
                   the
                   nations
                   no
                   more
                   .
                
              
            
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             third
             Part.
             
          
           
             The
             happy
             estate
             of
             this
             Church
             hereon
             Earth
             is
             either
             common
             ,
             or
             proper
             .
          
           
             The
             common
             estate
             of
             the
             Church
             is
             that
             of
             all
             the
             godly
             then
             living
             ,
             in
             these
             words
             ,
             
               That
               he
               should
               not
               seduce
               them
               any
               more
               .
            
             And
             it
             is
             discribed
             thus
             ,
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 extent
                 of
                 the
                 Subject
                 ,
                 
                   Tha●
                   he
                   might
                   not
                   seduce
                   the
                   Nations
                   .
                
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 adjunct
                 of
                 time
                 ,
                 
                   Till
                   the
                   thousand
                   y●●rs
                   should
                   be
                   fulfilled
                   .
                
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 destructive
                 cause
                 of
                 their
                 felicity
                 ,
                 
                   And
                   after
                   that
                   he
                   must
                   be
                   loosed
                   .
                
                 Now
                 as
                 well
                 the
                 efficient
                 cause
                 of
                 the
                 corruption
                 of
                 this
                 felicity
                 is
                 declared
                 ,
                 namely
                 ,
                 The
                 decree
                 of
                 God
                 .
                 
                   He
                   must
                   be
                   loosed
                
                 As
                 the
                 manner
                 and
                 forme
                 ,
                 
                   Be
                   loosed
                   .
                
                 And
                 lastly
                 ,
                 the
                 adjunct
                 of
                 time
                 ,
                 
                   For
                   a
                   little
                   season
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
             The
             Proper
             estate
             of
             the
             Church
             is
             that
             of
             the
             Martyr
             ,
             and
             is
             consists
             of
             their
             Resurrection
             ,
             and
             Kingdom
             .
          
           
             The
             Resurrection
             of
             the
             Martyrs
             is
             described
             ,
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 Person
                 imployed
                 .
                 
                   Then
                   I
                   saw
                   .
                
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 impulsive
                 procuring
                 cause
                 ,
                 to
                 wit
                 ,
                 the
                 Judgement
                 of
                 those
                 heavenly
                 powers
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 illustrated
                 from
                 an
                 adjunct
                 and
                 effect
                 metaphoricall
                 ,
                 thus
                 ;
                 
                   Thrones
                   ,
                   and
                   they
                   sate
                   upon
                   them
                   ,
                   and
                   judgement
                   was
                   given
                   unto
                   them
                   .
                
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 
                   recipient
                   subjects
                   ,
                
                 which
                 is
                 described
                 from
                 the
                 adjunct
                 passions
                 ,
                 as
                 also
                 from
                 the
                 its
                 effects
                 ;
                 
                   And
                   the
                   souls
                   of
                   them
                   ,
                   who
                   were
                   beheaded
                   for
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                
                 The
                 
                   procuring
                   cause
                
                 also
                 of
                 these
                 passions
                 or
                 sufferings
                 is
                 declared
                 ,
                 to
                 wit
                 ▪
                 Their
                 confessing
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 and
                 their
                 refusing
                 of
                 
                   Idolatry
                   .
                
              
               
               
                 4.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 manner
                 of
                 their
                 Resurrection
                 ,
                 
                   And
                   they
                   lived
                   agai●
                
                 ▪
                 The
                 Kingdom
                 of
                 the
                 Martyrs
                 is
                 described
                 from
                 the
                 effect
                 ,
                 conn●●
                 ,
                 and
                 adjunct
                 time
                 ,
                 
                   And
                   th●y
                   reigned
                   with
                   Christ
                   ,
                   for
                   a
                   thousand
                   years
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
             The
             Resurrection
             of
             the
             Martyrs
             is
             again
             described
             ,
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 unlike
                 condition
                 of
                 others
                 .
                 
                   But
                   the
                   rest
                   of
                   the
                   dead
                   lived
                   not
                   again
                   ,
                   untill
                   &c.
                   
                
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 From
                 it's
                 
                   Epithite
                   .
                   This
                   is
                   the
                
                 first
                 
                   Resurrection
                   .
                
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 From
                 four
                 adjunct●
                 ;
                 of
                 which
                 the
                 first
                 ,
                 second
                 ,
                 and
                 fourth
                 are
                 peculiar
                 ;
                 the
                 third
                 common
                 .
              
            
          
           
             For
             the
             Martyrs
             are
             described
             from
             their
             particular
             happynesse
             ▪
             
               Blessed
               .
            
             From
             their
             particular
             holinesse
             ,
             
               And
               holy
               .
            
             From
             their
             holy
             security
             ,
             
               On
               such
               the
               second
               death
               hath
               no
               power
               ,
            
             From
             the
             dignity
             of
             their
             Priesthood
             ,
             
               But
               they
               shall
               be
            
             Priests
             .
          
           
             Their
             Kingdom
             with
             the
             durance
             thereof
             ,
             is
             the
             second
             time
             also
             set
             down
             in
             the
             6.
             
             
               Verse
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             fourth
             Part.
             
          
           
             The
             happy
             estate
             of
             the
             Church
             shall
             be
             troubled
             by
             the
             extreme
             persecution
             of
             the
             wicked
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             by
             the
             warre
             of
             
               Gog
            
             and
             
               Magog
               ,
            
             the
             
               cause
            
             whereof
             and
             the
             
               event
            
             is
             described
             .
          
           
             The
             
               cause
            
             is
             as
             well
             
               efficient
               ,
            
             as
             
               formal
            
             ▪
          
           
             The
             
               efficient
            
             is
             either
             
               principall
               ,
            
             The
             seducing
             of
             the
             Devill
             ;
             or
             
               instrumentall
               ,
            
             The
             wicked
             Nations
             .
          
           
             The
             
               seducing
            
             of
             the
             Devill
             is
             described
             ,
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 
                   time
                   ;
                   When
                   the
                   thousand
                   years
                   shall
                   be
                   finished
                   ,
                
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 
                   permissive
                   cause
                
                 ;
                 Satan
                 
                   shall
                   be
                   loosed
                   out
                   of
                   his
                   prison
                   .
                
                 For
                 he
                 shall
                 be
                 let
                 loose
                 by
                 the
                 
                   Angel
                   ,
                   God
                
                 permitting
                 ,
                 and
                 commanding
                 it
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 
                   manner
                   ,
                
                 and
                 
                   end
                   ;
                   And
                   he
                   shall
                   go
                   forth
                   that
                   he
                   may
                   deceive
                   the
                
                 Nations
                 ,
                 
                   and
                   gather
                   them
                   to
                   battl●
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
           
             The
             
               wicked
               Nations
            
             are
             described
             ,
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 
                   subject
                   place
                   ;
                   The
                
                 Nations
                 
                   which
                   are
                   in
                   the
                   four
                   corners
                   of
                   the
                   earth
                   .
                
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 
                   comparison
                
                 with
                 their
                 like
                 ;
                 Gog
                 
                   and
                
                 Magog
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 
                   adjunct
                   ;
                   That
                   he
                   might
                   gather
                   them
                   to
                   battle
                   .
                
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 
                   multitude
                
                 added
                 ;
                 which
                 is
                 set
                 forth
                 and
                 illustrated
                 by
                 a
                 
                   simile
                   ;
                   whose
                   number
                   is
                   as
                   the
                   sand
                   of
                   the
                   Sea
                   .
                
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 From
                 a
                 double
                 
                   effect
                   ;
                   And
                   they
                   came
                   up
                   on
                   one
                   breadth
                   of
                   the
                   earth
                   ,
                   and
                   encompassed
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                
              
            
          
           
             The
             
               event
            
             of
             this
             warre
             of
             
               Gog
            
             and
             
               Magog
            
             is
             in
             respect
             ;
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 Of
                 the
                 
                   Nations
                   ;
                   But
                   fire
                   came
                   down
                   from
                   heaven
                   .
                
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 Of
                 the
                 
                   Devill
                
                 ;
                 whose
                 
                   action
                
                 is
                 described
                 ;
                 
                   And
                   the
                   Devill
                   who
                   seduced
                   them
                   :
                
                 and
                 his
                 
                   passion
                   ;
                   He
                   was
                   cast
                   into
                   the
                   Lake
                   .
                
                 And
                 this
                 punishment
                 is
                 described
                 from
                 his
                 
                   company
                   ;
                   Where
                   the
                
                 Beast
                 
                   and
                   the
                
                 false
                 prophet
                 
                   are
                   .
                
                 And
                 from
                 the
                 
                   durance
                   of
                   time
                
                 added
                 ;
                 
                   And
                   they
                   shall
                   be
                   tormented
                   day
                   and
                   night
                   for
                   ever
                   and
                   ever
                   .
                
              
            
          
        
         
           
             Of
             the
             fifth
             Part.
             
          
           
             The
             last
             Judgement
             is
             described
             ,
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 
                   efficient
                   cause
                   ,
                
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 
                   Iudge
                
                 ;
                 who
                 is
                 described
                 partly
                 from
                 the
                 limited
                 
                   place
                   ,
                
                 to
                 wit
                 ,
                 
                   The
                   Cloude
                   ;
                   Then
                   I
                   saw
                   a
                   Throne
                   ,
                
                 &c.
                 partly
                 from
                 
                   adjunct
                   ,
                
                 to
                 wit
                 ,
                 His
                 
                   Majestie
                   ;
                   And
                   one
                   sitting
                   thereon
                   before
                   whom
                   the
                   Earth
                   and
                   the
                   Heaven
                   fled
                   away
                   .
                
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 
                   Object
                   ,
                
                 which
                 are
                 the
                 guilty
                 ,
                 or
                 the
                 persons
                 to
                 be
                 judged
                 ;
                 They
                 are
                 described
                 both
                 from
                 their
                 
                   past
                
                 condition
                 ;
                 
                   The
                   dead
                   both
                   small
                   and
                   great
                   ,
                
                 as
                 also
                 from
                 their
                 
                   present
                
                 state
                 ;
                 
                   Standing
                   in
                   the
                   sight
                   of
                   God
                   ,
                
                 as
                 likewise
                 from
                 their
                 
                   future
                
                 condition
                 ;
                 
                   And
                   they
                   were
                   judged
                
                 ▪
                 From
                 a
                 tripartite
                 distribution
                 also
                 from
                 the
                 distinct
                 places
                 .
                 
                   And
                   the
                
                 sea
                 
                   gave
                   up
                   no
                   dead
                   ,
                   and
                
                 death
                 ,
                 
                   and
                
                 hel●gave
                 
                   up
                   their
                   dead
                   which
                   were
                   in
                   them
                   .
                
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 
                   Rule
                
                 observed
                 in
                 the
                 Judgement
                 ,
                 thereafter
                 as
                 their
                 works
                 are
                 ;
                 
                   According
                   to
                   their
                   works
                   .
                
                 This
                 rule
                 is
                 declared
                 from
                 the
                 
                   infallibility
                
                 thereof
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 signified
                 by
                 the
                 books
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 
                 the
                 Consciences
                 of
                 men
                 ;
                 
                   And
                   the
                   books
                   were
                   op●ned
                   .
                
                 And
                 by
                 the
                 Book
                 of
                 life
                 also
                 ;
                 
                   And
                   another
                   book
                   was
                   opened
                   .
                
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 From
                 the
                 
                   execution
                   of
                   the
                   sentence
                
                 ;
                 of
                 which
                 
                   one
                   part
                
                 here
                 is
                 onely
                 mentioned
                 ,
                 namely
                 the
                 casting
                 of
                 the
                 wicked
                 into
                 the
                 Lake
                 of
                 fire
                 .
                 
                   Vers.
                
                 14.
                 the
                 
                   other
                
                 is
                 related
                 in
                 the
                 following
                 
                   chapter
                   .
                
                 Now
                 this
                 casting
                 into
                 the
                 Lake
                 is
                 described
                 partly
                 from
                 what
                 
                   went
                   before
                   ;
                   And
                   Death
                   ,
                   and
                   Hell
                   .
                
                 Partly
                 from
                 the
                 
                   forme
                   ,
                
                 and
                 manner
                 of
                 it
                 ;
                 
                   Were
                   cast
                   into
                   the
                   lake
                   of
                   fire
                   ;
                   which
                   is
                   the
                   second
                   Death
                   .
                
                 And
                 partly
                 also
                 from
                 the
                 
                   impulsive
                   cause
                   ;
                   And
                   whose
                   names
                   were
                   not
                   found
                   in
                   the
                   book
                   of
                   life
                   were
                   cast
                   into
                   the
                   lake
                   of
                   fire
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
             If
             you
             like
             better
             of
             it
             ,
             divide
             this
             
               Chapter
            
             into
             four
             particular
             
               Visions
            
             ;
             Of
             which
             the
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 Is
                 concerning
                 the
                 
                   Angel
                   .
                   Vers.
                
                 1.2.3
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 Is
                 concerning
                 the
                 
                   State
                   of
                   the
                   Church
                
                 here
                 on
                 Earth
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 
                   
                     In
                     a
                     most
                     
                       happy
                    
                     condition
                     ,
                     
                       Verse
                    
                     3
                     ,
                     4
                     ,
                     5
                     ,
                     6.
                     
                  
                   
                     As
                     in
                     a
                     most
                     
                       afflicted
                       ,
                    
                     and
                     troubled
                     .
                     
                       Verse
                    
                     7
                     ,
                     8
                     ,
                     9
                     ,
                     10.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 Is
                 concerning
                 the
                 
                   throne
                   of
                   Christ
                
                 the
                 Judge
                 ,
                 
                   Vers.
                
                 11.
                 
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 Is
                 concerning
                 the
                 
                   Vniversall
                   Judgement
                   ,
                
                 and
                 the
                 processe
                 thereof
                 ,
                 
                   Verse
                
                 12
                 ,
                 13
                 ,
                 14
                 ,
                 15.
                 
              
            
          
        
      
       
         
           IV.
           The
           Paraphrase
           of
           the
           Chapter
           .
        
         
           THe
           condition
           and
           estate
           of
           the
           
             Militant
          
           Church
           being
           laid
           open
           unto
           me
           from
           the
           yeer
           of
           Christ
           94
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           
             temptations
          
           and
           assaults
           wherewith
           it
           was
           shaken
           ;
           the
           
             labours
             ,
          
           wherewith
           it
           was
           afflicted
           ,
           the
           
             deliverances
             ,
          
           whereby
           it
           was
           freed
           ;
           the
           
             Victory
             ,
          
           whereby
           it
           was
           ennobled
           :
           but
           specially
           ,
           and
           last
           of
           all
           ,
           the
           
             fall
             of
             Babylon
          
           being
           foretold
           and
           declared
           ,
           1.
           
           I
           saw
           in
           my
           extasie
           a
           good
           
             Angel
             ,
          
           the
           Minister
           of
           the
           Judgements
           of
           God
           ,
           such
           as
           I
           had
           seen
           in
           my
           former
           Visions
           ;
           Him
           ,
           I
           say
           ,
           I
           saw
           
             coming
             down
             
             from
             the
             heaven
          
           of
           the
           blessed
           ,
           
             who
             had
          
           by
           God
           entrusted
           to
           him
           
             the
             key
             of
             the
             bottomlesse
             pit
          
           of
           hell
           ,
           that
           according
           to
           the
           appointment
           of
           God
           he
           might
           shut
           and
           open
           it
           ;
           also
           a
           
             great
             chain
             in
             his
             hand
             ,
          
           wherewith
           he
           might
           binde
           some
           powerfull
           enemy
           .
           2.
           
           This
           Angel
           
             laid
             hold
             of
             the
             Dragon
             ,
             that
          
           infernall
           
             old
             Serpent
          
           ▪
           who
           from
           the
           beginning
           vomited
           forth
           his
           poyson
           upon
           man-kinde
           ,
           and
           deceived
           them
           with
           his
           winding
           Sophismes
           ,
           
             who
             is
          
           both
           
             the
             Devill
             ,
          
           slandering
           God
           before
           men
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           other
           side
           men
           before
           God
           ;
           who
           is
           also
           
             Satan
          
           ▪
           the
           adversary
           of
           God
           and
           men
           ;
           of
           Nature
           in
           generall
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           This
           Deceiver
           ,
           being
           found
           and
           apprehended
           in
           his
           Sophistry
           and
           Tyranny
           ,
           the
           good
           Angel
           
             bound
          
           with
           his
           chain
           ,
           and
           that
           
             for
             a
             thousand
          
           Solar
           years
           ,
           and
           commonly
           used
           in
           the
           generall
           course
           of
           life
           .
           3.
           
           Neither
           was
           it
           enough
           for
           him
           to
           binde
           him
           ,
           but
           moreover
           
             he
             cast
             him
          
           being
           bound
           ,
           and
           threw
           him
           headlong
           
             into
             the
             bottomlesse
             pit
             ,
          
           and
           being
           thrown
           down
           thither
           ,
           
             he
             shut
             him
             up
          
           ;
           and
           being
           shut
           up
           ,
           
             he
             sealed
          
           the
           Cover
           of
           the
           bottomlesse
           pit
           ,
           lest
           breaking
           forth
           by
           any
           means
           ,
           
             he
             might
             seduce
             ,
          
           partly
           to
           Idolatry
           ▪
           partly
           to
           the
           persecution
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           
             any
             more
             ,
          
           as
           he
           had
           done
           before
           ,
           
             the
             Nations
             ,
          
           as
           well
           Jews
           as
           Gentiles
           ,
           
             untill
             the
             thousand
             yeers
             are
             finished
             .
          
           For
           
             afterwards
             he
             must
          
           (
           God
           so
           appointing
           it
           )
           
             be
             Ie●
             loose
          
           out
           of
           his
           prison
           
             for
             a
             short
             time
             ,
          
           which
           God
           hath
           limitted
           ,
           and
           which
           shall
           not
           befor
           a
           thousand
           yeers
           ,
           as
           the
           time
           of
           his
           binding
           ,
           and
           his
           being
           shut
           up
           was
           .
           4.
           
           A
           joyfull
           
             Catastrophe
             ,
          
           or
           issue
           ,
           shall
           follow
           this
           Tragedy
           of
           the
           Dragon
           .
           For
           I
           
             saw
             Thrones
          
           set
           in
           order
           ,
           and
           and
           Christ
           with
           his
           holy
           Angels
           
             sate
             upon
             them
             .
          
           For
           unto
           these
           
             power
             was
             given
             to
             judge
             ,
          
           partly
           by
           giving
           and
           executing
           sentence
           ,
           partly
           by
           approving
           thereof
           .
           I
           saw
           also
           
             the
             souls
             of
             them
             who
             were
             beheaded
             ,
          
           and
           tormented
           with
           innumerable
           kinds
           of
           punishments
           ,
           not
           indeed
           for
           their
           own
           offences
           ,
           but
           
             for
             the
             testimony
          
           which
           they
           gave
           concerning
           Christ
           ,
           the
           Son
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           onely
           Advocate
           of
           the
           Church
           ;
           
             and
             for
             the
             Word
             of
             God
             ,
          
           which
           they
           had
           boldly
           maintained
           against
           the
           corruptions
           of
           men
           :
           
             and
             who
             had
             not
             worshipped
          
           that
           second
           
             Beast
             ,
          
           which
           I
           made
           mention
           of
           that
           I
           saw
           it
           before
           ;
           
             nor
             the
             image
             of
             that
          
           Beast
           which
           is
           two-fold
           ,
           both
           in
           respect
           of
           
             doctrine
             ,
          
           and
           
             life
             :
             neither
             had
             received
             his
             mark
             in
             their
             foreheads
             ,
          
           publikely
           making
           shew
           and
           witnessing
           by
           their
           words
           ,
           that
           they
           belonged
           
           to
           the
           family
           of
           the
           Beast
           :
           Lastly
           ,
           they
           had
           not
           so
           much
           〈◊〉
           received
           this
           mark
           
             in
             their
             hands
             ,
          
           expressing
           the
           same
           either
           in
           their
           life
           ,
           manners
           ,
           or
           actions
           .
           Such
           at
           these
           
             lived
             ,
          
           their
           bodies
           being
           raised
           again
           ,
           and
           restored
           to
           life
           .
           Neither
           did
           they
           only
           live
           again
           ,
           but
           also
           
             reigned
          
           in
           the
           Church
           ,
           freed
           now
           from
           Persecutions
           ,
           with
           Christ
           ,
           that
           King
           of
           kings
           ,
           
             for
             a
             thousand
             years
             .
          
           5.
           
           
             But
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             dead
             ,
          
           as
           well
           the
           godly
           who
           before
           these
           1000
           yeers
           received
           not
           the
           Crown
           of
           Martyrdom
           ,
           as
           the
           ungodly
           ▪
           
             lived
             not
             again
             till
             the
             thousand
             yeers
             were
             finished
             .
          
           And
           this
           is
           the
           
             first
             Resurrection
             ,
          
           due
           onely
           to
           them
           as
           a
           ●rerogative
           ,
           who
           above
           others
           have
           glorified
           the
           Lord
           Christ
           in
           their
           bodies
           ,
           nothing
           terrified
           with
           the
           threats
           ,
           curses
           ,
           and
           torments
           of
           men
           .
           6.
           
           These
           Martyrs
           therefore
           ,
           
             who
             have
             their
             part
             in
             the
             first
             Resurrection
             ,
          
           are
           deservedly
           esteemed
           
             happy
          
           above
           others
           ,
           as
           also
           peculiarly
           
             separated
             ,
          
           and
           set
           aside
           by
           God
           for
           the
           receiving
           of
           such
           a
           reward
           .
           For
           the
           
             second
             death
             shall
             have
             no
             power
             over
             them
             .
          
           By
           reason
           that
           though
           they
           live
           the
           second
           time
           here
           upon
           earth
           ,
           yet
           they
           shall
           no
           more
           by
           any
           sin
           engage
           themselves
           so
           ,
           that
           they
           need
           to
           fear
           any
           danger
           of
           an
           eternall
           death
           .
           For
           they
           shall
           be
           here
           upon
           earth
           
             Priests
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             of
             Christ
             ,
          
           not
           of
           this
           world
           :
           and
           they
           
             shall
             reigne
          
           with
           Christ
           ,
           not
           as
           the
           kings
           of
           the
           Nations
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           Majesty
           of
           the
           Spirit
           ,
           
             for
             these
             thousand
             yeers
             .
          
           7.
           
           Now
           
             when
             these
             thousand
             yeers
             sh●●●
             be
             fulfilled
             ,
          
           the
           happinesse
           of
           the
           Church
           shall
           on
           the
           sudden
           begin
           to
           fail
           here
           on
           earth
           .
           For
           Satan
           in
           an
           instant
           shall
           be
           ●et
           loose
           out
           of
           his
           prison
           ,
           in
           which
           he
           was
           most
           carefully
           kept
           for
           those
           thousand
           yeers
           .
           8.
           
           But
           being
           thus
           set
           at
           liberty
           ,
           he
           shall
           not
           rest
           so
           ,
           but
           shall
           return
           to
           his
           old
           game
           ,
           and
           so
           
             he
             shall
             go
             forth
             ,
             that
             he
             may
          
           the
           more
           freely
           seduce
           
             the
             Nations
             ,
          
           which
           are
           in
           
             the
             four
             corners
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
          
           towards
           the
           East
           ,
           and
           towards
           the
           West
           ,
           towards
           the
           North
           ▪
           and
           the
           South
           .
           Now
           he
           shall
           not
           onely
           by
           heresies
           of
           all
           kindes
           ▪
           lead
           on
           the
           blinde
           world
           to
           
             Apostasie
             ,
          
           or
           falling
           away
           from
           the
           faith
           ;
           but
           also
           he
           shall
           behave
           himself
           as
           a
           Captain
           ,
           or
           Leader
           ,
           to
           bring
           on
           a
           grievous
           Persecution
           upon
           the
           Church
           ,
           stirring
           and
           raising
           up
           against
           it
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
             ,
          
           the
           sworn
           enemies
           thereof
           ,
           and
           of
           God
           himself
           ;
           such
           as
           were
           of
           old
           those
           people
           ▪
           who
           under
           these
           names
           were
           bitter
           enemies
           to
           the
           
             Iews
             .
          
           
           And
           having
           thus
           stirred
           them
           up
           ,
           
             he
             shall
             gather
             them
             together
             to
             Batte●●
             ,
          
           
           farre
           more
           cruell
           and
           bloody
           then
           hath
           been
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           world
           .
           For
           men
           shall
           enter
           into
           this
           Battell
           barbarous
           in
           their
           monstrous
           cruelty
           ,
           and
           monstrous
           cruell
           in
           their
           barbarousnesse
           ,
           whose
           number
           shall
           be
           as
           the
           sand
           of
           the
           Sea
           .
           9.
           
           Wherefore
           these
           vast
           forces
           ,
           under
           the
           conduct
           of
           Satan
           ,
           
             shall
             come
             upon
             the
             earth
             ,
          
           and
           shall
           cover
           
             the
             breadth
          
           thereof
           with
           their
           multitudes
           .
           And
           straightway
           ,
           
             they
             shall
             encompasse
             the
             Camp
             of
             the
             ▪
          
           Saints
           ,
           wheresoever
           it
           shall
           be
           ;
           and
           with
           their
           utmost
           diligence
           and
           devices
           ,
           shall
           endeavour
           quite
           to
           deface
           the
           Church
           ,
           that
           
             beloved
             City
          
           of
           God
           .
           But
           however
           ,
           in
           the
           very
           midst
           of
           this
           their
           rage
           and
           fury
           ,
           being
           greater
           then
           that
           either
           of
           the
           
             Cyclops
          
           or
           
             Giants
             ,
          
           on
           a
           sudden
           
             a
             fire
             shall
             come
             down
             from
             Heaven
             ,
          
           God
           himself
           sending
           forth
           lightnings
           and
           flashings
           of
           fire
           upon
           them
           ,
           and
           shooting
           out
           his
           Arrows
           against
           them
           .
           This
           fire
           
             shall
             devour
          
           those
           his
           innumerable
           enemies
           ,
           like
           stubble
           .
           10.
           
           But
           neither
           shall
           their
           Leader
           ,
           
             the
             Devill
             ,
             who
          
           conducted
           ,
           and
           
             seduced
             them
             ,
          
           carry
           it
           away
           so
           without
           his
           due
           punishment
           for
           opposing
           the
           Church
           of
           
             God
             ,
          
           by
           the
           seduced
           
             Nations
             .
          
           For
           
             he
             shall
             be
             cast
             into
             the
             Lake
             of
             fire
             and
             brimstone
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           into
           hell
           it self
           ,
           where
           his
           companions
           ,
           the
           first
           
             beast
             ,
             and
             the
             false
             Prophet
             ,
          
           who
           is
           the
           
             great
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           being
           thrust
           down
           a
           little
           before
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           thousand
           yeers
           ,
           do
           endure
           their
           punishment
           .
           There
           
             they
             shall
             be
             tormented
             day
             and
             night
          
           without
           intermission
           ,
           
             for
             ever
             and
             ever
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           For
           all
           ages
           ;
           so
           that
           for
           the
           time
           to
           come
           they
           shall
           never
           scape
           forth
           again
           .
           11.
           
           I
           
             saw
             also
          
           a
           great
           cloud
           
             like
             a
             great
             white
             Throne
             ,
          
           and
           Christ
           ,
           the
           Son
           of
           GOD
           ,
           the
           Judge
           of
           the
           living
           and
           dead
           ,
           
             sitting
             thereon
          
           with
           great
           Majesty
           ,
           and
           prepared
           to
           give
           Judgement
           .
           
             From
             before
             his
             face
             the
             Earth
             and
             the
             Heaven
             fled
             away
             ,
             and
             there
             was
             no
             place
             found
             for
             them
             .
          
           For
           this
           earth
           ,
           and
           this
           heaven
           shall
           passe
           away
           at
           the
           coming
           of
           Christ
           ,
           and
           all
           things
           shall
           be
           made
           new
           .
           12.
           
           
             I
             saw
             also
          
           all
           
             the
             dead
             ,
             small
             and
             great
             standing
             before
             God
             ,
          
           and
           ready
           to
           hear
           the
           sentence
           of
           the
           Judge
           .
           What
           happens
           then
           ?
           
             The
             books
          
           of
           mens
           Consciences
           
             are
             opened
             ,
          
           the
           counsells
           of
           all
           mortell
           men
           ,
           and
           the
           secrets
           of
           their
           hearts
           ,
           being
           brought
           to
           light
           .
           Now
           lest
           the
           elect
           children
           of
           God
           should
           be
           disheartned
           ,
           every
           one
           by
           the
           particular
           survey
           of
           his
           own
           
             book
             ,
          
           or
           conscience
           ,
           behold
           
             another
             book
             is
             opened
          
           for
           them
           ,
           I
           mean
           
             the
             Book
             of
             Life
             ,
          
           in
           which
           according
           
           to
           the
           fatherly
           acceptance
           of
           God
           in
           Christ
           ,
           their
           names
           are
           written
           from
           everlasting
           .
           These
           books
           being
           thus
           opened
           ,
           
             the
             d●ad
             are
             judged
             out
             of
             those
             things
             which
             are
             written
             in
             the
             books
             ,
             according
             to
             their
             works
          
           ;
           and
           that
           after
           such
           manner
           ,
           that
           the
           works
           of
           the
           Saints
           are
           judged
           out
           of
           the
           book
           of
           life
           ,
           which
           contains
           the
           books
           of
           their
           Consciences
           ,
           washed
           and
           cleansed
           with
           the
           Blood
           of
           Christ
           ;
           But
           the
           works
           of
           the
           ungodly
           are
           numbred
           and
           surveyed
           ;
           and
           so
           judged
           ,
           out
           of
           the
           books
           of
           their
           own
           consciences
           ,
           not
           cleansed
           from
           sins
           ,
           nor
           purged
           with
           the
           Blood
           of
           Christ
           .
           13.
           
           Hereupon
           then
           
             the
             Sea
             gave
             up
             its
             dead
             ,
          
           which
           had
           been
           concealed
           in
           the
           bosome
           thereof
           .
           
             Death
             also
             and
             the
             Grave
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           The
           fire
           ,
           ayr
           ,
           and
           the
           earth
           ,
           and
           indeed
           all
           the
           Elements
           
             d●livered
             up
             their
             dead
             ,
          
           which
           having
           received
           formerly
           ,
           they
           had
           partly
           consumed
           ,
           partly
           yet
           preserved
           .
           They
           were
           therefore
           
             all
             judged
             ,
          
           and
           every
           one
           in
           particular
           ,
           none
           at
           all
           excepted
           ;
           and
           they
           were
           judged
           justly
           ;
           for
           the
           judgement
           was
           
             according
             to
          
           every
           ones
           
             works
             ,
          
           of
           which
           their
           consciences
           bare
           them
           record
           .
           14.
           
           And
           this
           being
           performed
           ,
           ungodly
           men
           ,
           
             Death
             and
             Hell
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           Men
           deserving
           both
           ,
           
             were
             cast
             into
             that
             lake
             of
             fire
             ,
          
           that
           there
           for
           ever
           they
           might
           swallow
           up
           waters
           running
           with
           fire
           ,
           and
           there
           suffer
           the
           
             second
             death
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           by
           dying
           the
           second
           death
           never
           to
           die
           .
           15.
           
           For
           
             whose
             name
             soever
             was
             not
             found
             written
             in
             the
             Book
             of
             Life
             ,
             was
             cast
             into
             that
             lake
             of
             fire
             ,
          
           both
           by
           the
           just
           Judgement
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           heynousnesse
           of
           his
           own
           deservings
           .
        
      
       
         
           V.
           The
           Questions
           arising
           in
           this
           Chapter
           .
        
         
           THe
           chief
           
             Questions
          
           of
           this
           Chapter
           are
           these
           :
           
             
               1.
               
               Whether
               these
               
                 thousand
                 yeers
                 ,
              
               severall
               times
               here
               mentioned
               ,
               are
               alwayes
               to
               be
               understood
               literally
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               Whether
               they
               be
               
                 already
              
               finished
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               
                 What
                 year
              
               ought
               to
               be
               put
               for
               the
               
                 beginning
                 of
                 them
                 .
              
            
             
               4.
               
               What
               is
               to
               be
               understood
               by
               the
               
                 first
                 Resurrection
                 .
              
            
             
               5.
               
               Who
               are
               to
               be
               understood
               by
               
                 Gog
              
               and
               
                 Magog
                 .
              
            
             
               6.
               
               Whether
               the
               
                 Martyrs
              
               with
               Christ
               shall
               reign
               here
               on
               Earth
               .
            
          
        
         
         
           All
           which
           Questions
           I
           will
           bring
           into
           this
           one
           ;
           
             Whether
             there
             shall
             be
             any
             happinesse
             of
             the
             Church
             here
             upon
             earth
             ,
             before
             the
             last
             day
             ;
             and
             of
             what
             kinde
             it
             shall
             be
             ?
          
           This
           
             question
          
           I
           will
           handle
           somewhat
           more
           largely
           ,
           both
           by
           way
           of
           
             confutation
             ,
          
           and
           
             confirmation
             .
          
           I
           will
           in
           the
           first
           place
           therefore
           by
           certain
           
             Classes
             ,
          
           
           or
           
             ranks
          
           of
           Arguments
           ,
           
             confirm
          
           the
           truth
           to
           be
           maintained
           herein
           :
           After
           that
           I
           will
           
             confute
          
           the
           Objections
           of
           the
           adversary
           part
           .
        
         
           
             I.
             The
             Confirmation
             of
             the
             Truth
             .
          
           
             
               THere
               shall
               be
               three
            
             Classes
             ,
             
               or
            
             ranks
             
               of
               Arguments
               for
               the
               maintaining
               of
               this
               Truth
               ,
               which
               we
               comprehend
               in
               the
               following
            
             Thesis
             .
             
               or
               Position
               :
            
             The
             happy
             estate
             of
             the
             Church
             in
             this
             life
             shall
             consist
             of
             the
             Resurrection
             of
             the
             Martyrs
             ,
             and
             their
             kingdom
             here
             on
             earth
             ;
             of
             the
             freedome
             of
             the
             Church
             from
             the
             persecution
             of
             the
             enemies
             of
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             by
             an
             utter
             overthrow
             of
             them
             ;
             of
             a
             lasting
             peace
             which
             shall
             arise
             from
             thence
             ▪
             of
             the
             encrease
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             or
             the
             multitude
             of
             the
             believers
             by
             the
             conversion
             of
             the
             Iews
             ,
             and
             Nations
             not
             yet
             converted
             ;
             of
             the
             Reformation
             of
             Doctrine
             ,
             (
             or
             a
             greater
             enlightment
             )
             and
             life
             ,
             among
             all
             estates
             of
             men
             ;
             of
             the
             Majesty
             also
             ,
             and
             great
             glory
             of
             the
             Church
             ;
             and
             lastly
             ,
             of
             the
             sincere
             joy
             thereof
             .
             Now
             this
             happinesse
             shall
             begin
             in
             that
             very
             year
             ,
             wherein
             it
             shall
             come
             to
             passe
             ,
             That
             the
             kingdom
             of
             that
             great
             Antichrist
             shall
             be
             destroyed
             :
             and
             it
             shall
             last
             for
             a
             thousand
             years
             .
          
           
             
               The
               truth
               hereof
               we
               will
               make
               good
               ,
               1.
               
               Out
               of
               the
            
             Context
             ,
             
               and
               Coherence
               of
               this
               Chapter
               .
               2.
               
               Out
               of
               other
               sayings
               of
               the
            
             Scripture
             .
             
               3.
               
               Lastly
               ,
               by
               Arguments
               taken
               from
            
             reason
             ,
             
               and
               the
            
             consent
             
               and
               agreement
               of
               some
            
             holy
             
               and
            
             learned
             men
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           The
           first
           Classis
           of
           Arguments
           .
        
         
           From
           the
           
             Context
          
           of
           the
           Chapter
           we
           draw
           these
           Arguments
           :
        
         
           THe
           first
           Argument
           is
           taken
           from
           the
           connexion
           of
           this
           Vision
           with
           the
           former
           ,
           which
           is
           described
           ,
           
             chap.
          
           19.
           
             verse
          
           19
           ,
           20
           ,
           21.
           
           For
           
             Iohn
          
           saith
           in
           the
           first
           verse
           of
           this
           Chapter
           ,
           
             And
             I
             saw
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           
             Afterwards
          
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           After
           I
           had
           seen
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           
           false
           Prophet
           cast
           into
           the
           Lake
           of
           fire
           .
           Now
           lest
           any
           one
           should
           think
           that
           this
           
             casting
          
           of
           them
           in
           shall
           be
           in
           the
           end
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           
             Iohn
          
           doth
           presently
           adde
           ;
           
             and
             the
             rest
             were
             slain
             with
             the
             sword
             of
             him
             that
             sate
             on
             the
             horse
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             fowls
             were
             filled
             with
             their
             flesh
             .
          
           From
           which
           words
           it
           is
           manifest
           ,
           That
           it
           is
           spoken
           here
           concerning
           the
           destruction
           of
           
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           and
           his
           followers
           ,
           which
           shall
           not
           happen
           in
           the
           last
           and
           Universall
           Judgement
           ,
           but
           shall
           be
           a
           particular
           Judgement
           by
           it self
           :
           which
           is
           thus
           demonstrated
           :
           The
           
             coming
             of
             Christ
          
           to
           the
           last
           Judgement
           shall
           at
           length
           happen
           after
           the
           Warre
           of
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
          
           ;
           which
           is
           a
           distinct
           War
           from
           that
           which
           is
           described
           ,
           
             chap.
          
           19.
           
             ver.
          
           19.
           
           For
           the
           
             Warre
             of
             Gog
          
           shall
           be
           against
           the
           Saints
           ,
           having
           now
           enjoyed
           a
           long-lasting
           Peace
           .
           But
           the
           
             Warre
             of
             Antichrist
          
           shall
           be
           against
           the
           Saints
           ,
           being
           now
           brought
           almost
           to
           nothing
           by
           some
           great
           persecution
           .
           Again
           in
           this
           20●h
           
             Chap.
             vers.
          
           10.
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           That
           the
           Devill
           should
           be
           
             cast
             into
             the
             lake
             of
             fire
             and
             brimstone
          
           after
           the
           Warre
           of
           
             Gog
             ,
             where
             the
             Beast
             and
             the
             false
             prophet
          
           
             *
          
           WAS
           ;
           which
           words
           have
           a
           plain
           respect
           to
           those
           ,
           
             chap.
          
           19.
           
             ver.
          
           20.
           
           
             These
             both
          
           (
           the
           Beast
           ,
           and
           the
           false
           prophet
           )
           
             were
             cast
             alive
             into
             a
             lake
             of
             fire
             burning
             with
             Brimstone
             .
          
        
         
           The
           second
           
             Argument
          
           is
           from
           the
           
             Connexion
          
           of
           this
           Vision
           with
           the
           following
           ,
           which
           is
           set
           down
           in
           the
           21
           ▪
           
             Chapter
             .
          
           For
           ,
           saith
           
             Iohn
          
           in
           the
           first
           
             verse
          
           thereof
           .
           
             After
             that
             I
             saw
             a
             new
             Heaven
             ,
             and
             a
             new
             Earth
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           The
           thousand
           yeers
           being
           finished
           ,
           the
           Warre
           of
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
          
           being
           ended
           ,
           and
           the
           execution
           of
           the
           last
           Judgement
           ,
           of
           which
           in
           the
           20●●
           
             chapter
             ,
          
           being
           accomplished
           :
           As
           if
           he
           should
           say
           ,
           Hitherto
           I
           have
           seen
           and
           declared
           the
           estate
           of
           the
           Church
           Militant
           ,
           and
           beginning
           to
           triumph
           in
           the
           last
           Judgement
           :
           Now
           followeth
           the
           Vision
           and
           Declaration
           of
           the
           state
           of
           the
           whole
           Church
           going
           on
           in
           it's
           progresse
           of
           Triumph
           in
           life
           eternall
           .
        
         
         
           The
           
             third
             Argument
          
           is
           from
           the
           often
           
             repetition
          
           of
           those
           words
           ,
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           ,
           [
           
             a
             thousand
             years
          
           ]
           and
           withall
           the
           addition
           of
           the
           Article
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           ,
           [
           
             the
             ,
          
           or
           
             those
             thousand
             years
             ,
          
           ]
           whereof
           the
           former
           is
           once
           onely
           used
           ,
           the
           latter
           four
           times
           from
           the
           2
           
             verse
          
           to
           the
           8.
           which
           repetition
           argues
           that
           these
           words
           are
           to
           be
           understood
           Historically
           ,
           and
           according
           to
           the
           letter
           ;
           except
           you
           had
           rather
           say
           that
           
             Iohn
          
           is
           a
           
             *
          
           
             babler
             ,
          
           or
           a
           vain
           repeater
           of
           the
           same
           words
           needlesly
           again
           and
           again
           .
        
         
           The
           
             fourth
             Argument
          
           is
           from
           the
           
             comparing
          
           of
           this
           Vision
           with
           the
           
             History
          
           of
           what
           hath
           hitherto
           happened
           .
           For
           it
           cannot
           be
           proved
           out
           of
           any
           
             History
             ,
          
           That
           those
           things
           which
           were
           treated
           of
           in
           this
           
             Prophesie
             ,
          
           have
           yet
           come
           to
           passe
           .
           For
           as
           yet
           the
           D●vill
           was
           never
           so
           bound
           for
           
             a
             thousand
             years
             ,
          
           as
           that
           he
           was
           cast
           into
           a
           bottomlesse
           pit
           ,
           and
           there
           shut
           up
           ,
           and
           withall
           a
           Seal
           set
           upon
           him
           ,
           that
           he
           might
           not
           seduce
           the
           Nations
           any
           more
           ,
           till
           the
           thousand
           years
           should
           be
           fulfilled
           ;
           which
           being
           expired
           ,
           he
           should
           be
           let
           loose
           for
           a
           little
           season
           .
        
         
           I
           require
           then
           that
           some
           age
           of
           the
           
             New
             Testament
          
           may
           be
           produced
           ,
           wherein
           the
           
             Epocha
             ,
          
           or
           
             beginning
          
           of
           these
           years
           may
           be
           said
           to
           have
           been
           .
        
         
           Again
           ▪
           The
           Resurrection
           of
           the
           
             Martyrs
          
           is
           proved
           from
           the
           
             Antithesis
             ,
          
           or
           
             opposition
          
           expressed
           in
           the
           4.
           and
           5.
           
           
             Verses
          
           ;
           where
           it
           is
           expresly
           said
           ,
           That
           
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             dead
             lived
             not
             again
             untill
             the
             thousand
             years
             were
             expired
             .
          
           Therefore
           ,
           when
           as
           it
           is
           said
           that
           the
           Martyrs
           lived
           ,
           they
           are
           to
           be
           understood
           to
           have
           lived
           again
           .
           Now
           let
           it
           be
           made
           appear
           when
           this
           living
           again
           happened
           .
        
         
           Lastly
           ,
           The
           warre
           of
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
          
           hath
           not
           been
           yet
           ,
           as
           many
           would
           have
           it
           :
           For
           after
           those
           thousand
           years
           shall
           be
           finished
           ,
           in
           all
           which
           time
           no
           Nations
           shall
           be
           seduced
           by
           
             Satan
          
           ;
           then
           ,
           I
           say
           ,
           shall
           this
           new
           seduction
           begin
           over
           the
           whole
           face
           of
           the
           earth
           ,
           and
           from
           the
           four
           corners
           of
           the
           world
           an
           innumerable
           army
           shall
           be
           gathered
           ,
           which
           shall
           bring
           great
           trouble
           to
           the
           
             Saints
             ,
          
           and
           shall
           be
           consumed
           with
           fire
           sent
           down
           from
           
             God
             .
          
           Seeing
           therefore
           these
           three
           things
           ,
           which
           I
           have
           mentioned
           ,
           are
           not
           already
           fulfilled
           ,
           it
           is
           most
           certain
           that
           they
           are
           yet
           to
           be
           fulfilled
           .
        
         
         
           The
           
             fifth
             Argument
          
           is
           from
           the
           
             absurdity
          
           that
           will
           follow
           :
           For
           except
           we
           keep
           close
           to
           the
           letter
           ,
           and
           apply
           it
           to
           the
           happinesse
           of
           the
           Church
           which
           shall
           be
           hereafter
           on
           earth
           ,
           both
           the
           explication
           and
           application
           of
           this
           whole
           Prophesie
           will
           prove
           very
           empty
           ,
           unsavory
           ,
           and
           wrested
           .
           Let
           us
           take
           one
           of
           many
           .
           Some
           say
           that
           these
           thousand
           years
           here
           mentioned
           began
           with
           the
           overthrow
           of
           the
           
             Temple
             ,
          
           
           and
           
             Iewish
          
           Worship
           ;
           because
           then
           the
           
             Iews
             ,
          
           who
           hitherto
           never
           ceased
           to
           trouble
           the
           Nations
           ,
           and
           to
           turn
           them
           aside
           from
           the
           
             Gospel
             ,
          
           being
           now
           scattered
           and
           cast
           off
           ,
           the
           Nations
           now
           by
           whole
           troops
           were
           brought
           in
           in
           their
           stead
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           
             Christ
             ,
          
           and
           that
           then
           Satan
           being
           bound
           ▪
           it
           was
           made
           apparant
           that
           he
           ceased
           from
           seducing
           the
           Nations
           .
           Now
           let
           us
           see
           what
           a
           fine
           exposition
           this
           is
           .
           
             Ierusalem
          
           was
           overthrown
           by
           
             Titus
          
           in
           the
           69.
           year
           of
           
             Christ
             :
          
           Here
           then
           let
           us
           begin
           the
           
             Epocha
          
           of
           these
           thousand
           years
           ,
           so
           that
           they
           may
           end
           in
           the
           year
           of
           
             Christ
          
           1069.
           
           Now
           let
           there
           be
           conferred
           with
           this
           whole
           course
           of
           time
           the
           
             Conversion
          
           of
           the
           
             Nations
             ,
          
           the
           sinck
           of
           
             Heresies
             ,
          
           the
           defection
           and
           seduction
           of
           
             Mabomet
             ,
          
           the
           
             Mystery
             of
             Iniquity
             ,
          
           and
           lastly
           the
           
             persecution
          
           of
           the
           
             Godly
          
           ;
           and
           then
           let
           it
           be
           shewn
           how
           
             Satan
          
           reigning
           all
           this
           while
           so
           powerfully
           ,
           was
           bound
           for
           a
           thousand
           years
           ,
           and
           seduced
           not
           the
           
             Nations
             .
          
           Let
           it
           be
           shewn
           also
           how
           any
           
             Martyr
          
           ever
           reigned
           with
           
             Christ
          
           from
           the
           year
           of
           the
           Lord
           69
           to
           the
           year
           1069.
           
           Certainly
           none
           have
           yet
           reigned
           with
           Christ
           ,
           because
           none
           have
           yet
           risen
           from
           the
           dead
           .
           Now
           the
           reign
           of
           the
           
             Martyrs
          
           with
           
             Christ
          
           must
           follow
           their
           Resurrection
           .
           So
           that
           if
           these
           thousand-years
           were
           expired
           in
           the
           year
           of
           Christ
           1069.
           
           It
           follows
           ,
           That
           these
           573
           years
           ,
           which
           have
           passed
           from
           that
           time
           to
           this
           present
           year
           1643.
           is
           a
           
             little
             season
          
           in
           respect
           of
           a
           thousand
           years
           :
           because
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           That
           after
           those
           thousand
           years
           the
           Divell
           shall
           be
           let
           loose
           
             for
             a
             little
             season
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             again
             seduce
             the
             Nations
             ,
             Vers.
          
           3
           ,
           7
           ,
           8.
           
           But
           573
           years
           cannot
           be
           said
           to
           be
           a
           
             little
             season
          
           in
           regard
           of
           1000
           years
           ,
           seeing
           they
           contain
           a
           great
           deal
           more
           then
           half
           thereof
           .
           Neither
           doth
           that
           make
           voide
           the
           truth
           hereof
           ,
           which
           they
           bring
           out
           of
           2
           
             Pet.
          
           3.8
           .
           that
           
             a
             thousand
             years
             with
          
           God
           
             are
             but
             as
             one
             day
             :
          
           
           For
           there
           it
           is
           spoken
           concerning
           God's
           estimate
           ,
           or
           account
           ;
           who
           as
           he
           esteems
           a
           thousand
           years
           but
           as
           one
           day
           ,
           so
           again
           he
           esteems
           one
           
           day
           as
           a
           thousand
           years
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           plain
           out
           of
           the
           place
           now
           cited
           .
           But
           here
           it
           is
           spoken
           concerning
           man's
           estimate
           ,
           who
           makes
           not
           the
           like
           account
           of
           a
           short
           ,
           as
           he
           doth
           of
           a
           long
           time
           .
        
         
           The
           
             sixth
             Argument
          
           is
           
             ab
             implicito
             ,
          
           as
           they
           use
           to
           speak
           ;
           implyed
           and
           necessarily
           deduced
           from
           another
           truth
           .
           
             Iohn
          
           writes
           ,
           that
           for
           the
           space
           of
           those
           thousand
           years
           the
           Nations
           should
           not
           be
           seduced
           ,
           
             Vers.
          
           3.
           where
           not
           onely
           the
           
             Heathens
             ,
          
           but
           also
           the
           
             Iews
          
           are
           to
           be
           understood
           .
           For
           
             Satan
          
           is
           so
           bound
           ,
           and
           committed
           to
           Hell
           ,
           that
           he
           cannot
           at
           all
           seduce
           any
           one
           .
           Therefore
           neither
           the
           Jews
           .
           Now
           it
           plainly
           appears
           to
           every
           one
           ,
           that
           the
           Jews
           ever
           since
           the
           
             Passion
          
           of
           Christ
           ,
           even
           to
           this
           very
           age
           of
           ours
           ,
           have
           been
           most
           miserably
           seduced
           .
           Therefore
           these
           thousand
           years
           are
           yet
           to
           come
           .
           Again
           ,
           It
           is
           very
           probable
           ,
           That
           the
           
             Persecution
          
           of
           the
           Church
           hath
           been
           a
           great
           occasion
           ,
           among
           other
           things
           ,
           to
           hinder
           the
           
             Iews
          
           gathering
           of
           themselves
           to
           the
           
             Church
             .
          
           Therefore
           if
           the
           Jews
           should
           but
           see
           the
           wonderfull
           overthrow
           of
           
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           without
           doubt
           it
           would
           afford
           them
           a
           great
           occasion
           of
           their
           Conversion
           .
           Upon
           this
           ground
           ,
           the
           overthrow
           of
           Antichrist
           shall
           immediately
           go
           before
           ,
           not
           the
           
             last
             judgement
             ,
          
           but
           the
           
             happinesse
             of
             the
             Church
          
           which
           shall
           happen
           in
           this
           life
           .
        
      
       
         
           The
           
             second
             Classes
          
           of
           Arguments
           .
        
         
           OUt
           of
           divers
           
             places
             of
             Scripture
          
           we
           will
           bring
           severall
           Arguments
           ,
           which
           shall
           all
           have
           dependance
           upon
           this
           
             Syllogi●m●
             .
          
        
         
           What
           things
           soever
           are
           by
           God
           foretold
           in
           the
           
             Old
          
           and
           
             New
          
           Testament
           ,
           and
           are
           not
           already
           fulfilled
           ,
           shall
           of
           certainty
           be
           yet
           fulfilled
           .
        
         
           But
           the
           great
           happinesse
           of
           the
           Church
           here
           on
           earth
           is
           foretold
           by
           God
           in
           the
           
             Old
          
           and
           
             New
          
           Testament
           ,
           but
           not
           as
           yet
           fulfilled
           :
        
         
           Therefore
           ,
           It
           shall
           be
           yet
           fulfilled
           .
        
         
           The
           
             Assumption
             ,
          
           or
           second
           proposition
           ,
           we
           will
           demonstrate
           out
           of
           divers
           places
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           in
           which
           the
           parts
           of
           this
           
             future
             happinesse
             ,
          
           which
           a
           little
           before
           we
           have
           decl●red
           ,
           do
           either
           severally
           ,
           or
           more
           of
           them
           together
           ,
           occurre
           .
        
         
         
           The
           
             first
          
           place
           is
           
             Gen.
          
           17.4
           ,
           5
           ,
           6.
           
           Where
           God
           thus
           speaks
           unto
           
             Abraham
             :
             As
             for
             me
             ,
             behold
             I
             make
             my
             Covenant
             with
             thee
             ,
             and
             thou
             shalt
             be
             a
             father
             of
          
           many
           Nations
           .
           
             Neither
             shall
             thy
             name
             any
             more
             be
             called
          
           Abram
           ,
           
             but
             thy
             name
             shall
             be
          
           Abraham
           :
           
             for
             a
             father
             of
          
           many
           Nations
           
             have
             I
             made
             thee
             .
             And
             I
             will
             multiply
             thee
             abundantly
             ,
             and
             I
             will
             make
             Nations
             of
             thee
             ,
             and
             Kings
             shall
             come
             out
             of
             thee
             .
          
           In
           these
           words
           is
           promised
           unto
           
             Abraham
             ,
          
           that
           he
           shall
           be
           a
           father
           ,
           not
           onely
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             ,
          
           but
           also
           of
           the
           
             Gentiles
             .
          
           For
           it
           is
           plain
           ,
           That
           divers
           people
           had
           their
           originall
           and
           descent
           from
           
             Abraham
             .
          
           For
           besides
           that
           
             Isaac
          
           was
           born
           of
           him
           ,
           
             Ismael
          
           also
           grew
           into
           a
           great
           people
           ,
           and
           the
           
             Edomites
          
           also
           descended
           from
           him
           were
           scattered
           farre
           and
           wide
           .
           Of
           other
           sonnes
           also
           ,
           which
           he
           had
           by
           
             Keturah
             ,
          
           very
           large
           families
           were
           spread
           abroad
           .
           But
           what
           ?
           
             Moses
          
           had
           a
           farther
           respect
           in
           these
           words
           ,
           namely
           ,
           that
           the
           
             Nations
          
           by
           faith
           were
           to
           be
           inserted
           into
           the
           kindred
           of
           
             Abraham
             ,
          
           though
           they
           were
           not
           begotten
           of
           him
           according
           to
           the
           flesh
           ,
           as
           the
           
             Apostle
          
           witnesseth
           
             Rom.
          
           4
           11.
           
           The
           
             Iews
          
           of
           all
           kindes
           ,
           and
           
             Gentiles
          
           shall
           be
           the
           sonnes
           of
           
             Abraham
          
           in
           Christ
           .
           But
           this
           is
           not
           yet
           brought
           to
           passe
           ;
           Because
           the
           
             tenne
          
           Tribes
           carried
           away
           by
           
             Salmanassor
          
           have
           heard
           nothing
           concerning
           
             Christ
             ,
          
           and
           the
           
             two
          
           Tribes
           ,
           
             Iudah
             ,
          
           and
           
             Benjamin
             ,
          
           have
           hitherto
           wandred
           in
           their
           own
           wayes
           ,
           as
           also
           the
           
             Indians
             ,
          
           and
           the
           like
           unto
           them
           .
           It
           must
           be
           therefore
           that
           they
           also
           at
           length
           be
           brought
           into
           the
           Covenant
           made
           with
           
             Abraham
             .
          
        
         
           The
           
             second
          
           place
           is
           
             Gen.
          
           18.18
           .
           
             Seeing
             that
          
           Abraham
           
             shall
             surely
             become
             a
             great
             and
             mighty
             nation
             ;
             and
             all
             the
          
           Nations
           
             of
             the
             earth
             shall
             be
             blessed
             in
             him
             .
          
           Compare
           
             Gen.
          
           26.4
           .
           Hence
           I
           thus
           reason
           .
           In
           the
           seed
           of
           
             Abraham
             ,
          
           which
           is
           
             Christ
             ,
          
           all
           the
           Nations
           of
           the
           earth
           shall
           be
           blessed
           ;
           But
           this
           hath
           not
           yet
           come
           about
           ,
           as
           it
           appears
           out
           of
           the
           illustration
           of
           the
           former
           
             place
             .
          
           This
           therefore
           must
           be
           yet
           done
           .
           Compare
           
             Gen.
          
           21.13
           .
           where
           God
           promiseth
           
             Abraham
             ,
          
           that
           of
           the
           sonne
           of
           the
           Bond-woman
           
             Hagar
          
           he
           would
           make
           a
           Nation
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           he
           would
           cause
           that
           of
           him
           many
           people
           should
           be
           born
           ,
           because
           he
           was
           his
           seed
           .
           As
           if
           he
           should
           say
           ;
           This
           seed
           of
           
             Abraham
          
           also
           shall
           not
           slip
           out
           of
           my
           remembrance
           ,
           but
           in
           it
           's
           due
           time
           it
           shall
           know
           that
           I
           am
           the
           God
           of
           
             Abraham
             .
          
        
         
         
           The
           
             third
          
           place
           is
           
             Gen.
          
           27.40
           .
           
             When
             thou
          
           (
           Esau
           )
           
             shalt
             have
             the
             dominion
             ,
             thou
             shalt
             break
             his
          
           (
           thy
           brother
           
             Iacob's
          
           )
           
             yoke
             from
             of
             thy
             neck
             .
          
           This
           shall
           then
           be
           done
           ,
           when
           the
           posterity
           of
           
             Esau
          
           shall
           grow
           together
           into
           one
           body
           with
           the
           
             Israelites
             .
          
           Which
           is
           not
           yet
           done
           .
        
         
           The
           
             fourth
          
           place
           is
           
             Gen.
          
           48.19
           .
           
             Notwithstanding
             his
          
           (
           Manasse's
           )
           
             yonger
             brother
          
           (
           Ephraim
           )
           
             shall
             grow
             greater
             then
             be
             ,
             and
             his
             seed
             shall
             be
             the
             fulnesse
             of
             the
          
           Nations
           .
           These
           words
           receive
           light
           from
           the
           11
           
             chapter
          
           to
           the
           
             Romans
             ,
          
           where
           the
           same
           manner
           of
           speaking
           is
           used
           .
           This
           therefore
           shall
           be
           the
           meaning
           .
           Out
           of
           
             Ephraim
          
           indeed
           no
           numerous
           off-spring
           shall
           arise
           according
           to
           the
           flesh
           (
           for
           in
           this
           respect
           the
           tribe
           of
           
             Iudah
          
           exceeded
           the
           tribe
           of
           
             Ephraim
             ,
          
           )
           but
           this
           shall
           be
           his
           prerogative
           ,
           that
           
             his
             seed
             shall
             be
             the
             fulnesse
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             :
          
           that
           is
           ,
           shall
           put
           a
           conclusion
           to
           the
           Conversion
           of
           the
           
             Gentiles
             ,
          
           and
           so
           together
           with
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           
             Iews
          
           shall
           be
           turned
           unto
           
             Christ
             .
          
        
         
           The
           
             fifth
          
           place
           is
           
             Gen.
          
           49.10
           .
           Which
           is
           spoken
           of
           
             Shiloh
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           the
           
             Messias
             :
             And
             unto
             him
             shall
             the
             gathering
          
           [
           or
           ,
           
             obedience
             ,
          
           ]
           
             of
             the
             people
             be
             .
          
           That
           is
           of
           
             Iews
             ,
          
           and
           Gentiles
           ;
           as
           also
           of
           the
           
             Turks
             ,
          
           and
           
             Indians
             ,
          
           and
           of
           the
           
             tenne
             Tribes
             .
          
        
         
           The
           
             sixth
          
           place
           is
           
             Gen.
          
           49.18
           .
           Here
           
             Iacob
          
           breaths
           forth
           his
           griefs
           for
           the
           tribe
           of
           
             Dan
             :
             I
             have
             waited
             for
             thy
             salvation
             ,
             ô
             Lord
             .
          
           As
           if
           he
           should
           have
           said
           ;
           yet
           at
           length
           I
           shall
           be
           saved
           ,
           ô
           God
           ,
           however
           thou
           meanest
           to
           scatter
           me
           with
           the
           other
           nine
           tribes
           of
           
             Israel
             .
          
           For
           it
           is
           a
           very
           hard
           censure
           utterly
           to
           exclude
           those
           
             tenne
             tribes
          
           from
           the
           Communion
           with
           
             Christ
             .
          
        
         
           The
           
             seventh
          
           place
           is
           
             Gen.
          
           49.26
           .
           Here
           
             Iacob
          
           thus
           speaks
           unto
           
             Ioseph
             .
             The
             blessings
             of
             thy
             father
             have
             prevailed
             with
             the
             blessings
             of
             my
             progenitors
             ,
             unto
             the
             utmost
             bound
             of
             the
             everlasting
             hills
             .
          
           That
           is
           ,
           They
           are
           not
           only
           temporall
           ,
           but
           eternall
           .
           For
           he
           joyns
           together
           spirituall
           promises
           ,
           with
           earthly
           ;
           because
           the
           one
           are
           but
           the
           resemblances
           ,
           and
           figure
           of
           the
           other
           .
           Therefore
           those
           last
           words
           are
           a
           circumlocution
           of
           
             Perpetui●y
             .
          
           I
           demand
           then
           ,
           where
           in
           the
           whole
           world
           were
           the
           posterity
           of
           
             Ioseph
          
           made
           partakers
           of
           
             Christ
             ?
          
           It
           is
           necessary
           therefore
           that
           this
           promise
           should
           yet
           be
           fulfilled
           .
        
         
           The
           
             eighth
          
           place
           is
           
             Numb.
          
           24.17
           .
           Where
           
             Balaam
          
           thus
           prophecieth
           
           concerning
           Christ
           .
           
             I
             see
             him
             ,
             but
             not
             now
             :
             I
             behold
             him
             ,
             but
             not
             nigh
             :
             there
             shall
             come
             a
             starre
             out
             of
          
           Jacob
           ,
           
             and
             a
             scepter
             shall
             arise
             out
             of
          
           Israel
           ,
           
             and
             shall
             smite
             all
             the
             corners
             of
          
           Moab
           ,
           
             and
             destroy
             all
             the
             children
             of
          
           Seth.
           
           Here
           by
           the
           children
           of
           
             Seth
          
           are
           understood
           all
           the
           children
           of
           this
           world
           :
           because
           we
           are
           all
           sprung
           out
           of
           
             Seth
             ,
          
           who
           succeeded
           into
           the
           place
           of
           
             Abel
             ,
          
           who
           was
           slain
           .
           For
           the
           posterity
           of
           
             Cain
          
           perished
           in
           the
           
             Deluge
             .
             Noah
          
           had
           his
           descent
           from
           
             Seth.
             
          
           And
           from
           
             Noah
          
           was
           the
           reparation
           of
           mankinde
           .
           Wherefore
           the
           sonnes
           of
           
             Seth
             ,
          
           are
           as
           much
           as
           the
           sonnes
           of
           
             Adam
          
           ;
           that
           is
           ,
           all
           mankinde
           .
           This
           is
           the
           meaning
           ;
           
             Christ
          
           who
           shall
           come
           out
           of
           
             Iacob
          
           as
           a
           starre
           ,
           and
           whose
           scepter
           shall
           rise
           out
           of
           
             Israel
             ,
          
           shall
           bring
           to
           nothing
           the
           
             Moabites
             ,
          
           the
           enemies
           of
           the
           
             Israelites
             ,
          
           and
           shall
           destroy
           all
           the
           sonnes
           of
           
             Seth
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           
             all
             men
             ,
          
           by
           subjecting
           them
           to
           himself
           by
           his
           own
           Spirit
           .
           Which
           yet
           ,
           as
           experience
           it self
           may
           be
           witnesse
           ,
           hath
           not
           been
           brought
           to
           passe
           .
           Now
           in
           this
           place
           I
           translate
           it
           ,
           
             the
             sonnes
             of
             Seth
             ,
          
           following
           the
           Lxx.
           
             Interpreters
             ,
          
           and
           
             Vatablus
             :
          
           because
           the
           
             Antithesis
          
           between
           
             Moab
             ,
          
           
           and
           
             Seth
          
           so
           required
           .
           To
           say
           nothing
           that
           that
           Translation
           ,
           
             He
             shall
             destroy
             all
             that
             are
             behinde
             ,
          
           is
           forced
           .
           Now
           in
           the
           word
           ,
           he
           shall
           destroy
           ,
           there
           is
           an
           extraordinary
           
             Emphasis
             ,
          
           or
           significancy
           ;
           for
           the
           
             Hebrew
          
           word
           denoteth
           as
           much
           as
           
             to
             break
             down
             a
             wall
          
           :
           as
           if
           he
           should
           say
           ;
           he
           shall
           break
           in
           pieces
           their
           walls
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           whatsoever
           all
           men
           have
           of
           their
           proper
           holynesse
           ,
           or
           worth
           ,
           this
           
             Starre
          
           shall
           make
           dimme
           ,
           and
           obscure
           ,
           and
           shall
           weaken
           all
           power
           ,
           that
           lifteth
           it self
           up
           against
           God
           .
        
         
           The
           
             ninth
          
           place
           is
           
             Deut.
          
           30.3
           ,
           4.
           
           
             Then
             shall
             the
             Lord
             God
             turn
             thy
             captivity
             ,
             and
             shall
             have
             mercy
             on
             thee
             ,
             and
             will
             return
             and
             gather
             thee
             from
             among
             all
             the
             people
             ,
             whither
             thy
             Lord
             God
             had
             scattered
             thee
             .
             If
             any
             of
             thine
             be
             driven
             out
             unto
             the
             utmost
             parts
             of
             heaven
             ,
             from
             thence
             will
             the
             Lord
             thy
             God
             gather
             thee
             ,
             and
             from
             thence
             he
             will
             fetch
             thee
             .
          
           This
           truly
           is
           not
           fully
           performed
           in
           the
           bringing
           back
           of
           the
           
             Babylonian
          
           captivity
           .
           For
           neither
           were
           the
           
             tenne
             Tribes
          
           then
           brought
           back
           .
           See
           also
           the
           6.
           and
           the
           8.
           
           
             Verses
             .
          
           For
           what
           is
           spoken
           there
           concerning
           the
           
             circumcision
             of
             the
             heart
          
           is
           mean't
           of
           the
           faith
           in
           Christ
           ,
           without
           which
           no
           man's
           heart
           is
           cleansed
           .
        
         
         
           The
           
             tenth
          
           place
           is
           
             Deut.
          
           32.
           to
           the
           44.
           
             verse
             .
          
           Here
           from
           the
           first
           
             verse
          
           to
           the
           40.
           divers
           passages
           occurre
           concerning
           the
           Conversion
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             ,
          
           as
           
             Heurnius
          
           doth
           learnedly
           expound
           them
           .
           Then
           from
           the
           40.
           
             verse
          
           to
           the
           44.
           is
           the
           prophecy
           of
           the
           calling
           of
           the
           
             Gentiles
             .
          
           
           For
           the
           Apostle
           
             Rom.
          
           15.10
           .
           alleageth
           the
           first
           part
           of
           the
           43.
           
             verse
          
           to
           this
           purpose
           .
           Now
           here
           it
           is
           prophesied
           of
           the
           
             destruction
          
           of
           the
           enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           spilling
           of
           their
           bloud
           in
           fight
           .
           Which
           destruction
           hath
           not
           happened
           yet
           ,
           as
           is
           plain
           by
           this
           
             Syllogisme
             .
          
           If
           the
           
             Destruction
             ,
          
           here
           prophesied
           of
           by
           
             Moses
             ,
          
           agrees
           with
           that
           ▪
           which
           is
           prophesied
           of
           
             Revel.
          
           19.
           
             vers.
          
           20.21
           .
           it
           hath
           not
           yet
           happened
           out
           ,
           but
           is
           to
           come
           .
           But
           the
           
             Antecedent
          
           is
           true
           ;
           Therefore
           also
           the
           
             Consequent
             .
          
           The
           
             Assumption
          
           is
           made
           good
           by
           the
           comparing
           of
           these
           two
           places
           .
           And
           here
           it
           shall
           not
           be
           amisse
           in
           brief
           to
           call
           into
           our
           memory
           ,
           how
           many
           
             d●structions
          
           of
           the
           enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           after
           the
           
             Babylonian
          
           captivity
           ,
           we
           meet
           withall
           in
           the
           
             Prophets
             .
          
           And
           they
           are
           in
           number
           
             three
             .
          
           The
           
             first
          
           Destruction
           is
           ,
           of
           the
           enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           
             Iews
          
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           
             Maccabees
             .
             Dan.
          
           11.34
           ,
           35.
           
           The
           
             second
          
           Destruction
           is
           of
           the
           enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           
             Gentiles
             .
             Dan.
          
           11.34
           ,
           35.
           
           
             Revel.
          
           19.
           
             vers.
          
           20
           ,
           21.
           
           The
           
             third
          
           Destruction
           is
           of
           the
           enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           both
           
             Gentiles
          
           and
           
             Iews
             ,
          
           a
           little
           before
           the
           end
           of
           the
           world
           .
           
             Revel.
          
           20.4
           .
        
         
           The
           
             eleventh
          
           place
           is
           
             Nehem.
          
           1.8
           ,
           9.
           
           Here
           the
           promise
           of
           God
           ,
           
             Deut.
          
           30.3
           ,
           4.
           a
           little
           before
           explained
           ,
           is
           repeated
           :
           and
           is
           applyed
           to
           the
           bringing
           back
           of
           the
           
             two
             tribes
          
           from
           the
           
             Babylonian
          
           captivity
           ,
           which
           was
           a
           type
           of
           the
           deliverance
           of
           them
           all
           ,
           which
           is
           yet
           to
           come
           .
           For
           God
           promised
           the
           
             twelve
             Tribes
             ,
          
           that
           he
           would
           gather
           them
           together
           whither
           soever
           they
           were
           scattered
           among
           divers
           Nations
           ,
           although
           they
           were
           driven
           to
           the
           utmost
           part
           of
           Heaven
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           into
           the
           most
           remote
           Countreys
           :
           Which
           cannot
           be
           interpreted
           of
           the
           
             Babylonian
          
           captivity
           alone
           .
           For
           neither
           then
           were
           all
           the
           Tribes
           brought
           back
           ;
           neither
           was
           their
           bringing
           back
           from
           the
           remotest
           Lands
           .
        
         
           The
           
             twelfth
          
           place
           is
           
             Psal.
          
           22.27
           ,
           28.
           
           
             All
             the
             ends
             of
             the
             earth
             shall
             remember
             ,
             and
             be
             converted
             unto
             the
             Lord
             .
             And
             all
             the
             kindreds
             of
             the
          
           Nations
           
             shall
             bow
             down
             themselves
             before
             him
             .
          
           Compare
           
             Psal.
          
           86.9
           .
           
             All
          
           Nations
           
             whom
             thou
             hast
             made
             ,
             shall
             come
             and
             worship
             before
             
             thee
             ▪
             O
             Lord
             ;
             and
             shall
             glorifie
             thy
             name
             .
          
           So
           
             Psal.
          
           117.1
           .
           
             O
             praise
             the
             Lord
             all
             ye
             Nations
             ;
             praise
             him
             all
             ye
             people
             .
          
           Let
           us
           search
           through
           the
           Monuments
           of
           
             Hictories
             ,
          
           and
           then
           let
           us
           examine
           whether
           this
           hath
           been
           ,
           or
           no
           .
           We
           shall
           finde
           indeed
           in
           some
           new
           found
           Lands
           ,
           detested
           in
           ours
           and
           our
           fathers
           memory
           ,
           that
           the
           works
           of
           the
           Conversion
           of
           the
           
             Nations
          
           hath
           had
           some
           beginning
           and
           small
           progresse
           :
           But
           in
           many
           parts
           of
           the
           
             East
          
           to
           this
           day
           ,
           we
           shall
           finde
           so
           little
           progresse
           ,
           that
           not
           so
           much
           as
           a
           beginning
           thereof
           will
           anywhere
           yet
           appear
           .
        
         
           The
           
             thirteenth
          
           place
           is
           the
           whole
           97.
           
           
             Psalm
             .
          
           This
           
             Psalm
          
           containeth
           a
           Prophesie
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Christ
           in
           his
           Church
           of
           the
           
             New
             Testament
             ,
          
           as
           may
           be
           gathered
           out
           of
           the
           7.
           
             verse
             ,
          
           the
           latter
           part
           of
           which
           the
           Apostle
           
             Heb.
          
           1.6
           .
           alleageth
           concerning
           
             Christ
             .
          
           Again
           ,
           Many
           
             Islands
          
           are
           bid
           to
           
             rejoyce
             ,
          
           which
           cannot
           be
           accommodated
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           
             Old
             Testament
             .
          
           Whence
           by
           the
           word
           
             Sion
             ,
             verse
          
           8.
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           
             New
             Testament
          
           is
           to
           be
           understood
           ,
           as
           almost
           every where
           in
           
             Isaiah
             .
          
           Moreover
           in
           the
           6.
           
             verse
             ,
          
           it
           is
           said
           :
           
             All
             the
             pe●ple
             see
             his
             glory
             .
          
           Lastly
           ,
           the
           
             judgements
          
           of
           God
           upon
           his
           enemies
           ,
           and
           the
           
             Ioy
          
           of
           the
           Chur●h
           ,
           which
           both
           are
           here
           described
           ,
           have
           not
           as
           yet
           been
           accomplish●d
           .
        
         
           The
           
             fourteenth
          
           place
           is
           
             Psal.
          
           110.
           
           
             The
             Lord
             at
             thy
             right
             hand
             shall
             strike
             thorow
             Kings
             in
             the
             day
             of
             his
             wrath
             .
             He
             shall
             judge
             among
             the
             h●athen
             ,
             he
             shall
             fill
          
           the
           places
           
             with
             dead
             bodies
             .
             He
             shall
             wound
             the
          
           head
           
             over
             many
             Countries
             .
          
           That
           these
           things
           are
           not
           yet
           come
           to
           passe
           ,
           will
           appear
           to
           any
           one
           ,
           that
           will
           take
           into
           his
           consideration
           
             History
             ,
          
           and
           
             Experience
             .
          
           But
           that
           is
           especially
           to
           be
           taken
           notice
           of
           ,
           which
           he
           speaks
           concerning
           the
           
             Head
             over
             many
             Countreys
             .
          
           For
           without
           dou●t
           it
           is
           to
           be
           understood
           concerning
           that
           
             Great
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           whom
           many
           Countries
           acknowledge
           for
           the
           HEAD
           of
           the
           Church
           .
        
         
           The
           
             fifteenth
          
           place
           is
           
             Isai.
          
           2.1
           ,
           2
           ,
           3
           ,
           4.
           
           Here
           is
           mention
           made
           of
           the
           
             last
             times
          
           ;
           and
           four
           things
           are
           prophesied
           of
           ,
           which
           then
           shall
           happen
           out
           .
           1.
           
           
             The
             Mountain
             of
             God
             shall
             be
             placed
             on
             the
             top
             of
             the
             Mountains
             .
          
           2.
           
           
             All
             Nations
             shall
             flow
             in
             unto
             it
             .
          
           3.
           
           
             The
             Law
             shall
             come
             out
             of
          
           Sion
           .
           4.
           
           
             They
             shall
             beat
             their
             Swords
             into
             Plough-shares
             ,
          
           &c.
           
           
             Nation
             shall
             not
             lift
             up
             a
             sword
             against
             Nation
             ,
          
           &c.
           
           Of
           these
           the
           
             first
          
           and
           the
           
             third
          
           are
           fulfilled
           :
           The
           
             second
          
           will
           be
           brought
           
           to
           passe
           more
           and
           more
           every
           day
           :
           The
           
             fourth
          
           is
           not
           yet
           accomplished
           ;
           as
           
             experience
          
           hath
           hitherto
           taught
           us
           ,
           and
           doth
           yet
           teach
           us
           .
        
         
           The
           16.
           place
           is
           
             Isai.
          
           11.10
           ▪
           11
           ,
           12.
           
           Two
           things
           are
           here
           prophesied
           of
           .
           1.
           
           The
           Conversion
           of
           the
           
             Gentiles
          
           a
           little
           after
           the
           first
           coming
           of
           Christ
           by
           the
           preaching
           of
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           
             Verse
          
           the
           tenth
           ,
           
             For
             it
             shall
             come
             to
             passe
             at
             that
             time
          
           (
           of
           the
           coming
           of
           
             Christ
             ,
          
           of
           whom
           is
           the
           foregoing
           Prophesie
           from
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           
             Chapter
          
           hitherto
           )
           
             that
             the
             Nations
             shall
             seek
             unto
             the
             roote
             of
          
           Jesse
           .
           2.
           
           The
           Conversion
           of
           the
           
             Iews
          
           and
           
             Gentiles
          
           together
           ,
           
             Verse
          
           11
           ,
           12.
           
           See
           
             H●urnius
          
           upon
           this
           place
           .
           
           Compare
           this
           Prophesie
           with
           the
           sixteenth
           
             Verse
          
           of
           this
           Chapter
           ,
           and
           with
           the
           following
           twelfth
           Chapter
           .
        
         
           The
           17
           place
           is
           
             Isai.
          
           24.23
           .
           Where
           there
           is
           foretold
           that
           the
           Lord
           
             shall
             reign
             gloriously
             in
             the
             mount
             of
             Sion
             ,
             and
             in
          
           the
           City
           of
           
             Ierusalem
             :
          
           and
           in
           that
           manner
           ,
           That
           the
           
             Moon
          
           and
           
             Sun
             shall
             be
             covered
             with
             shame
          
           at
           this
           glory
           of
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           God
           in
           his
           Church
           ;
           so
           great
           shall
           be
           the
           glory
           and
           splendor
           thereof
           .
           Now
           this
           so
           great
           
             glory
          
           hath
           not
           as
           yet
           been
           seen
           ,
           either
           in
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           
             Old
             ,
          
           or
           
             New
          
           Testament
           .
           Therefore
           in
           it
           's
           due
           time
           it
           shall
           be
           seen
           .
        
         
           The
           18
           place
           is
           
             Isai.
          
           25.
           from
           the
           1
           to
           the
           13
           
             verse
             .
          
           Here
           is
           contained
           a
           Prophesie
           concerning
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           
             New
          
           Testament
           ,
           as
           it
           appears
           by
           the
           comparing
           of
           the
           8
           
             verse
          
           with
           
             Rev.
          
           7.17
           and
           
             chap.
          
           21.4
           .
           as
           also
           by
           comparing
           the
           2
           
             verse
          
           and
           the
           1●
           ,
           with
           
             Revel.
          
           16.19
           ,
           &c.
           and
           
             chap.
          
           18.
           
             ver.
          
           2.10.18.19
           .
           Now
           here
           it
           is
           prophesied
           concerning
           the
           deliverance
           of
           the
           Church
           from
           the
           persecution
           of
           enemies
           ,
           
             ver.
          
           3
           ,
           4
           ,
           5.
           concerning
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           enemies
           thereof
           ,
           
             vers.
          
           10
           ,
           11.
           and
           namely
           ,
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           City
           of
           
             Rome
             ,
             ver.
          
           2
           and
           12.
           
           Lastly
           ,
           concerning
           the
           joy
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           being
           now
           delivered
           from
           them
           that
           persecuted
           her
           ,
           
             vers.
          
           1.6
           ,
           7
           ,
           8
           ,
           9.
           
           And
           here
           you
           must
           take
           notice
           ,
           That
           by
           
             Moab
             ,
          
           or
           the
           
             Moabites
             ,
          
           the
           enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           are
           signified
           ,
           and
           indeed
           those
           ,
           who
           are
           joyned
           unto
           true
           
             Christians
             ,
          
           by
           the
           bond
           of
           the
           name
           
             Christian
             ,
          
           as
           the
           
             Moabites
          
           were
           joyned
           to
           the
           
             Iews
          
           by
           the
           bond
           of
           Consanguinity
           ,
           
           whom
           notwithstanding
           they
           persecuted
           with
           most
           hostible
           mindes
           and
           affections
           .
        
         
           The
           19
           pl●ce
           is
           
             Isai.
          
           26.1
           ,
           2
           ,
           3
           ,
           4
           ,
           5.
           where
           part
           of
           that
           
             song
          
           is
           set
           down
           ,
           wherewith
           the
           
             Iews
          
           were
           to
           praise
           God
           for
           their
           deliverance
           from
           the
           
             Babylonian
          
           Captivity
           ;
           wherewith
           the
           
             Christians
          
           also
           were
           to
           praise
           him
           for
           their
           deliverance
           from
           the
           Tyranny
           of
           
             Antichrist
          
           ;
           as
           may
           be
           gathered
           from
           the
           comparing
           of
           
             Revel.
          
           14.8
           .
           and
           
             chap.
          
           18.2
           .
           with
           the
           5
           and
           6
           
             verses
          
           of
           this
           
             Chapter
             .
          
        
         
           The
           20
           place
           is
           
             Isai.
          
           27.
           
           That
           this
           Chapter
           doth
           treat
           of
           the
           Conversion
           of
           the
           
             Iews
          
           ;
           this
           may
           serve
           for
           a
           most
           certain
           Argument
           ,
           because
           the
           Apostle
           alleadgeth
           some
           part
           of
           the
           9
           
             verse
             ,
             Rom.
          
           11.27
           .
           consider
           also
           diligently
           the
           two
           last
           
             verses
             .
          
        
         
           The
           21
           is
           
             Isai.
          
           33.20
           ,
           21
           ,
           22
           ,
           23
           ,
           24.
           
           Where
           the
           City
           it self
           
             Hierusalem
             ,
          
           so
           commonly
           called
           ,
           cannot
           be
           understood
           ,
           by
           reason
           that
           after
           this
           Prophesie
           it
           was
           overthrown
           by
           the
           
             Romans
             .
          
           Therefore
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           is
           signified
           ,
           which
           every where
           in
           the
           Prophesies
           of
           
             Isaiah
          
           is
           mystically
           and
           typically
           ,
           or
           metaphorically
           called
           
             Hierusalem
             .
          
           Now
           the
           things
           prophesied
           concerning
           it
           are
           
             Peace
             ,
             Defence
          
           against
           enemies
           ,
           and
           
             Victory
             .
          
           All
           which
           have
           not
           yet
           happened
           ;
           and
           therefore
           certainly
           shall
           .
        
         
           The
           22
           place
           is
           
             Isai.
          
           34.
           from
           the
           1
           to
           the
           18
           
             verse
             .
          
           Where
           you
           may
           collect
           that
           a
           Prophesie
           is
           here
           contained
           of
           the
           overthrow
           of
           the
           enemies
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           ,
           by
           comparing
           the
           4
           
             verse
          
           with
           
             Revel.
          
           6.14
           .
           and
           the
           tenth
           
             verse
          
           with
           
             Revel.
          
           19
           3.
           and
           the
           11
           
             verse
          
           with
           
             Revel.
          
           18.2
           .
           Now
           by
           the
           
             Edomites
             ,
          
           the
           false
           brethren
           of
           true
           
             Christians
          
           are
           set
           forth
           ;
           and
           by
           
             Bozrah
             ,
          
           the
           chief
           City
           of
           
             Edom
             ,
             Rome
             ,
          
           the
           chief
           City
           of
           
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           is
           figured
           out
           ,
           whose
           ruine
           is
           most
           feelingly
           described
           in
           the
           10
           ,
           11
           ,
           12
           ,
           13
           ,
           14
           ,
           15
           ,
           17
           
             verses
             .
          
        
         
           The
           23
           place
           is
           
             Isai.
          
           43.
           the
           whole
           Chapter
           .
           The
           discourse
           whereof
           is
           concerning
           the
           conversion
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             .
          
           Especially
           consider
           the
           5
           and
           6
           
             verses
             .
             I
             will
             bring
             thy
             seed
             from
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             gather
             thee
             from
             the
             West
             .
             I
             will
             say
             to
             the
             NORTH
             ,
             Give
             up
             ;
             and
             to
             the
             South
             ,
             Keep
             not
             back
             :
             Bring
             my
             sons
             from
          
           farre
           ,
           
             and
             my
             daughters
             from
             the
          
           ends
           of
           the
           earth
           .
        
         
           The
           24
           place
           is
           
             Isai.
          
           45.22
           .
           and
           25.
           
           
             Look
             unto
             me
             ,
             and
             be
             ye
             
             saved
             all
             the
             ends
             of
             the
             earth
             .
          
           25.
           
           
             In
             the
             Lord
             shall
             all
             the
             seed
             of
             Israel
             be
             justified
             ,
             and
             shall
             glory
             .
          
           This
           is
           spoken
           of
           the
           Universall
           vocation
           of
           the
           
             Gentiles
             ,
          
           and
           
             Iews
             :
          
           which
           two
           things
           have
           not
           yet
           come
           about
           .
        
         
           The
           25
           is
           
             Isai.
          
           49.24
           ▪
           25
           ,
           26.
           
           Which
           words
           agree
           with
           the
           foregoing
           Prophesie
           of
           the
           calling
           of
           the
           
             Gentiles
             ,
          
           from
           the
           18
           
             ver.
          
           and
           therefore
           are
           to
           be
           interpreted
           of
           the
           Church
           under
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           which
           complains
           of
           the
           power
           of
           her
           persecutors
           ,
           
             ver
          
           24.
           and
           is
           strengthned
           again
           by
           Christ
           with
           promise
           of
           deliverance
           ,
           
             verse
          
           25.
           and
           with
           threats
           of
           the
           ruine
           of
           those
           which
           persecuted
           her
           ,
           
             ver.
          
           26.
           
           Compare
           
             Revel.
          
           16.6
           .
        
         
           The
           26
           
             place
          
           is
           
             Isai.
          
           54.14
           ,
           15
           ,
           16
           ,
           17.
           
           That
           this
           Prophesie
           doth
           speak
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           ,
           is
           from
           hence
           made
           plain
           ,
           by
           reason
           that
           in
           this
           chapter
           a
           Prophesie
           is
           contained
           concerning
           those
           benefits
           which
           God
           would
           bestow
           upon
           the
           faithfull
           under
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           whereto
           it
           makes
           also
           ,
           That
           Christ
           ,
           
             Ioh.
          
           6.45
           ,
           alleadgeth
           the
           first
           part
           of
           the
           13
           
             verse
             .
          
           Now
           in
           this
           place
           of
           the
           
             Prophet
          
           cited
           by
           us
           is
           contained
           a
           Prediction
           of
           the
           defence
           of
           the
           
             Christian
          
           Church
           against
           enemies
           ,
           which
           is
           not
           yet
           fulfilled
           .
        
         
           The
           27
           place
           is
           
             Isai.
          
           59.16
           ,
           17
           ,
           18
           ,
           19
           ,
           20
           ,
           21
           ,
           That
           here
           also
           is
           contained
           a
           Prophesie
           of
           the
           Church
           under
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           appears
           by
           comparing
           the
           16
           
             verse
          
           with
           
             chap.
          
           63.5
           .
           as
           also
           the
           20
           verse
           with
           
             Rom.
          
           11.26
           .
           Now
           there
           are
           three
           members
           of
           this
           Prophesie
           :
           One
           of
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           which
           shall
           happen
           before
           the
           conversion
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             ,
             vers.
          
           16
           ,
           17
           ,
           18
           ,
           19.
           
           Another
           of
           the
           Majesty
           or
           glory
           which
           shall
           accrew
           to
           the
           Church
           by
           the
           ruine
           of
           her
           adversaries
           ,
           
             vers.
          
           19.
           
           
             When
             the
             enemy
             shall
             come
             in
             like
             a
             flood
             ,
             the
             Spirit
             of
             the
             Lord
             shall
             lift
             up
             a
             Standard
             against
             him
             .
          
           The
           third
           is
           of
           the
           conversion
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             ,
             vers.
          
           20
           ,
           21.
           
        
         
           The
           28
           place
           is
           
             Isai.
          
           60.
           
           Which
           whole
           chapter
           treats
           of
           the
           happinesse
           which
           is
           yet
           to
           accrew
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           Gospel
           ▪
           as
           will
           appear
           to
           them
           that
           consider
           of
           it
           .
        
         
           The
           29
           place
           is
           
             Isai.
          
           63.
           the
           first
           six
           verses
           .
           It
           will
           be
           made
           plain
           to
           any
           one
           ,
           that
           this
           Prophesie
           doth
           speak
           of
           the
           deliverance
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           from
           the
           ministers
           and
           followers
           
           of
           
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           if
           he
           do
           but
           compare
           it
           with
           
             Revel.
          
           14
           19
           ,
           20.
           and
           
             chap.
          
           19.13
           ,
           and
           15.
           
           Who
           are
           signified
           by
           the
           
             Edomites
             ,
          
           and
           
             Bozrab
             ,
          
           appears
           by
           looking
           back
           to
           the
           22
           ▪
           place
           .
        
         
           The
           30
           place
           is
           
             Ierem.
          
           16.14
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           .
           This
           Prophesie
           discourseth
           of
           the
           conversion
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             ,
             ver.
          
           15.
           
           
             The
             Lord
             liveth
             ,
             that
             brought
             up
             the
             Children
             of
             Israel
             from
             the
             Land
             of
             the
             NORTH
             ,
             and
             from
             all
             the
             Lands
             whither
             he
             had
             driven
             them
             :
             and
             I
             will
             bring
             them
             again
             into
             their
             Land
             which
             I
             gave
             to
             their
             fathers
             .
          
           Also
           concerning
           the
           vocation
           of
           the
           
             Gentiles
             ,
             ver.
          
           19.
           
           
             The
             Gentiles
             shall
             come
             unto
             the●
             from
             the
             ends
             of
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             shall
             say
             ,
             Surely
             our
             fathers
             have
             inherited
             lies
             ,
             vanity
             ,
             and
          
           things
           
             wherein
          
           there
           is
           
             no
             profit
             .
          
        
         
           The
           31
           place
           is
           
             Ierem.
          
           23.3
           .
           where
           the
           conversion
           of
           the
           
             Iews
          
           is
           treated
           of
           .
        
         
           The
           32
           place
           is
           
             Ierem.
          
           33.
           
             ver.
          
           3.
           and
           the
           following
           .
           
             For
             ●
             ,
             the
             dayes
             come
             ,
             saith
             the
             Lord
             ,
             that
             I
             will
             bring
             again
             the
             Captivity
             of
             my
             people
             Israel
             ,
             and
             Iudah
             .
          
           And
           a
           little
           after
           ,
           
             But
             they
             shall
             serve
             the
             Lord
             their
             God
             ,
             and
          
           David
           their
           King
           ;
           or
           as
           the
           
             Chaldee
          
           Paraphrase
           hath
           it
           ,
           
             Christ
             ,
             the
             son
             of
          
           David
           
             their
             King
             .
          
           Behold
           again
           a
           most
           sweet
           prophesie
           of
           the
           conversion
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             !
          
        
         
           The
           33
           place
           is
           
             Ierem.
          
           31.1
           ▪
           3.
           
           Where
           in
           like
           manner
           the
           conversion
           of
           the
           Jews
           is
           prophesied
           of
           .
           
           See
           
             Heurnius
          
           in
           his
           Book
           formerly
           cited
           by
           us
           .
        
         
           The
           34
           place
           is
           
             Ierem.
          
           31.31
           ,
           32
           ▪
           33
           ,
           34.
           
           That
           a
           Prophesie
           concerning
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           Gospel
           is
           contained
           in
           this
           place
           ,
           may
           be
           perceived
           by
           the
           alleadging
           thereof
           in
           
             Matth.
          
           3.18
           .
           and
           in
           the
           Epistle
           to
           the
           
             Hebrews
             ,
             chap.
          
           8.8
           .
           Now
           the
           conversion
           of
           the
           Jews
           is
           there
           promised
           ,
           in
           as
           much
           as
           God
           promiseth
           the
           people
           of
           
             Israel
             ,
          
           that
           he
           would
           make
           a
           new
           Covenant
           with
           them
           ,
           by
           means
           of
           which
           he
           would
           forgive
           their
           sins
           ,
           and
           write
           his
           Law
           in
           their
           hearts
           .
           Which
           conversion
           of
           the
           Jews
           is
           not
           yet
           brought
           to
           passe
           ,
           because
           since
           the
           
             Gospel
          
           began
           to
           be
           preached
           ,
           the
           greatest
           part
           of
           the
           Jews
           have
           continued
           in
           unbelief
           .
           Wherefore
           it
           shall
           be
           brought
           to
           passe
           in
           it
           's
           good
           time
           .
        
         
           The
           35
           place
           is
           
             Ierem.
          
           32.37
           ,
           39.
           
           
             Behold
             ,
             I
             will
             gather
             them
             out
             of
             all
             Countries
             ,
             whither
             I
             have
             driven
             them
             in
             mine
             anger
             .
             And
             I
             will
             give
             them
             one
             heart
             ,
             and
             one
             way
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             fear
             〈◊〉
             
             for
             ever
             .
          
           Here
           again
           is
           promised
           the
           conversion
           of
           the
           Jews
           ;
           which
           alike
           belongs
           to
           the
           happy
           condition
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           
             New
             Testament
             .
          
        
         
           The
           26
           place
           is
           
             Ezek.
          
           36.26
           ,
           and
           the
           following
           .
           Where
           the
           Prophet
           saith
           ,
           that
           it
           should
           come
           to
           passe
           ,
           That
           God
           would
           
             give
             them
             a
             new
             heart
             ,
             and
             put
             a
             new
             spirit
             within
             them
             .
          
           By
           which
           words
           no
           doubt
           the
           conversion
           of
           the
           Jews
           is
           signified
           ●
           which
           having
           not
           been
           ,
           it
           remains
           it
           shall
           be
           .
        
         
           The
           37
           place
           is
           
             Dan.
          
           11.33
           ,
           34.
           
           
             And
             they
             that
             understand
             among
             the
             people
             ,
             shall
             instruct
             many
             :
             yet
             they
             shall
             fall
             by
             the
             sword
             ,
             and
             by
             flame
             ,
             by
             captivity
             ,
             and
             by
             spoil
             many
             dayes
             .
             Now
             when
             they
             shall
             fall
             ,
             they
             shall
             be
             ●olpen
             by
             a
             little
             help
             .
          
           This
           Prophesie
           is
           to
           be
           understood
           according
           to
           the
           letter
           ,
           of
           the
           affliction
           and
           deliverance
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           the
           time
           of
           
             Antiochus
             ,
          
           and
           the
           
             Maccabees
          
           ;
           typically
           and
           mystically
           of
           the
           affliction
           and
           deliverance
           of
           the
           Church
           under
           
             Antichrist
             .
          
           Which
           deliverance
           indeed
           :
           is
           part
           of
           the
           happinesse
           of
           the
           Church
           under
           the
           Gospel
           .
           Now
           that
           
             Antiochus
          
           was
           a
           type
           of
           
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           appears
           by
           comparing
           
             Dan.
          
           11.36
           ,
           and
           2
           
             Thess.
          
           24.
           
        
         
           The
           38
           place
           is
           
             Dan.
          
           11.44
           ,
           45.
           
           
             But
             rumors
             out
             of
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             out
             of
             the
             North
             shall
             trouble
             him
             .
             Therefore
             he
             shall
             go
             forth
             with
             great
             fury
             to
             destroy
             ,
             and
             utterly
             to
             make
             away
             many
             .
             And
             he
             shall
             plant
             the
             Tabernacles
             of
             his
             Palace
             between
             the
             Seas
             in
             the
             glorious
             holy
             mountain
             ;
             yet
             he
             shall
             come
             to
             his
             end
             ,
             and
             no●e
             shall
             help
             him
             .
          
           These
           
             three
          
           things
           are
           unfolded
           in
           this
           Prophesie
           :
           1.
           
           The
           
             Protasis
             ,
          
           or
           
             beginning
          
           of
           these
           tumults
           ,
           wherewith
           
             Iudea
          
           in
           old
           time
           ,
           and
           
             Europe
          
           at
           this
           day
           is
           most
           grievously
           afflicted
           .
           2.
           
           The
           
             Epitasis
             ,
          
           or
           
             busie
             part
             ,
          
           so
           wondrous
           full
           of
           troubles
           and
           contention
           .
           3.
           
           Lastly
           ,
           the
           
             Catastrophe
             ,
          
           or
           
             issue
             ,
          
           of
           these
           tumults
           ,
           so
           much
           desired
           ,
           and
           wished
           for
           by
           the
           Church
           .
           How
           every
           one
           of
           these
           severally
           are
           fulfilled
           in
           
             Antiochus
             ,
          
           as
           a
           type
           of
           
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           it
           is
           nothing
           pertinent
           to
           our
           purpose
           to
           enquire
           .
           Neither
           indeed
           is
           the
           matter
           so
           obscure
           ,
           or
           unknown
           .
           Let
           us
           examine
           how
           they
           will
           suit
           with
           
             Antichrist
             .
          
           The
           
             Protasis
             ,
          
           or
           
             first
             Act
             ,
          
           as
           they
           say
           ,
           is
           in
           these
           words
           :
           
             At
             length
             rumors
             from
             the
             East
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             North
             shall
             trouble
             him
             .
          
           The
           
             rumour
          
           from
           the
           East
           sounded
           loud
           in
           the
           year
           of
           Christ
           M.
           CCCC.LIII
           .
           when
           
             Constantinople
          
           
           was
           taken
           :
           also
           in
           the
           year
           ,
           M.
           CCCC.LXXXI
           .
           when
           
             *
          
           
             Geduces
          
           the
           
             Bassa
          
           broke
           into
           
             Italy
             .
          
           The
           same
           rumour
           was
           renewed
           ▪
           when
           the
           House
           of
           
             Othoman
             ,
          
           having
           quite
           overthrown
           the
           
             Sultans
          
           power
           ,
           turned
           his
           Arms
           the
           second
           time
           upon
           
             Europe
          
           ;
           and
           taking
           
             a
          
           
             Belgrad●
             ,
          
           and
           the
           Island
           
             b
          
           
             Rhodes
             ,
          
           began
           to
           invade
           the
           Territories
           of
           the
           
             Latine
             Church
             .
          
           This
           rumor
           from
           the
           
             East
             ,
          
           was
           followed
           with
           a
           rumor
           from
           the
           
             North
             ,
          
           in
           the
           yeer
           of
           Christ
           ,
           
             *
          
           M.D.XVII
           ,
           and
           so
           forward
           .
           The
           
             Epitasis
             ,
          
           or
           
             busie
             part
             ,
          
           is
           in
           these
           :
           
             Therefore
             he
             shall
             go
             forth
             with
             great
             fury
             to
             destroy
             ,
             and
             utterly
             to
             make
             away
             many
             .
             And
             he
             shall
             plant
             the
             Tabernacles
             of
             his
             Palace
             between
             the
             Seas
             in
             the
             glorious
             holy
             mountain
             .
          
           At
           this
           day
           
             Antichrist
          
           in
           the
           performance
           thereof
           ,
           goes
           on
           under
           full
           Sail
           ,
           wanting
           no
           favour
           of
           windes
           .
           For
           after
           he
           was
           troubled
           with
           the
           
             rumor
          
           out
           of
           the
           North
           ,
           with
           great
           and
           high
           Spirit
           he
           assaulted
           all
           them
           who
           either
           began
           this
           rumour
           ,
           or
           since
           favoured
           it
           ,
           or
           do
           at
           this
           time
           any
           way
           cherish
           it
           .
           Neither
           doth
           he
           slack
           in
           these
           his
           attempts
           ;
           for
           he
           hath
           destroyed
           ,
           and
           utterly
           made
           away
           with
           many
           of
           Gods
           people
           .
           Moreover
           he
           hath
           
             planted
          
           the
           Tabernacles
           of
           his
           Palace
           
             between
             the
             Seas
             in
             the
             glorious
             holy
             mountain
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           He
           hath
           propagated
           his
           Religion
           among
           those
           people
           ,
           who
           had
           a
           long
           time
           professed
           the
           purity
           of
           Religion
           .
           But
           it
           is
           well
           that
           the
           
             Catastrophe
             ,
          
           or
           
             last
             act
             ,
          
           is
           not
           answerable
           to
           the
           
             Epitasis
             ,
          
           or
           
             middle
             part
          
           of
           the
           Tragedy
           .
           This
           brave
           
             Planter
          
           in
           the
           midst
           of
           his
           
             Plantation
             ,
          
           will
           have
           some
           unlucky
           chance
           befall
           him
           .
           For
           when
           
             he
             shall
             come
             to
             his
             end
             ,
             none
             shall
             help
             him
             .
          
           On
           the
           sudden
           a
           tempest
           shall
           arise
           ,
           which
           shall
           bring
           shipwrack
           upon
           
           this
           bold
           Steers-man
           .
           
           But
           see
           more
           of
           this
           in
           
             Conrodus
             Graserus
          
           his
           
             History
             of
             Antichrist
             .
          
        
         
           The
           39.
           place
           is
           
             Dan.
          
           12.1
           .
           
             And
             at
             that
             time
             shall
          
           Michael
           
             stand
             up
             ,
             the
             great
             Prince
             which
             standeth
             for
             the
             children
             of
             thy
             people
             ,
             and
             there
             shall
             be
             a
             time
             of
             trouble
             ,
             such
             as
             never
             was
             since
             there
             was
             a
             Nation
             ,
             even
             to
             that
             same
             time
             :
             and
             at
             that
             time
             thy
             people
             shall
             be
             delivered
             ,
             every
             one
             that
             shall
             be
             found
             Written
             in
             the
             book
             .
          
           I
           interpret
           this
           prophesie
           of
           the
           last
           persecution
           ,
           or
           the
           warre
           of
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
             ,
          
           which
           shall
           immediately
           go
           before
           the
           last
           Judgement
           .
           I
           am
           perswaded
           hereto
           by
           these
           
             two
          
           Reasons
           .
           1.
           
           Because
           the
           time
           of
           
             this
             trouble
          
           is
           said
           to
           be
           such
           ,
           
             as
             hath
             not
             been
          
           
             *
          
           
             since
             there
             was
             a
             Nation
             .
          
           Which
           Not●
           of
           time
           cannot
           agree
           with
           any
           persecution
           ,
           but
           that
           which
           was
           most
           grievous
           ;
           such
           as
           was
           that
           of
           
             Gog.
          
           2.
           
           Because
           in
           the
           2.
           
             verse
          
           of
           this
           
             Chapter
             ,
          
           after
           that
           time
           of
           
             trouble
             ,
             vers.
          
           1.
           the
           Resurrection
           ,
           and
           the
           last
           Judgement
           are
           immediately
           treated
           of
           .
        
         
           The
           40
           place
           is
           
             Dan.
          
           12.11
           ,
           12.
           
           
             And
             from
             the
             time
             that
             the
             daily
             sacrifice
             shall
             be
             taken
             away
             ,
             and
             the
             abomination
             ,
             that
             maketh
             desolate
             ,
             set
             up
             ,
             there
             shall
             be
             a
          
           thousand
           two
           hundred
           
             and
          
           ninety
           
             dayes
             .
             Blessed
             is
             he
             that
             waiteth
             ,
             and
             commeth
             to
             the
          
           thousand
           three
           hundred
           
             and
          
           five
           
             and
          
           thirty
           
             dayes
             .
          
           Here
           these
           words
           ;
           
             But
             from
             the
             time
             ,
          
           &c.
           are
           to
           be
           understood
           of
           the
           last
           destruction
           of
           the
           City
           
             Hierusalem
          
           by
           
             TITVS
             :
          
           because
           then
           the
           daily
           sacrifice
           was
           taken
           away
           ,
           and
           the
           
             *
          
           
             abomination
          
           of
           desolation
           was
           set
           up
           ,
           as
           appears
           by
           comparing
           this
           place
           with
           the
           9.
           
             chap.
          
           of
           
             Daniel
             ,
             vers.
          
           26
           ,
           27.
           
           Again
           ,
           propheticall
           
             dayes
          
           are
           here
           to
           be
           understood
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           
             years
             :
          
           Because
           these
           
             dayes
          
           are
           
             homogeneall
             ,
          
           or
           of
           the
           
             same
             kinde
          
           with
           the
           
             weeks
             ,
             chap.
          
           9.
           
           But
           those
           
             weeks
          
           are
           propheticall
           ;
           therefore
           also
           these
           dayes
           .
           Now
           
             Daniel
          
           carries
           us
           on
           to
           the
           end
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           by
           proposing
           
             two
             Periods
             ,
          
           or
           
             limited
             times
             ,
          
           of
           the
           
             New
             Testament
             ,
          
           and
           by
           joyning
           them
           to
           his
           
             seventy
             weeks
          
           ▪
           in
           this
           manner
           .
           The
           70.
           weeks
           are
           terminated
           with
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           City
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           with
           the
           year
           of
           
             Christ
             ,
          
           69.
           
           Here
           begins
           the
           
             Epocha
             ,
          
           or
           
             account
          
           of
           1290
           
             dayes
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           of
           so
           many
           years
           :
           So
           shall
           we
           come
           to
           
           the
           year
           of
           
             Christ
          
           
             a
          
           1359.
           
           At
           which
           we
           must
           begin
           the
           
             Epo●●●
          
           of
           1335
           dayes
           ,
           or
           years
           :
           And
           so
           we
           shall
           be
           brought
           to
           the
           y●●●
           of
           Christ
           
             b
          
           2694.
           in
           which
           the
           
             Thousand
          
           years
           in
           the
           
             Revelation
          
           shall
           have
           end
           :
           and
           they
           being
           ended
           the
           warre
           of
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
          
           shall
           begin
           ,
           to
           which
           also
           the
           last
           
             Iudgement
          
           shall
           put
           an
           end
           .
           See
           more
           in
           my
           
             Thesaurus
             Chronologicus
             pag.
          
           51
           
             c
          
           .
           Compare
           also
           the
           
             Annotations
          
           of
           
             Lucas
             Osiander
          
           on
           
             Daniel
          
           12.
           
        
         
           The
           41
           place
           is
           
             Hos●
             .
          
           1.11
           .
           
             Then
             shall
             the
             Children
             of
          
           Judah
           ,
           
             and
             the
             children
             of
          
           Israel
           
             be
             gathered
             together
             ,
             and
             appoint
             themselves
             as
             head
             ,
             and
             they
             shall
             come
             up
             out
             of
             the
             Land
             ;
             for
             great
             shall
             be
             the
             day
             of
          
           Jezreel
           .
           This
           truely
           is
           not
           yet
           brought
           to
           passe
           .
        
         
           The
           42
           place
           is
           
             Hos.
          
           3.4
           ,
           5.
           
           
             For
             the
             Children
             of
          
           Israel
           
             shall
             abi●●
             many
             ●●yes
             without
             a
          
           King
           ,
           
             and
             without
             a
             Prince
             ,
             and
             without
             a
             Sacrifice
             ,
             and
             without
             an
             Imag●
             ,
             and
             without
             an
             Ephod
             ,
             and
             without
          
           
             *
          
           
             Teraphim
             .
             Afterward
             shall
             the
             Children
             of
          
           Israel
           
             turn
             ,
             and
             seek
             the
             Lord
             their
             God
             ,
             and
          
           David
           
             their
             King
             ,
             and
             shall
             fear
             the
             Lord
             ,
             and
             his
             goodnesse
             in
             the
             latter
             dayes
             .
          
           The
           
             Chaldee
          
           Paraphrase
           turns
           it
           thus
           :
           
             A
             long
             〈◊〉
             the
             Children
             of
          
           Israel
           
             shall
             remain
             without
             a
          
           King
           
             of
             the
             posterity
             of
          
           David
           ,
           
             neither
             shall
             there
             be
             any
             to
             bear
             rule
             in
          
           Israel
           ,
           
             or
             to
             perform
             acceptable
             sacrifice
             to
             God
             in
          
           Hierusalem
           :
           
             Neither
             shall
             there
             be
             any
             Statue
             in
          
           Samaria
           ,
           
             nei●●●r
             any
             Ephod
             ,
             or
             Prophet
             .
             Afterward
             the
          
           Israelites
           
             shall
             be
             turned
             ,
             and
             they
             shall
             be
             diligen●
             in
             the
             ●orship
             of
             the
             Lord
             their
             God
             ,
             and
             they
             shall
             obey
             CHRIST
             the
             Sonne
             of
          
           David
           ,
           
             their
          
           King
           ;
           
             and
             they
             shall
             yeeld
             themselves
             to
             the
             worship
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             and
             then
             his
             goodnesse
             shall
             be
             
             infinite
             ,
             which
             shall
             happen
             un●●
             them
             in
             the
             last
             dayes
             .
          
           This
           Prophesie
           ,
           above
           all
           that
           can
           be
           said
           ,
           the
           antient
           Interpreters
           in
           generall
           do
           expound
           concerning
           the
           Conversion
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             ,
          
           in
           the
           end
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           to
           the
           
             Christian
          
           faith
           .
           And
           indeed
           the
           words
           are
           very
           plain
           :
           Because
           the
           
             Israelites
             ,
          
           which
           were
           carried
           away
           captives
           by
           
             Salm●nassar
             ,
          
           and
           scattered
           into
           severall
           Countries
           ,
           are
           prophesied
           of
           that
           they
           shall
           return
           to
           God
           ,
           and
           to
           
             David
          
           their
           
             King
          
           ▪
           that
           is
           ,
           CHRIST
           ,
           whose
           type
           
             David
          
           was
           ▪
           Which
           returning
           of
           theirs
           ▪
           seeing
           it
           hath
           not
           yet
           been
           ,
           it
           is
           certain
           that
           in
           it's
           own
           time
           it
           shall
           be
           .
           Now
           this
           belongs
           to
           the
           happinesse
           of
           the
           Church
           under
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           which
           the
           
             Revelation
          
           defines
           in
           the
           
             Period
             ,
          
           or
           
             limited
             time
          
           of
           a
           
             Thousand
             years
             .
          
        
         
           The
           43
           place
           is
           
             I●●l
             .
          
           3.1
           ,
           ●
           .
           and
           from
           the
           9.
           to
           the
           14.
           
           Which
           Prophesie
           ,
           that
           it
           speaks
           concerning
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           ,
           appears
           plainly
           by
           comparing
           the
           13.
           
             verse
          
           with
           
             Revel.
          
           14.
           the
           15.19
           .
           and
           20.
           
             verses
             .
          
           Now
           what
           is
           here
           spoken
           of
           the
           
             Valley
             of
             I●●oshaphat
             ,
          
           is
           to
           be
           taken
           mystically
           ,
           or
           typically
           .
           For
           as
           God
           in
           old
           time
           ,
           in
           the
           Valley
           of
           
             Iehoshaphat
          
           overthrew
           the
           
             A●●o●ites
             ,
          
           and
           the
           
             Moabites
             ,
          
           and
           that
           by
           his
           Angels
           .
           2
           
             Chron.
          
           ●0
           .
           so
           in
           his
           good
           time
           he
           will
           slay
           the
           enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           a
           like
           place
           ,
           which
           
             Revel.
          
           16.16
           .
           is
           called
           
             Armageddon
             .
          
           
           This
           also
           maketh
           hereto
           ,
           That
           the
           Valley
           of
           
             Iehoshaphat
          
           is
           called
           
             the
             V●lley
             of
             threshing
             ,
          
           because
           the
           
             Moabites
             ,
          
           and
           the
           
             Ammonites
          
           were
           ,
           as
           it
           may
           be
           said
           ,
           threshed
           by
           the
           Angel
           of
           God
           in
           that
           place
           ▪
           by
           whose
           threshing
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           enemies
           of
           
             Christs
          
           Church
           is
           signified
           ,
           
             Isaiah
          
           25.10
           .
        
         
           The
           44
           place
           is
           
             Amos
          
           9.14
           ,
           15.
           
           
             I
             will
             bring
             again
             the
             Captivity
             of
             my
             people
          
           Israel
           :
           
             and
             they
             shall
             build
             the
             waste
             Cities
             ,
             and
             inhabite
             them
             .
             And
             I
             will
             plant
             them
             upon
             their
             Land
             ;
             they
             shall
             〈◊〉
             more
             be
             pulled
             up
             out
             of
             their
             Land
             .
          
           Which
           Prophesie
           speaks
           of
           the
           Conversion
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             .
          
        
         
           The
           45
           place
           is
           
             Mich.
          
           2.12
           .
           
             I
             will
             surely
             assemble
             ,
          
           O
           Jacob
           ,
           
             all
             of
             the●
             ;
             I
             will
             surely
             gather
             the
             re●●●nt
             of
          
           Israel
           .
           As
           if
           he
           should
           say
           ;
           I
           will
           gather
           unto
           the
           
             Messias
          
           that
           blessed
           se●●
           of
           
             Abraham
             ,
          
           and
           full
           store-house
           of
           〈◊〉
           ,
           all
           and
           every
           tribe
           ,
           〈◊〉
           they
           are
           the
           seed
           of
           
             Iacob
             .
          
        
         
           The
           46
           place
           is
           
             Mich.
          
           4.
           
           The
           whole
           Chapter
           contai●●
           a
           Prophesie
           
           of
           the
           Church
           under
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           as
           may
           be
           gathered
           from
           these
           words
           ,
           
             In
             the
             last
             times
             ,
          
           or
           
             In
             the
             end
             of
             dayes
             ,
             vers.
          
           1.
           
           Also
           from
           the
           description
           of
           the
           Vocation
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           
             Vers.
          
           1
           ,
           2
           ▪
           3.
           
           Compare
           with
           this
           place
           ,
           
             Isai.
          
           2.
           
           But
           besides
           the
           Prophesie
           of
           the
           calling
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           ,
           
             Vers.
          
           1
           ,
           2
           ,
           3.
           which
           by
           the
           preaching
           of
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           and
           their
           successors
           was
           accomplished
           ,
           here
           is
           also
           contained
           a
           prophesie
           of
           the
           happy
           condition
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           which
           yet
           remains
           to
           be
           fulfilled
           :
           namely
           ,
           concerning
           the
           Peace
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           in
           the
           end
           of
           
             third
             ,
          
           and
           4
           
             Verse
             .
          
           Then
           of
           the
           Conversion
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             ,
             Vers.
          
           5
           ,
           6
           ,
           7.
           
           Of
           the
           
             Majesty
             ,
          
           and
           glory
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           
             Vers.
          
           8.
           
           Lastly
           ,
           Of
           the
           
             victory
          
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           which
           it
           shall
           gain
           over
           it
           's
           enemies
           .
           
             Vers.
          
           9.
           and
           the
           following
           .
        
         
           The
           47
           place
           is
           
             Mich.
          
           5.7
           .
           and
           the
           following
           ;
           where
           he
           treateth
           of
           the
           Conversion
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             .
          
        
         
           The
           48
           place
           is
           
             Zephan
             .
          
           3.9
           .
           
             I
             will
             turn
             to
             the
             people
             a
          
           
             *
          
           
             pure
             Language
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             all
             call
             upon
             the
             name
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             &c.
          
           to
           the
           end
           .
           Here
           is
           contained
           a
           threefold
           prophesie
           .
           1.
           
           Of
           the
           calling
           of
           the
           
             Gentiles
             ,
          
           which
           was
           done
           by
           the
           preaching
           of
           the
           
             Apostles
             ,
             Vers.
          
           9.10
           .
           2.
           
           Of
           the
           Conversion
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             .
          
           From
           the
           11.
           to
           the
           20.
           3.
           
           Of
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           
             Ver.
          
           14.
           to
           these
           words
           ,
           
             Vers.
          
           19.
           
           
             I
             will
             save
             her
             that
             halteth
             ,
             &c.
             
          
        
         
           The
           49
           place
           is
           
             Zepha
             .
          
           3.10
           .
           
             From
             beyond
             the
             rivers
             of
          
           
             *
          
           Ethiopia
           
             my
             suppliants
             ,
             even
             the
             daughter
             of
             my
             dispersed
             shall
             bring
             mine
             offering
             .
          
           The
           
             Chaldee
          
           thus
           expresseth
           it
           :
           
             From
             the
             Countries
             beyond
             the
             Rivers
             of
          
           INDIA
           
             by
             my
             mercy
             the
             banished
             of
             my
             people
             ,
             which
             were
             carried
             away
             ,
             shall
             return
             ▪
             and
             they
             shall
             bring
             them
             as
             Offerings
             .
          
        
         
           The
           50
           place
           is
           
             Zach.
          
           2.10
           .
           and
           the
           following
           .
           It
           appears
           plainly
           ,
           That
           this
           prophesie
           speaks
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           ,
           by
           the
           10.
           and
           11
           :
           
             Vers.
          
           where
           the
           Jews
           are
           commanded
           to
           go
           out
           of
           the
           
             Babylonian
          
           captivity
           ,
           which
           was
           now
           at
           that
           time
           finished
           .
           Whence
           it
           is
           gathered
           ,
           that
           mention
           is
           made
           here
           of
           the
           mysticall
           
             Babylon
             ,
             Revel.
          
           18.4
           .
           Now
           here
           is
           promise
           made
           to
           the
           faithfull
           under
           the
           Gospel
           of
           their
           protection
           against
           their
           enemies
           ;
           Also
           of
           the
           Conversion
           of
           the
           
             Gentiles
             ,
          
           and
           of
           the
           
             Iews
          
           ;
           and
           of
           their
           joy
           which
           shall
           arise
           from
           the
           defence
           and
           dwelling
           of
           God
           with
           them
           .
        
         
           The
           51
           place
           is
           
             Zach.
          
           12.1
           .
           to
           the
           end
           .
           It
           may
           hence
           be
           perceived
           that
           the
           prophesie
           in
           this
           Chapter
           doth
           speak
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           
           N.
           T.
           because
           experience
           it self
           opposeth
           the
           litterall
           sence
           here
           ▪
           in
           the
           2.
           
             vers.
          
           and
           following
           ▪
           concerning
           the
           protection
           of
           
             Hierusalem
             .
          
           For
           from
           the
           time
           of
           this
           prophesie
           ,
           which
           was
           published
           to
           the
           
             Iews
          
           newly
           returned
           from
           
             Babylon
             ,
          
           
           the
           City
           was
           not
           so
           protected
           ,
           as
           is
           here
           promised
           ;
           but
           contrarywise
           overthrown
           by
           the
           
             Romans
             .
          
           Whence
           it
           plainly
           appears
           that
           by
           
             Hierusalem
          
           here
           is
           mystically
           understood
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           .
           Which
           mysticall
           manner
           of
           speaking
           is
           not
           unusuall
           in
           such
           kind
           of
           prophesies
           .
           Now
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           N
           ▪
           T.
           partly
           the
           victory
           thereof
           which
           it
           shall
           gain
           over
           Antichrist
           is
           declared
           ;
           partly
           the
           Conversion
           of
           the
           Jews
           .
           Compare
           
             Revel.
          
           19.11
           .
           and
           following
           
             verses
             .
          
        
         
           The
           52
           place
           is
           
             Zach.
          
           14.6
           .
           and
           following
           .
           It
           may
           be
           from
           this
           manifestly
           understood
           that
           this
           prophesie
           is
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           N.
           T.
           in
           that
           our
           experience
           contradicts
           the
           sense
           of
           the
           letter
           concerning
           the
           plague
           wherewith
           God
           
             would
             smite
             all
             the
             people
             that
             fought
             against
          
           Hierusalem
           ,
           
             vers.
          
           12
           ,
           13
           ,
           14.
           when
           as
           from
           the
           time
           of
           this
           prophesie
           the
           enemies
           of
           
             Hierusalem
          
           were
           never
           strucken
           with
           such
           a
           plague
           ;
           nay
           ,
           on
           the
           contrary
           ,
           it self
           was
           overthrown
           by
           the
           
             Romans
             .
          
           It
           remains
           therefore
           that
           by
           
             Hierusalem
          
           we
           understand
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           N.
           T.
           whose
           enemies
           shall
           be
           punished
           with
           no
           single
           plague
           ,
           but
           many
           ,
           as
           is
           here
           severally
           expressed
           .
           Here
           then
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           
             New
             T.
          
           is
           prophesied
           of
           :
           and
           moreover
           the
           illumination
           ,
           and
           enlargement
           thereof
           ;
           of
           which
           in
           the
           6.7
           .
           and
           following
           
             verses
             .
          
        
         
           The
           53
           place
           is
           
             Malach.
          
           3.19
           ,
           20
           ,
           21.
           according
           to
           others
           ,
           
             chap.
          
           4.1
           ,
           2
           3.
           
           That
           this
           prophesie
           speaks
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           is
           clear
           out
           of
           these
           words
           ;
           
             The
             Sun
             of
             righteousnesse
             shall
             arise
             .
          
           Now
           two
           things
           are
           promised
           here
           to
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           N.
           T
           ,
           which
           are
           not
           yet
           fulfilled
           ;
           namely
           ,
           the
           destruction
           of
           her
           enemies
           ,
           
             v.
          
           19.
           and
           her
           own
           deliverance
           from
           persecution
           .
        
         
           The
           54.
           place
           is
           
             Mal.
          
           4.4
           ,
           5.
           
           Where
           the
           coming
           of
           
             Elias
          
           is
           spoken
           of
           ,
           
             Before
             the
             great
             and
             terrible
             day
             of
             the
             Lord
             come
             .
          
           Which
           prophesie
           indeed
           hath
           a
           double
           fulfilling
           :
           one
           ,
           in
           
             Iohn
          
           the
           
             Baptist
          
           ;
           another
           ,
           in
           some
           other
           great
           person
           ,
           who
           is
           yet
           to
           come
           .
           This
           
           appears
           thus
           :
           Christ
           teacheth
           us
           ,
           
             Mat.
          
           11
           &
           17
           Chapters
           ,
           that
           this
           Prophesie
           was
           fulfilled
           in
           
             Iohn
          
           the
           
             Baptist
             ,
          
           to
           wit
           ,
           in
           regard
           of
           his
           zeal
           and
           fervency
           .
           But
           what
           else
           is
           spoken
           concerning
           
             Elias
             ,
          
           both
           in
           
             Malachy
          
           and
           
             Matthew
             ,
          
           doth
           not
           suit
           with
           
             Iohn
          
           the
           
             Baptist
             .
          
           For
           
             Malachy
          
           saith
           ,
           
             Matth.
          
           17.11
           .
           That
           
             Elias
          
           should
           
             restore
             all
             things
          
           which
           
             Iohn
          
           the
           
             Baptist
          
           did
           not
           .
           Therefore
           we
           must
           necessarily
           determine
           ,
           That
           this
           Prophesie
           will
           have
           a
           double
           fulfilling
           .
           Whereto
           belongs
           that
           also
           of
           
             *
          
           
             Augustine
             .
          
           Elias
           
             shall
             restor
             :
             all
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             in
             the
             end
             he
             shall
             confirm
             the
             Saints
             troubled
             by
             the
             persecution
             of
             Antichrist
             .
          
           And
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           
             Fathers
          
           also
           have
           thu●
           interpreted
           
             Malachy
             .
             Theodoret
          
           in
           his
           
             Commentary
             ,
          
           writes
           thus
           of
           this
           place
           :
           
             He
             speaks
             of
             his
             second
             coming
             ;
             and
             he
             likewise
             teacheth
             us
             what
             the
             great
          
           Elias
           
             shall
             do
             ,
             when
             he
             shall
             come
             .
          
           And
           a
           little
           after
           ;
           
             Elias
             shall
             first
             come
             ;
             and
             he
             will
             perswade
             you
             ,
             O
          
           Jews
           .
           
             That
             ,
             without
             doubting
             ,
             you
             would
             be
             joyned
             to
             the
             faithfull
             of
             the
          
           Gentiles
           ,
           
             and
             be
             brought
             together
             into
             my
             Church
             being
             become
             one
             .
          
        
         
           The
           55
           place
           is
           
             Matth.
          
           23.39
           .
           Where
           Christ
           speaks
           thus
           to
           the
           unthankfull
           
             Iews
             :
             For
             I
             say
             unto
             you
             ,
             Ye
             shall
             not
             see
             me
             henceforth
             ,
             till
             ye
             shall
             say
             ,
             Blessed
             is
             he
             that
             cometh
             in
             the
             Name
             of
             the
             Lord
             .
          
           By
           which
           words
           Christ
           declares
           ,
           That
           at
           length
           the
           
             Iews
          
           should
           see
           him
           ,
           not
           meaning
           in
           the
           last
           Judgement
           ,
           but
           before
           it
           ;
           because
           at
           the
           last
           Judgement
           they
           shall
           not
           cry
           out
           unto
           him
           ,
           
             Bl●ss●d
             ,
             &c.
          
           (
           for
           then
           they
           shall
           tremble
           ,
           that
           have
           not
           been
           converted
           unto
           him
           )
           but
           at
           that
           time
           ,
           when
           he
           shall
           shew
           himself
           to
           them
           ,
           that
           he
           may
           convert
           them
           to
           the
           true
           faith
           .
        
         
           The
           56
           place
           is
           
             Mat.
          
           24.14
           .
           
             And
             this
             Gosp●l
             of
             the
             Kingdom
             shall
             be
             preached
             in
             the
             whole
             world
             ,
             for
             a
             witnesse
             unto
             all
             Nations
             ;
             and
             then
             shall
             the
             end
             come
             .
          
           See
           now
           ,
           before
           the
           last
           Judgement
           the
           
             Indians
          
           
           themselves
           ,
           and
           others
           which
           yet
           acknowledge
           not
           JESUS
           CHRIST
           ,
           shall
           be
           brought
           unto
           the
           Church
           !
        
         
           The
           57
           place
           is
           
             Luk.
          
           21.24
           .
           
             And
             they
          
           (
           the
           Jews
           )
           
             shall
             fall
             with
             the
             edge
             of
             the
             sword
             ,
             ●nd
             shall
             be
             led
             captives
             into
             all
             Nations
             ,
             and
          
           Hierusalem
           
             shall
             be
             trampled
             on
             by
             the
             Nations
             ,
             untill
             the
             times
             of
             the
             Gentil●s
             shall
             be
             fulfilled
             .
          
           This
           place
           shall
           receive
           light
           from
           the
           next
           following
           .
           Our
           Saviour
           here
           teacheth
           us
           ,
           that
           the
           Jews
           shall
           be
           vexed
           along
           time
           by
           the
           Gentiles
           ;
           and
           that
           being
           ended
           ,
           they
           shall
           be
           converted
           to
           the
           Faith
           .
        
         
           The
           58
           place
           is
           
             Rom.
          
           11.25
           ,
           26
           ,
           27.
           
           The
           Apostle
           teacheth
           us
           in
           this
           place
           ,
           that
           the
           Jews
           should
           so
           long
           remain
           in
           their
           blindenesse
           and
           calamity
           ,
           till
           the
           fulnesse
           of
           the
           Gentiles
           should
           come
           in
           ▪
           that
           is
           ,
           till
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           Nations
           of
           the
           world
           should
           flow
           in
           unto
           the
           Gospel
           .
           For
           then
           it
           should
           come
           to
           passe
           ,
           that
           all
           
             Israel
          
           should
           be
           saved
           .
           And
           this
           he
           calls
           a
           
           
             Mystery
             ,
          
           and
           that
           no●
           unfitly
           .
           For
           this
           is
           that
           Propheticall
           
             Secret
          
           so
           often
           pressed
           by
           the
           
             Prophets
          
           ;
           of
           which
           
             Paul
          
           would
           not
           have
           the
           ●entiles
           ignorant
           ,
           lest
           they
           should
           despise
           the
           Jews
           ,
           as
           cast
           off
           for
           ever
           .
        
         
           The
           59
           place
           is
           2
           
             Cor.
          
           3.15
           .
           
             Therefore
             unto
             this
             very
             day
             when
          
           Moses
           
             is
             read
             ,
             the
             Veil
             is
             upon
             their
             heart
             .
             Neverth
             l●sse
             when
             they
             shall
             turn
             themselves
             unto
             the
             Lord
             ,
             the
             Veil
             shall
             be
             taken
             away
             .
          
           The
           Apostle
           here
           teacheth
           us
           two
           things
           concerning
           the
           
             Iews
          
           :
           1.
           
           That
           their
           
             mindes
          
           
             *
          
           
             were
             blinded
             ,
          
           as
           he
           speaks
           in
           the
           foregoing
           verse
           .
           2.
           
           That
           at
           length
           they
           are
           to
           be
           converted
           by
           the
           Spirit
           of
           Christ
           .
        
         
           The
           60
           place
           is
           
             Revel.
          
           22.5
           .
           
             And
             she
             brought
             forth
             a
             man-child
          
           (
           Christ
           )
           
             who
             was
             to
             rule
             all
             Nations
             with
             a
             rod
             of
             Iron
             .
          
           Compare
           
             Psal.
          
           2.
           
           You
           may
           gather
           out
           of
           these
           two
           places
           ,
           that
           Christ
           shall
           be
           Lord
           and
           King
           of
           all
           people
           ,
           Jews
           and
           Gentiles
           ,
           when
           he
           shall
           gather
           them
           into
           his
           Church
           ,
           and
           there
           feed
           and
           rule
           them
           .
        
         
           The
           61
           place
           is
           
             Revel.
          
           14.8
           .
           Where
           the
           ruine
           of
           mysticall
           
             Babylon
          
           is
           declared
           ;
           which
           belongs
           to
           the
           happinesse
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           But
           seeing
           it
           hath
           not
           happened
           ,
           it
           shall
           most
           surely
           happen
           .
        
         
           The
           62
           place
           is
           
             Revel.
          
           14.14
           .
           to
           the
           21.
           
           Where
           is
           〈◊〉
           blown
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           of
           the
           N.
           T●●
           .
        
         
           The
           63
           place
           is
           
             Revel.
          
           18
           ,
           the
           whole
           Chapter
           .
           Wherein
           i●
           
           contained
           a
           glorious
           Prophesie
           concerning
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           the
           City
           of
           
             Rome
             ,
          
           and
           the
           overthrow
           of
           
             Antichrist
             .
          
        
         
           The
           64
           place
           is
           
             Revel.
          
           19.1
           ,
           2
           ,
           3.
           
           Where
           in
           like
           manner
           is
           contained
           a
           prophesie
           of
           
             Rome's
          
           downfall
           ,
           and
           
             Antichrist's●●●dition
          
           .
        
         
           The
           65
           place
           is
           
             Revel.
          
           19.11
           .
           to
           the
           end
           .
           Where
           is
           a
           clear
           prophesie
           of
           the
           vanquishing
           of
           
             Antichrists
          
           Army
           .
        
         
           And
           these
           are
           the
           testimonies
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           in
           number
           
             *
          
           Lxvi
           .
           in
           which
           the
           happinesse
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           whereof
           we
           took
           upon
           us
           to
           treat
           ,
           is
           prophesied
           of
           promised
           ,
           and
           set
           forth
           .
           I
           make
           no
           doubt
           ,
           but
           the
           attentive
           reader
           rather
           will
           easily
           observe
           a
           notable
           harmony
           ,
           and
           concent
           ,
           in
           these
           places
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           and
           from
           his
           own
           private
           reading
           adde
           also
           others
           .
        
      
       
         
           The
           
             third
             Classis
          
           of
           Arguments
           .
        
         
           THis
           
             Classis
             ,
          
           or
           rank
           of
           Arguments
           offords
           certain
           reasons
           ,
           and
           the
           consent
           of
           some
           learned
           men
           .
        
         
           Reasons
           ,
           or
           Consequences
           .
        
         
           
             I.
             All
             persecutors
             of
             the
             Church
             have
             at
             length
             been
             punished
             by
             God
             .
             Therefore
             at
             length
             the
             great
             
               Antichrist
            
             also
             ,
             shall
             certainly
             be
             punished
             .
             The
             Antecedent
             ,
             or
             foregoing
             proposition
             is
             proved
             partly
             from
             the
             nature
             of
             God
             ,
             partly
             by
             Induction
             of
             examples
             .
          
           
             II.
             After
             long
             and
             grievous
             persecutions
             the
             
               Church
            
             hath
             ever
             felt
             some
             rest
             and
             refreshment
             here
             on
             earth
             :
             Therefore
             also
             she
             shall
             have
             some
             breathing
             time
             after
             the
             persecution
             of
             
               Antichrist
               ,
            
             and
             that
             here
             upon
             earth
             ;
             because
             God
             himself
             hath
             made
             her
             such
             a
             promise
             .
          
           
             III.
             
               Where
               the
               ayde
               of
               man
               failes
               ,
               there
               the
               assistance
               of
               God
               begins
               ;
            
             as
             
               Philo
            
             the
             
               Iew
            
             said
             long
             agoe
             both
             quiently
             ,
             
             and
             piously
             .
             This
             is
             most
             certainly
             witnessed
             by
             the
             examples
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             
               Old
               T.
            
             miraculously
             delivered
             out
             of
             the
             
               Egyptian
            
             bondage
             ,
             
               Exod.
            
             12.
             and
             14.
             by
             the
             deliverance
             of
             
               Hierusalem
            
             from
             the
             siege
             of
             
               Sennacheri●
               ,
            
             2
             
               Kin.
            
             19.
             by
             the
             deliverance
             from
             the
             hostile
             
             invasion
             of
             the
             
               Ethiopians
            
             under
             King
             
               Asa.
            
             2
             
               Chro.
            
             14.
             by
             deliverance
             from
             the
             invasion
             of
             the
             
               Moabites
               and
               Ammonites
               ,
            
             under
             King
             
               Iehosaphat
               .
            
             2
             
               Chron.
            
             20.
             
             And
             lastly
             ,
             by
             deliverance
             from
             the
             oppression
             of
             
               Antiochus
               Epiphanes
               .
            
             1
             
               Mac.
            
             1.
             
               and
               following
               chapters
               .
            
             Adde
             unto
             these
             divers
             examples
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             N.
             T.
             which
             ,
             when
             it's
             condition
             hath
             been
             granted
             as
             desperate
             ,
             and
             quite
             lost
             ,
             hath
             had
             deliverance
             by
             the
             
               *
            
             unexpected
             handy-work
             of
             God
             .
             See
             the
             
               Ecclesiasticall
               History
            
             at
             large
             .
             From
             hence
             we
             may
             very
             well
             gather
             ,
             that
             the
             Church
             ,
             at
             this
             time
             oppressed
             on
             every
             hand
             ,
             and
             left
             destitute
             of
             all
             humane
             assistance
             ,
             shall
             by
             the
             power
             of
             God
             be
             asserted
             ,
             and
             vindicated
             ,
             when
             
               Antichrist
               ,
            
             in
             the
             full
             course
             and
             
               carrére
            
             of
             his
             happynesse
             ,
             shall
             little
             think
             of
             any
             such
             matter
             .
          
           
             IV.
             The
             downfall
             of
             
               Antichrist
               ,
            
             and
             the
             binding
             of
             
               Satan
            
             for
             a
             thousand
             years
             ,
             do
             without
             any
             intermission
             meet
             together
             .
             It
             is
             very
             probable
             therefore
             ,
             That
             the
             beginning
             of
             these
             thousand
             years
             is
             at
             hand
             .
             For
             Antichrist
             ,
             at
             that
             very
             time
             ,
             wherein
             he
             shall
             make
             the
             greatest
             boast
             of
             his
             victories
             ,
             shall
             suddenly
             fall
             .
             
               Revel.
            
             18.7
             ,
             8.
             
          
           
             V.
             The
             severall
             
               Phaenomena
               ,
            
             
             or
             
               Apparitions
            
             in
             the
             Heavens
             ;
             namely
             ,
             new
             Starres
             ,
             and
             Cometes
             ;
             also
             Earthquakes
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             ,
             taken
             notice
             of
             in
             these
             latter
             times
             ,
             do
             without
             doubt
             portend
             and
             manifestly
             foretell
             some
             notable
             ,
             and
             extraordinary
             change
             .
          
           
             VI
             .
             The
             
               Period
            
             or
             
               limited
               time
               ,
            
             for
             the
             Kingdom
             of
             Antichrist
             to
             continue
             ,
             is
             almost
             expired
             ,
             and
             at
             an
             end
             ,
             as
             appears
             by
             the
             
               Revelation
            
             and
             
               History
               .
            
          
           
             VII
             .
             
               Daniel
               Chap.
            
             12.
             declares
             an
             end
             of
             his
             prophesie
             ,
             when
             he
             expressely
             sets
             down
             ,
             that
             2625.
             years
             shall
             be
             finished
             after
             the
             end
             of
             his
             Lxx.
             Weeks
             ,
             that
             is
             from
             the
             year
             of
             Christ
             69.
             which
             years
             ,
             if
             they
             be
             added
             to
             the
             other
             ,
             the
             sum
             of
             2694.
             years
             is
             made
             up
             .
             In
             which
             current
             of
             time
             all
             things
             shall
             happen
             out
             ,
             which
             are
             foretold
             ,
             except
             the
             last
             Judgement
             ,
             and
             what
             follows
             thereon
             .
             Wherefore
             if
             from
             2694.
             years
             ,
             1000
             be
             subducted
             ,
             we
             shall
             come
             by
             the
             year
             of
             Christ
             1694.
             
             In
             this
             year
             then
             ,
             or
             sooner
             our
             THOUSAND
             years
             shall
             take
             their
             beginning
             .
          
        
         
         
           
             The
             consent
             of
             
               Godly
               ,
            
             and
             
               learned
               Men
               .
            
          
           
             
             IN
             the
             forefront
             we
             place
             the
             fourth
             book
             of
             
               Esdras
               .
            
             For
             there
             many
             passages
             occurre
             concerning
             the
             conversion
             of
             the
             Jews
             ,
             and
             the
             deliverance
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             N.
             T.
             from
             Antichrist
             ▪
             Especially
             ,
             That
             is
             a
             notable
             place
             ,
             
               Chap.
            
             13.39
             ,
             40.
             
             
               And
               whereas
               thou
               sawest
               that
               he
               gathered
               another
               peaceable
               multitude
               unto
               him
               .
               Those
               are
            
             tenne
             Tribes
             ,
             
               which
               were
            
             
               *
            
             
               carried
               away
               prisoners
               out
               of
               their
               own
               Land
               ,
               in
               the
               time
               of
            
             Hoshea
             
               the
               King
               .
            
             What
             the
             same
             Author
             writes
             concerning
             the
             
               Eagle
               ,
            
             and
             
               Lion
               ,
            
             is
             severally
             expounded
             by
             severall
             interpreters
             .
          
           
             Out
             of
             the
             
               Sibylls
            
             also
             some
             things
             are
             brought
             about
             the
             downfall
             of
             
               Antichrist
               ,
            
             and
             the
             happy
             estate
             which
             the
             world
             shall
             enjoy
             after
             that
             shall
             come
             to
             passe
             .
             Very
             much
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             that
             :
             
               Rome
               shall
               become
               a
               street
               ,
               or
               high
               way
               .
            
          
           
             All
             the
             
               Fathers
            
             were
             of
             this
             opinion
             ,
             that
             
               Elias
            
             should
             come
             ,
             and
             restore
             all
             things
             .
          
           
             
               Some
               ,
               
                 as
                 you
                 may
                 see
                 in
              
               Alfonsus
               Conradus
               
                 in
                 his
                 Commentary
                 on
                 the
                 Revelation
                 ,
              
               between
               the
               coming
               of
               Christ
               in
               the
               flesh
               ,
               and
               his
               coming
               in
               Majesty
               ,
               do
               maintain
               a
               certain
               middle
               coming
               ,
               which
               they
               call
               his
               coming
               in
               the
               power
               and
               effiency
               of
               his
               Spirit
               ,
               to
               destroy
               the
               great
               
                 Antichrist
                 ,
              
               &
               to
               reform
               his
               Church
               .
               This
               coming
               they
               say
               shall
               be
               in
               the
               end
               of
               the
               sixth
               
                 Millenary
                 ,
              
               or
               1000
               years
               ;
               of
               which
               coming
               they
               make
               
                 Enoch
              
               and
               
                 Elias
              
               the
               forerunners
               .
               They
               say
               that
               
                 Antichrist
              
               shall
               be
               destroyed
               by
               their
               preaching
               ,
               and
               his
               Kingdom
               abolished
               .
               After
               whose
               downfall
               peace
               shall
               be
               granted
               to
               the
               Church
               ,
               and
               
                 Satan
              
               shall
               be
               bound
               ,
               so
               that
               he
               shall
               not
               be
               able
               to
               disturbe
               the
               tranquillity
               thereof
               .
               Now
               this
               peace
               and
               happy
               progresse
               of
               the
               Church
               they
               say
               
               shall
               last
               for
               the
               whole
               
                 seventh
                 Millenary
                 ,
              
               till
               the
               last
               time
               of
               her
               troubles
               ,
               by
               the
               persecution
               of
               the
               Nations
               
                 Gog
              
               and
               
                 Magog
              
               ;
               because
               Satan
               ,
               who
               they
               say
               ,
               shall
               then
               be
               set
               at
               liberty
               ,
               shall
               stirre
               them
               up
               against
               the
               Godly
               .
            
          
           
             From
             hence
             it
             appears
             ,
             That
             our
             opinion
             concerning
             these
             1000
             years
             is
             not
             new
             ,
             and
             unheard
             of
             .
          
        
         
           
             
               Alfonsus
               Conradus
            
             of
             
               Mantua
            
             in
             his
             Commentary
             on
             the
             
               Revelation
               ,
            
             
             published
             at
             
               Basil.
               
               An.
            
             1574.
             writeth
             as
             followeth
             .
          
           
             
               IN
               his
               Preface
               .
            
             
               This
               one
               thing
               perchance
               will
               offend
               the
               ears
               of
               some
               ,
               because
               I
               seem
               to
               promise
               a
               more
               plentifull
               peace
               to
               the
               Church
               ,
               then
               that
               likenesse
               of
               the
               Crosse
               will
               allow
               of
               ,
               to
               which
               in
               this
               world
               it
               must
               be
               made
               conformable
               to
               Christ
               it's
               head
               .
               But
               let
               them
               bethink
               themselves
               ,
               I
               entreat
               them
               ;
               that
               this
               is
               not
               so
               contrary
               to
               the
               Scripture
               ,
               that
               it
               should
               be
               objected
               against
               me
               ,
               or
               laid
               to
               my
               charge
               ,
               as
               fit
               to
               be
               reckoned
               in
               the
               number
               of
               those
               ,
               which
               are
               termed
               either
               impious
               ,
               or
               absurd
               :
               Especially
               ,
               when
               as
               I
               cannot
               perceive
               ,
               by
               what
               means
               that
               happinesse
               ,
               which
               
                 Iohn
              
               writes
               the
               Church
               shall
               enjoy
               ,
               
                 Satan
              
               being
               bound
               ,
               can
               be
               made
               good
               ,
               except
               we
               acknowledge
               some
               rest
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               her
               enemies
               being
               overthrown
               .
               Which
               I
               think
               indeed
               ever
               happened
               ,
               as
               often
               as
               the
               enemies
               of
               God's
               people
               have
               been
               removed
               out
               of
               the
               way
               .
               Now
               because
               the
               enemy
               which
               
                 Iohn
              
               tells
               us
               shall
               be
               taken
               away
               ,
               is
               more
               dangerous
               then
               all
               that
               ever
               yet
               infested
               God's
               people
               ,
               it
               ought
               not
               to
               seem
               strange
               to
               any
               one
               ,
               if
               ,
               he
               being
               once
               overcome
               ,
               the
               Church
               enjoy
               a
               more
               plentifull
               peace
               then
               usually
               .
            
          
           
             
               Vpon
               the
            
             20.
             
               Chap.
               of
               the
               Revel.
               Vers.
            
             1.
             
             
               God
               being
               about
               to
               bestow
               a
               more
               plentifull
               peace
               upon
               his
               Church
               ,
               then
               hitherto
               he
               had
               granted
               to
               it
               ,
               it
               sufficeth
               him
               not
               to
               have
               removed
               out
               of
               the
               way
               the
               
                 Beast
                 ,
              
               and
               those
               Kings
               of
               the
               Earth
               ,
               with
               a
               horrible
               slaughter
               ,
               who
               favouring
               the
               Beast
               ,
               had
               wholly
               disturbed
               his
               Churche's
               peace
               ,
               except
               also
               he
               restrain
               
                 Satan
                 ,
              
               the
               beginner
               of
               all
               these
               mischiefs
               ,
               So
               that
               he
               may
               not
               any
               more
               raise
               those
               usuall
               contentions
               and
               strife
               among
               men
               .
               Wherefore
               the
               
               
                 Angel
              
               comes
               down
               from
               Heaven
               ,
               who
               repressing
               the
               fury
               of
               Satan
               ,
               shuts
               him
               up
               in
               the
               bottomelesse
               pit
               ,
               and
               there
               forces
               him
               to
               remain
               so
               long
               ,
               as
               he
               pleases
               not
               to
               have
               the
               peace
               of
               the
               Church
               to
               be
               taken
               away
               .
            
          
           
             
               And
               a
               little
               after
               .
            
             
               Now
               he
               binds
               him
               ,
               and
               shuts
               him
               up
               into
               the
               bottomelesse
               pit
               for
               a
               
                 thousand
              
               years
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               for
               that
               whole
               time
               ,
               wherein
               God
               hath
               determined
               that
               the
               peace
               of
               his
               Church
               shall
               not
               be
               disturbed
               by
               Satan
               .
            
             
               See
               more
               there
               to
               this
               purpose
               ,
            
          
           
             
             
               Lucas
               Osiander
            
             upon
             
               Daniel
               .
            
             12.
             
             
               I
               think
               the
               end
               of
               these
               years
               will
               fall
               in
               with
               that
               time
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               
                 Popedome
                 of
                 Rome
              
               shall
               bodily
               be
               overturned
               :
               although
               in
               some
               mens
               mindes
               it
               shall
               hiddenly
               remain
               even
               untill
               the
               last
               day
               .
            
          
           
             
             
               Matthew
               Cotterius
            
             in
             his
             continued
             and
             demonstrative
             Exposition
             of
             the
             
               Revelation
               ,
            
             upon
             the
             20
             
               Chap.
            
             
               
                 Satan
              
               began
               to
               be
               tyed
               in
               bonds
               ,
               when
               the
               restored
               Truth
               of
               the
               Scriptures
               began
               to
               take
               place
               on
               earth
               ,
               the
               witnesses
               being
               raised
               ,
               and
               the
               dark
               miste
               of
               lyes
               being
               dispelled
               .
               Then
               shall
               
                 Satan
              
               be
               bound
               for
               a
               
                 thousand
              
               years
               ,
               which
               must
               be
               expired
               ,
               before
               he
               scatter
               new
               errours
               through
               the
               world
               ,
               and
               by
               them
               seduce
               the
               Nations
               .
               This
               ,
               this
               is
               the
               imprisonment
               ;
               this
               is
               the
               liberty
               ,
               or
               setting
               free
               of
               Satan
               .
            
          
           
             
               In
               the
               same
               place
               upon
               vers.
            
             2.
             
             
               But
               when
               began
               Satan
               to
               be
               bound
               ?
               In
               the
               year
               1517.
               when
               the
               
                 witnesses
              
               were
               raised
               .
               From
               that
               time
               ALL
               people
               generally
               have
               not
               drunk
               any
               new
               poyson
               of
               heresie
               ,
               which
               might
               weaken
               ,
               or
               overturn
               their
               faith
               .
            
          
           
             
               In
               the
               same
               place
               .
            
             To
             1517.
             adde
             1000.
             years
             .
             
               So
               you
               shall
               make
               2517.
               at
               which
               time
               Satan
               shall
               again
               draw
               the
               Nations
               into
               abominable
               heresies
               .
            
          
           
             In
             this
             Exposition
             of
             
               Cotterius
               ,
            
             the
             
               thousand
            
             years
             are
             rightly
             urged
             according
             to
             the
             letter
             .
             But
             his
             
               Epocha
               ,
            
             or
             beginning
             of
             his
             account
             is
             not
             well
             placed
             in
             the
             year
             1517.
             
             For
             then
             began
             onely
             the
             
               praeludium
               ,
            
             or
             
               proeme
               ,
            
             of
             this
             Millenary
             .
          
           
             
             
               Iohn
               Piscator
            
             in
             his
             Commentary
             on
             the
             
               Revelations
               .
            
             
               The
               happynesse
               of
               the
               faithfull
               ,
               who
               shall
               live
               upon
               earth
               after
               the
               downfall
               of
               the
               Papacy
               ,
               is
               their
               security
               from
               the
               hostile
               invasions
               of
               the
               wicked
               for
               1000
               years
               .
            
          
           
             
               In
               the
               same
               place
               .
            
             
               The
               singular
               happynesse
               of
               the
               
                 Martyrs
              
               of
               
               Christ
               ,
               who
               before
               these
               
                 thousand
              
               years
               indured
               persecution
               ,
               is
               their
               Resurrection
               which
               shall
               be
               before
               the
               generall
               Resurrection
               ,
               and
               their
               
                 reign
                 in
                 Heaven
              
               with
               Christ
               
                 for
                 a
                 thousand
                 years
              
               before
               the
               Resurrection
               of
               the
               rest
               .
            
          
           
             In
             this
             Exposition
             the
             literall
             interpretation
             is
             rightly
             urged
             .
             But
             that
             he
             sayes
             the
             Martyrs
             shall
             reign
             with
             Christ
             
               in
               Heaven
            
             for
             those
             thousand
             years
             ,
             cannot
             be
             proved
             out
             of
             the
             Text
             .
             Nay
             ,
             the
             contrary
             may
             thence
             be
             proved
             ;
             because
             the
             Resurrection
             of
             the
             Martyrs
             is
             part
             of
             the
             happinesse
             of
             the
             Church
             here
             on
             Earth
             .
             Again
             ,
             
             The
             Kingdom
             which
             is
             limited
             by
             a
             certain
             number
             of
             years
             ,
             cannot
             suite
             well
             ▪
             with
             eternall
             life
             .
             See
             also
             
               Revel.
            
             5.10
             .
             where
             the
             Saints
             in
             Heaven
             among
             other
             things
             ,
             sing
             thus
             :
             
               And
               we
               shall
               reign
               upon
               the
               Earth
               .
            
             But
             moreover
             the
             same
             
               Iohn
               Piscator
            
             maintains
             this
             opinion
             of
             the
             thousand
             years
             in
             his
             
               German
            
             translation
             of
             the
             
               Bible
               :
            
             and
             a
             little
             before
             his
             death
             he
             wrote
             a
             short
             Treatise
             
               Of
               the
               future
               happinesse
               of
               the
               Church
               in
               this
               life
               .
            
             
             Out
             of
             which
             I
             have
             made
             use
             of
             many
             things
             ,
             which
             I
             have
             transcribed
             into
             this
             
               Meditation
            
             ;
             for
             that
             
               Treatise
            
             of
             his
             hath
             not
             as
             yet
             seen
             the
             light
             .
          
           
             Many
             Writers
             of
             the
             former
             ,
             and
             this
             present
             Age
             ,
             have
             published
             many
             things
             concerning
             
               Elias
               the
               Artist
               ,
            
             who
             is
             to
             come
             ;
             Of
             the
             
               Lion
               of
               the
               North
               ,
            
             
             who
             is
             neer
             at
             hand
             ;
             Of
             a
             
               fourth
               Northern
               Monarchy
            
             ;
             Of
             a
             great
             
               Reformation
            
             ;
             Of
             the
             
               Conversion
            
             of
             the
             Jews
             ;
             and
             the
             like
             .
             
               See
            
             Theophrastus
             Paracelsus
             ,
             Michael
             Sendivogius
             
               in
               his
               Treatise
               of
               Sulphur
               ,
            
             
             Stephanus
             Pannonius
             
               Of
               the
               circle
               of
               the
               Works
               and
               Iudgements
               of
               God
            
             ;
             where
             among
             other
             things
             he
             writs
             thus
             :
             
               Yet
               it
               shall
               come
               to
               passe
               that
               the
               pure
               Gospel
               of
               God
               shall
               be
               preached
               to
               the
               
                 Americans
              
               before
               the
               end
               of
               the
               world
               .
               
               
                 Again
                 ,
              
               Nothing
               is
               more
               sure
               then
               that
               ,
               the
               Reformation
               of
               the
               
                 East
              
               and
               
                 South
              
               drawing
               on
               ,
               some
               famous
               Emperour
               ,
               whose
               types
               
                 Constantine
                 ,
              
               and
               
                 Theodosius
                 ,
              
               both
               entitled
               
                 Great
                 ,
              
               were
               ,
               shall
               openly
               shew
               himself
               ,
               and
               granting
               liberty
               of
               Religion
               to
               them
               ,
               who
               professe
               the
               name
               of
               the
               Holy
               Trinity
               ,
               shall
               do
               some
               great
               matter
               in
               the
               world
               ,
               for
               the
               glory
               of
               God
               ,
               for
               the
               building
               up
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               and
               for
               the
               downfall
               of
               
                 Antichrist
                 .
                 In
                 the
                 same
                 place
              
               ;
               The
               
                 Eastern
              
               Christians
               fired
               with
               the
               zeal
               of
               Christ
               ,
               shall
               make
               their
               way
               into
               
                 Asia
              
               it self
               ,
               and
               provoke
               the
               
                 Jews
              
               to
               jealousie
               ,
               Rom.
               
               
                 11.
                 
              
               And
               the
               spirituall
               
                 Babylon
              
               shall
               be
               a
               pray
               unto
               all
               Nations
               .
               
                 In
                 the
                 same
                 place
                 ,
              
               A
               refining
               of
               the
               Souldiers
               of
               God
               ;
               whereof
               there
               is
               mention
               ,
               
               
                 Zach.
                 13.8
                 .
              
               that
               is
               ,
               temptations
               ,
               and
               tryalls
               shall
               go
               before
               this
               Reformation
               ,
               that
               the
               light
               of
               God
               may
               arise
               out
               of
               the
               Crosse
               of
               Christ
               .
            
             This
             
               Treatise
            
             was
             published
             in
             the
             year
             1608.
             
             
               Iohn
               Dobricius
            
             also
             in
             the
             year
             1612.
             did
             set
             forth
             a
             notable
             book
             ,
             entitled
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             
               The
               Interpreter
               of
               times
            
             ;
             wherein
             ,
             both
             out
             
               of
               the
               Holy
            
             Scripture
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             new
             Star
             which
             appeared
             in
             the
             year
             
               *
            
             .
             DC.IV.
             and
             the
             great
             Conjunction
             of
             the
             
               Planets
               ,
            
             many
             things
             are
             discoursed
             of
             concerning
             the
             
               reformation
               ,
            
             and
             
               future
               happinesse
            
             of
             the
             Church
             .
          
           
             
               
                 Peter
                 du
                 Moulin
                 ,
              
               in
               his
               
                 French
              
               Book
               ,
               intituled
               
                 Du
                 Combat
                 Christien
              
               :
               that
               is
               ,
               
                 The
                 Chrictian
                 Conflict
                 ,
                 pag.
              
               256.
               
               This
               persecution
               is
               a
               cruell
               tempest
               ,
               which
               cannot
               last
               awayes
               .
               Either
               it
               will
               take
               us
               out
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               or
               
                 God
                 will
                 take
                 it
                 away
                 from
                 us
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Pag.
            
             353.
             
             
               Every
               one
               hath
               but
               a
               short
               journey
               ,
               whereby
               he
               must
               come
               to
               God
               ,
               and
               the
               time
               is
               at
               hand
               ,
               that
               we
               must
               commit
               our
               bodies
               to
               the
               earth
               ,
               our
               Souls
               to
               God
               ,
               and
               
                 to
                 the
                 Church
                 peace
                 and
                 the
                 blessing
                 of
                 God
                 .
              
               For
               it
               shall
               come
               to
               passe
               even
               in
               our
               times
               ,
               that
               God
               shall
               be
               glorified
               in
               the
               
                 great
                 Congregations
                 :
              
               Yea
               even
               in
               those
               places
               ,
               where
               are
               horrible
               ruines
               ,
               the
               Word
               of
               God
               shall
               ●ound
               forth
               ,
               and
               God
               shall
               afford
               us
               matter
               of
               praise
               and
               thanksgiving
               .
            
          
           
             
               Pag.
            
             450.
             
             
               After
               that
               God
               shall
               have
               shewn
               us
               his
               
                 deliverances
                 on
                 earth
                 ,
              
               he
               will
               also
               shew
               us
               his
               riches
               in
               Heaven
               .
            
          
        
      
       
         
           A
           CONFUTATION
           Of
           the
           Objections
           .
        
         
           I.
           
             Object
             .
          
           IS
           taken
           out
           of
           
             Matth.
          
           24.14
           .
           If
           after
           the
           Gospel
           preached
           in
           all
           the
           world
           ,
           the
           
             end
          
           of
           all
           things
           
             shall
             come
             ,
          
           that
           happinesse
           of
           the
           Church
           in
           this
           world
           shall
           not
           happen
           out
           between
           the
           end
           thereof
           ,
           and
           the
           preaching
           of
           the
           Gospel
           .
           For
           the
           Gospel
           is
           already
           preached
           through
           the
           whole
           earth
           .
           I
           
             answer
             .
          
           1.
           
           The
           Consequence
           is
           to
           be
           denyed
           :
           for
           although
           this
           
           happynesse
           do
           come
           between
           ,
           yet
           it
           hinders
           not
           ,
           but
           that
           the
           end
           of
           the
           world
           should
           come
           after
           the
           Gospel
           preached
           over
           the
           whole
           earth
           .
           
             Secondly
             ,
          
           The
           
             pro-syllogisme
          
           is
           to
           be
           denyed
           ,
           because
           the
           Gospel
           is
           not
           already
           preached
           over
           the
           whole
           earth
           .
        
         
           II.
           
             Object
             .
          
           Is
           taken
           from
           
             Matth.
          
           24.29
           ,
           30.
           
           If
           presently
           after
           the
           destruction
           of
           
             Hierusalem
             .
          
           Christ
           shall
           come
           to
           Judgement
           ,
           then
           this
           happinesse
           of
           the
           Church
           shall
           not
           be
           before
           his
           coming
           to
           Judgement
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           The
           matter
           it self
           speaks
           ,
           and
           experience
           witnesseth
           ,
           that
           this
           word
           
             Immediately
             ,
          
           
           or
           
             Presently
             ,
          
           is
           not
           here
           properly
           ,
           or
           simply
           to
           be
           understood
           ,
           but
           hyperbolically
           ,
           and
           according
           to
           what
           went
           before
           ,
           namely
           in
           relation
           to
           the
           foregoing
           Prophesie
           concerning
           the
           overthrow
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             ,
          
           which
           they
           were
           to
           receive
           by
           the
           destruction
           of
           
             Hierusalem
          
           ;
           So
           that
           this
           is
           the
           meaning
           ;
           that
           between
           this
           desolation
           of
           
             Hierusalem
             ,
          
           and
           the
           coming
           of
           Christ
           ,
           the
           
             Iews
          
           should
           receive
           no
           other
           overthrow
           .
        
         
           III.
           
             Object
             .
          
           Is
           out
           of
           the
           same
           
             Chapter
             ,
             vers.
          
           37
           ,
           38
           ,
           39.
           
           If
           a
           little
           before
           the
           coming
           of
           Christ
           to
           Judgement
           ,
           the
           State
           and
           condition
           of
           the
           world
           shall
           be
           such
           ,
           as
           it
           was
           in
           the
           time
           of
           
             No●h
          
           before
           the
           Deluge
           ;
           and
           that
           such
           a
           state
           of
           things
           is
           to
           be
           seen
           at
           this
           day
           :
           It
           may
           be
           hence
           gathered
           ,
           that
           such
           a
           condition
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           as
           is
           here
           described
           ,
           shall
           not
           happen
           out
           before
           the
           coming
           of
           Christ
           ,
           to
           wit
           ,
           in
           which
           a
           great
           number
           of
           beleevers
           for
           a
           thousand
           years
           should
           worship
           God
           .
           But
           rather
           that
           this
           coming
           is
           at
           the
           doors
           ,
           or
           else
           indeed
           cannot
           any
           long
           time
           be
           delayed
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           With
           that
           State
           of
           the
           faithfull
           ,
           which
           shall
           last
           for
           a
           thousand
           years
           ,
           the
           reliques
           and
           remainders
           of
           those
           conquered
           enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           shall
           be
           joyned
           ,
           who
           about
           the
           end
           of
           this
           
             millenary
          
           shall
           recollect
           their
           strengths
           ,
           and
           make
           warre
           against
           the
           faithfull
           .
           And
           then
           the
           state
           of
           the
           world
           shall
           be
           such
           ,
           as
           it
           was
           in
           the
           dayes
           of
           
             Noah
             .
          
           As
           in
           his
           dayes
           therefore
           the
           deluge
           came
           upon
           the
           wicked
           :
           so
           these
           thousand
           years
           being
           finished
           ,
           the
           last
           judgement
           shall
           come
           in
           the
           time
           of
           the
           warre
           of
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
             .
          
           And
           so
           it
           will
           be
           brought
           about
           ,
           that
           this
           prophesie
           of
           Christ
           ,
           notwithstanding
           that
           happinesse
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           shall
           be
           accomplished
           in
           those
           wicked
           and
           ungodly
           men
           .
        
         
         
           IV.
           
             Object
             .
          
           Is
           taken
           out
           of
           
             Luke
          
           18.8
           .
           If
           at
           the
           coming
           of
           Christ
           to
           Judgement
           ,
           none
           ,
           or
           indeed
           very
           few
           beleevers
           shall
           be
           found
           in
           the
           world
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           probable
           that
           so
           great
           a
           number
           of
           beleevers
           shall
           be
           for
           those
           thousand
           years
           immediately
           before
           the
           coming
           to
           Judgement
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           
             *
          
           Christ
           doth
           not
           mean
           by
           these
           words
           ,
           that
           simply
           he
           shall
           finde
           but
           a
           few
           beleevers
           on
           earth
           ,
           at
           his
           coming
           to
           Judgement
           :
           but
           a
           few
           
             in
             respect
          
           of
           the
           enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           who
           then
           shall
           make
           warre
           with
           the
           Saints
           ;
           The
           number
           of
           which
           enemies
           shall
           be
           as
           the
           Sand
           of
           the
           Sea
           .
           
             Revel.
          
           20.8
           .
        
         
           V.
           
             Object
             .
          
           Is
           taken
           out
           of
           the
           
             Acts
          
           14.22
           .
           We
           must
           through
           many
           afflictions
           enter
           into
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           God
           .
           Therefore
           the
           Church
           in
           this
           life
           shall
           not
           be
           freed
           from
           persecution
           .
           
             Answ.
             Paul
          
           and
           
             Barnabas
          
           speak
           in
           this
           place
           of
           the
           condition
           of
           those
           present
           times
           ,
           not
           denying
           in
           the
           mean
           while
           ,
           that
           there
           shall
           be
           certain
           times
           also
           wherein
           the
           Church
           shall
           be
           delivered
           from
           persecution
           ;
           as
           it
           happened
           in
           the
           times
           of
           
             Constantine
          
           the
           
             Great
             ,
             Theodosius
             ,
          
           and
           others
           .
        
         
           VI
           .
           
             Object
             .
          
           Is
           taken
           out
           of
           1
           
             Cor.
          
           10.11
           .
           where
           the
           
             Apostle
          
           saith
           ,
           that
           
             the
             ends
             of
             the
             world
             were
             come
             upon
             him
             ,
          
           and
           the
           other
           faithfull
           of
           that
           time
           .
           Wherefore
           if
           the
           ends
           of
           the
           world
           were
           at
           hand
           in
           
             Paul's
          
           time
           ,
           much
           more
           are
           they
           now
           at
           the
           doors
           ,
           seeing
           from
           that
           time
           neer
           sixteen
           Ages
           are
           expired
           .
           Whereupon
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           probable
           that
           a
           thousand
           years
           and
           more
           should
           remain
           to
           the
           end
           of
           the
           world
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           These
           words
           of
           
             Paul
          
           have
           not
           this
           meaning
           ,
           as
           if
           the
           day
           of
           Judgement
           were
           then
           at
           hand
           :
           for
           he
           himself
           rejects
           this
           opinion
           ,
           2
           
             Thes.
          
           2.2
           ,
           3.
           
           Thus
           therefore
           we
           must
           intrepret
           it
           ;
           That
           
             Paul
          
           by
           the
           
             *
          
           
             ends
             of
             the
             world
          
           doth
           understand
           the
           state
           of
           the
           
             New
             Testament
             ,
          
           or
           the
           last
           age
           of
           the
           World
           ,
           which
           began
           from
           the
           promulgation
           of
           the
           Gospel
           over
           the
           whole
           earth
           ,
           and
           shall
           be
           terminated
           with
           Christ's
           comming
           to
           Judgement
           ,
           Now
           part
           of
           this
           
             Age
          
           are
           those
           thousand
           years
           ,
           which
           are
           not
           yet
           begun
           .
        
         
           VII
           .
           
             Object
             .
          
           Is
           taken
           out
           of
           2
           
             Thes.
          
           2.8
           .
           where
           the
           
             Apostle
          
           witnesseth
           that
           the
           Lord
           shall
           at
           length
           consume
           
             Antichrist
          
           by
           his
           glorious
           coming
           .
           Wherefore
           if
           
             Antichrist
          
           shall
           be
           consumed
           by
           
           the
           coming
           of
           Christ
           to
           Judgement
           ,
           he
           shall
           not
           then
           be
           consumed
           a
           thousand
           yeers
           before
           that
           his
           coming
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           The
           Apostle
           speaks
           of
           the
           full
           and
           finall
           consuming
           of
           the
           kingdom
           of
           
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           whereby
           it
           shall
           come
           to
           passe
           that
           it
           shall
           have
           end
           together
           with
           the
           state
           of
           this
           wo●ld
           .
           Yet
           in
           the
           mean
           while
           for
           these
           1000
           years
           there
           shall
           alwayes
           be
           some
           reliques
           of
           
             Antichrist
          
           ▪
           which
           at
           the
           end
           of
           this
           
             Millenary
          
           shall
           again
           gather
           together
           their
           strengths
           ,
           and
           shall
           joyn
           themselves
           to
           the
           other
           Nations
           ,
           to
           make
           War
           against
           the
           Saints
           ;
           and
           then
           they
           shall
           be
           finally
           consumed
           .
           
             Revel.
          
           20.8
           ,
           9.
           
        
         
           VIII
           
             Object
             .
          
           Is
           taken
           out
           of
           I
           
             Ioh.
          
           2.18
           .
           Where
           the
           Apostle
           saith
           ,
           
             It
             is
             the
             last
             time
             .
             Answ.
             Iohn
          
           by
           the
           last
           time
           ,
           meaneth
           the
           state
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           ,
           or
           the
           last
           Age
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           of
           which
           also
           these
           
             thousand
          
           years
           are
           part
           .
           Now
           the
           state
           of
           the
           New
           Testament
           ,
           from
           the
           promulgation
           of
           the
           Gospel
           thorow
           the
           whole
           world
           ,
           to
           the
           second
           coming
           of
           Christ
           ,
           is
           called
           
             The
             last
             time
             ,
          
           because
           it
           is
           the
           last
           time
           of
           
             Grace
             ,
          
           after
           which
           we
           must
           expect
           no
           other
           .
           For
           Christ
           came
           in
           the
           fulnesse
           of
           time
           ,
           and
           substituted
           in
           the
           place
           of
           the
           Old
           Testament
           such
           Order
           ,
           and
           Form
           of
           Government
           ,
           as
           no
           other
           is
           to
           be
           looked
           for
           hereafter
           .
        
         
           IX
           
             Object
             .
          
           Is
           taken
           out
           of
           
             Revel.
          
           19.20
           .
           If
           this
           Text
           be
           to
           understood
           of
           the
           last
           Judgement
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           therefore
           to
           be
           understood
           of
           the
           downfall
           of
           Antichrist
           ,
           as
           which
           shall
           be
           before
           the
           day
           of
           Judgement
           a
           thousand
           years
           .
           Now
           the
           former
           Proposition
           is
           true
           ;
           therefore
           also
           the
           latter
           .
           The
           
             assumption
          
           is
           proved
           :
           Because
           there
           the
           description
           of
           the
           last
           Judgement
           is
           described
           ;
           in
           which
           close
           all
           the
           foregoing
           Visions
           ,
           except
           the
           first
           ,
           are
           terminated
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           I
           deny
           the
           
             assumption
          
           ;
           because
           from
           the
           following
           verse
           ,
           which
           is
           joyned
           to
           this
           by
           a
           Conjunction
           Copulative
           ,
           and
           by
           reason
           of
           this
           word
           ,
           
             the
             rest
             ,
          
           it
           manifestly
           appears
           ▪
           That
           mention
           is
           here
           made
           of
           the
           downfall
           and
           destruction
           of
           Antichrist
           and
           his
           followers
           .
           
           These
           are
           the
           words
           ;
           
             And
             the
             remnant
             were
             slain
             with
             the
             sword
             of
             him
             that
             sate
             upon
             the
             horse
             ;
             which
             sword
             proceeded
             out
             of
             his
             mouth
             :
             and
             all
             the
             Fowls
             were
             filled
             with
             their
             flesh
             .
          
           But
           that
           Christ
           shall
           not
           presently
           come
           to
           Judgement
           after
           this
           destruction
           ,
           is
           evinced
           from
           hence
           ,
           That
           that
           coming
           shall
           not
           be
           till
           at
           length
           after
           the
           War
           of
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
             ,
             chap.
          
           20.
           
             verse
          
           8.9
           .
           
           Now
           that
           War
           shall
           be
           a
           distinct
           War
           from
           that
           which
           is
           mentioned
           in
           this
           place
           ;
           as
           appears
           by
           comparing
           both
           places
           .
           
             Rev.
          
           10.20
           .
           
             Rev.
          
           20.10
           .
        
         
           X
           
             Object
             .
          
           Is
           taken
           out
           of
           
             Revel.
          
           20.2
           ,
           3.
           
           Where
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           That
           Satan
           was
           bound
           for
           a
           thousand
           years
           ,
           that
           he
           might
           not
           any
           more
           seduce
           the
           Nations
           ,
           till
           the
           thousand
           yeers
           were
           expired
           ;
           namely
           ,
           That
           he
           might
           not
           seduce
           them
           to
           Idolatry
           .
           Now
           this
           hath
           been
           done
           ,
           by
           the
           preaching
           of
           the
           Gospel
           ,
           from
           the
           70
           yeers
           of
           Christ
           ,
           after
           that
           
             Hierusalem
          
           was
           destroyed
           ,
           the
           
             Iews
          
           rejected
           ,
           and
           the
           Nations
           brought
           into
           the
           Church
           in
           their
           room
           .
           Then
           truely
           was
           Satan
           bound
           ,
           that
           he
           might
           not
           any
           more
           seduce
           the
           Nations
           .
           Not
           that
           he
           might
           not
           hurt
           any
           one
           any
           more
           ,
           but
           that
           he
           might
           not
           any
           more
           make
           mad
           the
           Nations
           with
           a
           grosse
           do●age
           upon
           the
           Worship
           of
           
             Pagan
          
           Idols
           ,
           and
           hinder
           the
           belief
           of
           the
           Gospel
           among
           them
           .
           Hence
           we
           may
           easily
           collect
           ,
           where
           we
           are
           to
           fetch
           the
           
             Epocha
             ,
          
           or
           the
           beginning
           of
           this
           account
           of
           1000
           years
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           The
           Text
           doth
           not
           onely
           speak
           of
           seducing
           to
           Idolatry
           ,
           but
           also
           ,
           and
           especially
           concerning
           the
           seducing
           ,
           wherewith
           Satan
           formerly
           enticed
           ,
           and
           shall
           about
           the
           end
           of
           the
           world
           entice
           the
           Nations
           to
           make
           War
           against
           the
           Church
           .
           Again
           ,
           it
           is
           false
           that
           Satan
           from
           the
           year
           of
           Christ
           70.
           was
           bound
           for
           a
           thousand
           years
           ;
           because
           from
           that
           time
           innumerable
           and
           horrible
           heresies
           ,
           fallings
           away
           ,
           and
           scandalls
           ,
           &c.
           have
           been
           .
           Indeed
           Satan
           was
           bound
           at
           that
           time
           ,
           but
           not
           in
           that
           manner
           ,
           and
           measure
           ,
           as
           he
           shall
           be
           bound
           for
           the
           thousand
           years
           .
           Again
           ,
           by
           
             Nations
             ,
          
           in
           the
           place
           quoted
           ,
           we
           must
           understand
           not
           the
           
             Gentiles
          
           onely
           ,
           but
           also
           the
           
             Iews
          
           ;
           who
           truely
           are
           yet
           seduced
           ;
           as
           also
           the
           
             Indians
             ,
             Turks
             ,
          
           and
           others
           .
        
         
           XI
           
             Object
             .
          
           Is
           from
           
             Revel.
          
           20.1
           .
           Where
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           That
           the
           Angel
           which
           bound
           Satan
           ,
           came
           down
           from
           Heaven
           .
           By
           this
           Angel
           therefore
           we
           must
           understand
           Christ
           ,
           who
           came
           down
           from
           Heaven
           ,
           
           
             Ioh
             :
          
           3.13
           .
           Hence
           we
           may
           conclude
           ,
           That
           these
           thousand
           years
           began
           about
           the
           time
           of
           
             Christs
             Birth
             .
          
           For
           at
           that
           time
           the
           
             Grae●es
          
           ceased
           from
           given
           Answers
           .
           Whereupon
           
             Apollo
          
           being
           enquired
           of
           by
           
             Augustus
             Caesar
             ,
          
           answered
           thus
           :
           
           
             
               
                 Me
                 puer
                 
                   Ebraeus
                   ,
                
                 Divos
                 
                   Deus
                
                 ipse
                 gubernans
                 ,
              
               
                 Codere
                 sede
                 juber
                 ,
                 
                 tristemque
                 redire
                 sub
                 
                   Orcum
                
                 :
              
               
                 Ergo
                 dehine
                 aris
                 tacitus
                 discedito
                 nostris
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 
                   Hebrew
                
                 Child
                 ,
                 himself
                 a
                 
                   God
                   ,
                
                 that
                 rules
                 the
                 
                   gods
                   ,
                
              
               
                 Bids
                 me
                 give
                 place
                 ,
                 and
                 back
                 unto
                 sad
                 
                   Hell
                
                 return
                 .
              
               
                 Silent
                 therefore
                 ,
                 depart
                 from
                 hence
                 ,
                 mine
                 
                   Altars
                
                 leave
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           See
           ,
           the
           devill
           himself
           confesseth
           ,
           That
           he
           is
           bound
           from
           this
           time
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           1.
           
           As
           in
           the
           former
           Visions
           good
           Angels
           were
           the
           executioners
           of
           Gods
           Judgements
           ,
           so
           it
           is
           likely
           that
           a
           created
           Angel
           was
           used
           also
           in
           this
           Vision
           .
           2.
           
           Christ
           in
           the
           3
           of
           
             Iohn
          
           is
           said
           to
           have
           come
           down
           from
           Heaven
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           To
           have
           assumed
           the
           humane
           Nature
           .
           But
           the
           
             Angel
          
           in
           this
           place
           ,
           who
           hath
           the
           key
           of
           the
           bottomlesse
           pit
           ,
           came
           down
           from
           Heaven
           by
           a
           locall
           motion
           ,
           that
           he
           might
           binde
           the
           Devill
           for
           a
           thousand
           years
           ,
           after
           the
           downfall
           of
           Antichrist
           .
           3.
           
           It
           is
           true
           ,
           the
           devill
           was
           bound
           at
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Nativity
           of
           Christ
           ;
           but
           not
           after
           that
           manner
           ,
           as
           is
           here
           declared
           ▪
           Look
           before
           in
           the
           
             Analysis
             .
          
           For
           there
           are
           many
           measures
           and
           degrees
           ,
           whereby
           the
           devill
           is
           bound
           .
        
         
           XII
           
             Object
             .
          
           Is
           this
           .
           This
           Interpretation
           ,
           concerning
           the
           Resurrection
           of
           the
           
             Martyrs
             ,
          
           seems
           to
           oppose
           the
           Article
           of
           our
           Faith
           ,
           
             I
             beleeve
             the
             Resurrection
             of
             the
             flesh
             .
          
           For
           so
           a
           double
           Resurressiion
           of
           the
           flesh
           is
           maintained
           ,
           contrary
           to
           the
           Apostolique
           Faith
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           That
           
             Article
          
           speaketh
           of
           the
           finall
           and
           universall
           Resurrection
           ,
           which
           shall
           be
           in
           the
           last
           day
           ,
           and
           in
           which
           all
           the
           dead
           shall
           rise
           again
           .
           Now
           this
           Resurrection
           is
           not
           contradicted
           or
           denyed
           by
           the
           Resurrection
           of
           the
           Martyrs
           ,
           which
           is
           to
           go
           before
           it
           ,
           no
           more
           then
           by
           the
           Resurrection
           of
           the
           Saints
           ,
           who
           rose
           again
           ,
           when
           Christ
           breathed
           forth
           his
           Spirit
           hanging
           upon
           the
           Crosse
           ,
           
             Matth.
          
           27.50
           ,
           51
           ,
           52.
           
        
         
           XIII
           
             Object
             .
          
           Is
           taken
           out
           of
           
             Revel.
          
           20.6
           .
           Where
           all
           ,
           and
           only
           they
           ,
           are
           proclaimed
           blessed
           ,
           and
           freed
           from
           the
           second
           death
           ,
           who
           have
           their
           part
           in
           the
           first
           Resurrection
           :
           Whence
           it
           follows
           ,
           That
           either
           there
           shall
           be
           no
           Resurrection
           after
           the
           first
           ,
           or
           that
           none
           in
           the
           second
           Resurrection
           shall
           be
           blessed
           ;
           both
           which
           are
           
           absurd
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           1.
           
           Nay
           the
           latter
           is
           onely
           absurd
           ,
           being
           granted
           from
           the
           
             antecedent
             ,
          
           or
           foregoing
           .
           2.
           
           The
           antecedent
           is
           false
           ,
           neither
           is
           it
           in
           the
           Text
           .
           For
           it
           is
           not
           said
           there
           ,
           They
           
             onely
          
           are
           happy
           .
           Now
           that
           they
           are
           in
           particulars
           said
           to
           be
           blessed
           ,
           that
           is
           in
           respect
           of
           their
           Prerogative
           ,
           in
           that
           they
           are
           blessed
           above
           others
           of
           the
           faithfull
           ,
           as
           being
           to
           reigne
           1000
           years
           with
           Christ
           before
           the
           last
           day
           .
           And
           this
           is
           intended
           by
           the
           word
           
             Holy
          
           being
           added
           ,
           whereby
           is
           signified
           that
           they
           should
           be
           separated
           from
           the
           other
           faithfull
           believers
           ,
           and
           set
           aside
           for
           this
           happinesse
           ,
           in
           that
           they
           are
           to
           rise
           again
           to
           reign
           with
           Christ
           before
           them
           .
           3.
           
           Thirdly
           ,
           this
           blessednesse
           consists
           of
           three
           parts
           ;
           the
           first
           of
           which
           being
           considered
           apart
           ,
           suits
           also
           with
           the
           other
           believers
           .
           But
           as
           it
           is
           joyned
           with
           the
           other
           two
           parts
           ,
           it
           cannot
           be
           expressed
           but
           of
           the
           
             Martyrs
          
           only
           ,
           as
           it
           will
           appear
           to
           any
           one
           that
           will
           examine
           the
           Context
           of
           the
           6
           
             verse
             .
          
        
         
           XIV
           .
           
             Object
             .
          
           Is
           taken
           out
           of
           
             Revel.
          
           20.6
           .
           Whence
           it
           is
           gathered
           ,
           That
           the
           first
           Resurrection
           hath
           opposed
           to
           it
           the
           first
           death
           .
           Therefore
           by
           the
           first
           Resurrection
           ,
           the
           second
           Life
           ,
           or
           living
           again
           of
           the
           soul
           from
           the
           death
           of
           sin
           ,
           by
           Faith
           ,
           and
           Repentance
           ,
           or
           ,
           in
           a
           word
           ,
           Regeneration
           ,
           is
           to
           be
           understood
           .
           Certainly
           all
           and
           onely
           the
           truely
           regenerate
           ,
           are
           delivered
           from
           the
           second
           ,
           or
           eternall
           death
           ,
           and
           certainly
           obtain
           heavenly
           happinesse
           :
           Whence
           it
           may
           be
           sufficiently
           proved
           ,
           That
           the
           first
           Resurrection
           is
           not
           particular
           ,
           or
           bodily
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           The
           first
           Resurrection
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           spoken
           of
           in
           this
           place
           ,
           is
           not
           opposed
           to
           the
           first
           death
           ,
           of
           which
           there
           is
           here
           no
           mention
           ;
           but
           it
           is
           opposed
           to
           the
           second
           Resurrection
           ,
           as
           appears
           out
           of
           these
           words
           ;
           
             But
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             dead
             lived
             not
             again
             ,
             untill
             the
             thousand
             yeers
             were
             finished
             .
             This
             is
             the
             first
             Resurrection
             ,
          
        
         
           XV
           
             Object
             .
          
           Is
           this
           .
           The
           first
           Resurrection
           is
           not
           a
           bodily
           Resurrection
           ;
           because
           if
           it
           be
           bodily
           ,
           it
           is
           not
           the
           first
           :
           For
           the
           Resurrection
           of
           others
           ,
           namely
           ,
           of
           those
           Saints
           who
           rose
           again
           while
           Christ
           hung
           on
           the
           Crosse
           ,
           went
           before
           it
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           That
           Resurrection
           of
           the
           Martyrs
           is
           called
           the
           first
           by
           way
           of
           Excellence
           ,
           by
           reason
           also
           of
           the
           multitude
           of
           them
           ,
           in
           respect
           of
           which
           that
           Resurrection
           of
           the
           Saints
           comes
           not
           within
           reckoning
           of
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           fewnesse
           .
           For
           although
           many
           bodies
           of
           the
           Saints
           are
           said
           
           then
           to
           have
           risen
           ,
           yet
           in
           regard
           of
           the
           
             Martyrs
          
           they
           were
           but
           few
           ;
           as
           which
           came
           forth
           of
           the
           Graves
           onely
           ,
           which
           were
           neer
           unto
           
             Hierusalem
             .
          
        
         
           XVI
           
             Object
             .
          
           It
           is
           a
           usuall
           Axiome
           in
           the
           School
           of
           
             Divines
             ,
          
           That
           the
           
             first
             Resurrection
          
           is
           the
           living
           again
           of
           the
           Souls
           from
           the
           death
           of
           sin
           ,
           by
           faith
           and
           repentance
           ,
           which
           otherwise
           is
           called
           
             Regeneration
          
           ;
           and
           it
           is
           opposed
           to
           the
           
             first
             death
             ,
          
           which
           is
           a
           defection
           ,
           and
           a
           casting
           a
           way
           of
           the
           soul
           from
           God
           .
           But
           the
           
             second
             Resurrection
          
           shall
           be
           the
           raising
           of
           the
           bodies
           ,
           to
           be
           united
           to
           the
           souls
           to
           eternall
           life
           ;
           to
           which
           the
           second
           death
           is
           opposed
           ,
           which
           shall
           be
           the
           casting
           a
           way
           of
           the
           damned
           to
           eternall
           torments
           .
           
             Ans.
             Resurrection
          
           is
           tearmed
           to
           be
           the
           First
           ,
           ambiguously
           .
           For
           either
           it
           is
           opposed
           to
           the
           first
           death
           ,
           and
           so
           it
           is
           spirituall
           ,
           and
           is
           proper
           to
           all
           believers
           ;
           or
           it
           is
           opposed
           to
           the
           second
           Resurrection
           ,
           and
           so
           it
           is
           corporeall
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           
             Martyrs
          
           onely
           .
        
         
           XVII
           
             Object
             .
          
           The
           thousand
           years
           of
           Satans
           binding
           contain
           an
           obscure
           mystery
           ,
           and
           hidden
           from
           us
           .
           In
           vain
           therefore
           ,
           and
           too
           boldly
           we
           labour
           in
           so
           scrupulous
           an
           uniting
           thereof
           .
           
             Ans.
          
           1.
           
           There
           are
           many
           Mysteries
           in
           the
           
             Revelation
             :
          
           which
           in
           successe
           of
           time
           receive
           light
           more
           and
           more
           .
           2.
           
           We
           dislike
           all
           boldnesse
           ;
           but
           we
           commend
           holy
           diligence
           and
           industry
           .
        
         
           XVIII
           
             Object
             .
          
           From
           the
           end
           of
           Satans
           binding
           ,
           the
           
             Epocha
          
           is
           to
           be
           collected
           of
           the
           thousand
           years
           in
           the
           
             Revelation
             .
          
           Now
           the
           term
           of
           his
           binding
           expired
           in
           the
           year
           of
           Christ
           1073.
           wherein
           
             *
          
           
             Gregory
          
           the
           7
           ,
           that
           devillish
           Juggler
           and
           Cozener
           ,
           possessing
           himself
           of
           the
           
             Popedome
             ,
          
           confounded
           Heaven
           and
           earth
           together
           ,
           and
           filling
           the
           Christian
           world
           with
           Wars
           and
           slaughters
           ,
           declared
           himself
           to
           be
           a
           singular
           instrument
           of
           Satan
           let
           loose
           from
           his
           bonds
           .
           Hence
           it
           appears
           that
           those
           thousand
           years
           began
           in
           the
           year
           of
           Christ
           73.
           
           
             Answ.
          
           Satan
           indeed
           in
           the
           year
           of
           Christ
           1073
           was
           let
           loose
           ,
           as
           he
           is
           alwayes
           to
           be
           conceived
           let
           loose
           ,
           when
           he
           troubles
           the
           Church
           .
           But
           that
           letting
           him
           loose
           ,
           which
           shall
           be
           after
           the
           thousand
           years
           ,
           shall
           be
           farre
           of
           another
           sort
           .
           For
           then
           Satan
           shall
           be
           loosed
           ,
           that
           he
           may
           stirre
           up
           the
           Nations
           to
           the
           Warre
           of
           
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
             :
          
           and
           indeed
           he
           shall
           be
           so
           let
           loose
           ,
           that
           he
           shall
           not
           long
           go
           on
           to
           destroy
           .
           But
           now
           from
           the
           year
           of
           Christ
           1073
           to
           this
           present
           ,
           some
           whole
           Ages
           have
           passed
           .
        
         
           XIX
           
             Object
             .
          
           This
           Opinion
           little
           differeth
           from
           the
           errour
           of
           the
           
             Chiliasts
             ,
          
           or
           
             Millenaries
             ,
          
           which
           long
           ago
           hath
           been
           exploded
           for
           this
           reason
           ,
           Because
           ,
           after
           the
           downfall
           of
           
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           they
           feigned
           ,
           out
           of
           this
           very
           20
           
             Chap.
          
           a
           corporeall
           Resurrection
           of
           the
           
             Martyrs
             ,
          
           and
           
             Confessors
             ,
          
           and
           their
           reign
           with
           Christ
           for
           a
           thousand
           years
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           The
           opinion
           of
           the
           
             Chiliasts
          
           ought
           not
           to
           have
           been
           exploded
           for
           this
           reason
           ,
           because
           it
           maintained
           a
           double
           Resurrection
           ,
           one
           in
           particular
           ,
           
           another
           Universall
           ;
           for
           truely
           in
           Christs
           time
           ,
           when
           he
           hung
           upon
           the
           Crosse
           ,
           there
           happened
           a
           particular
           Resurrection
           of
           the
           
             Saints
             :
          
           The
           Resurrection
           of
           the
           
             Martyrs
          
           hath
           also
           a
           foundation
           upon
           this
           Text
           ;
           whereon
           also
           our
           judgement
           for
           their
           Kingdom
           of
           a
           thousand
           years
           is
           grounded
           .
           2.
           
           The
           
             Chiliasts
          
           erred
           in
           this
           respect
           ,
           in
           that
           they
           maintained
           an
           eternall
           life
           here
           on
           earth
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           City
           
             Hierusalem
             .
          
           That
           this
           life
           should
           consist
           in
           the
           enjoyment
           and
           use
           of
           all
           bodily
           pleasures
           ,
           which
           should
           last
           only
           for
           a
           thousadd
           years
           .
           And
           of
           their
           opinion
           they
           made
           this
           the
           foundation
           ,
           because
           that
           in
           the
           20
           
             chap.
          
           of
           
             Rev.
          
           there
           was
           mention
           made
           of
           a
           thousand
           years
           .
           Let
           us
           hear
           
             *
          
           
             Augustine
          
           concerning
           them
           .
           
             The
          
           Cerinthians
           
             devise
             also
             to
             themselves
             a
          
           thousand
           years
           
             after
             the
             Resurrection
             which
             shall
             be
             in
             an
             earthly
             kingdom
             of
             Christ
             ,
             according
             to
             the
          
           
             *
          
           
             carnall
             pleasures
             of
             the
             belly
             and
             their
             lust
             :
             from
             whence
             also
             they
             are
             called
          
           Chiliasts
           .
           So
           the
           
             Chiliasts
             .
          
           But
           our
           opinion
           maintains
           not
           a
           thousand
           years
           of
           carnall
           pleasures
           ,
           but
           of
           Spirituall
           joyes
           .
        
         
           
             Has
             omnes
             ,
             ubi
             mille
             rotam
             volvere
             per
             annos
             ,
          
           
             L●thaeum
             ad
             fluvium
             Deus
             evocat
             agmine
             magno
             ;
          
           
             Scilicet
             immemores
             sup●r●
             ,
             ut
             convexa
             revisant
             ,
          
           
             Rursus
             &
             insipiant
             in
             corpora
             velle
             reverti
             .
          
        
         
           But
           they
           urge
           ;
           The
           opinion
           of
           the
           
             Chiliasts
          
           in
           following
           times
           also
           hath
           been
           revived
           again
           .
           in
           a
           new
           trim
           or
           dresse
           ;
           and
           this
           exposition
           
           of
           yours
           differs
           not
           a
           whit
           from
           it
           :
           which
           they
           prove
           thus
           .
           
           
             Alfonsus
             Conradus
          
           of
           
             Mantua
             ,
          
           whom
           severall
           times
           you
           have
           before
           alleadged
           ,
           writes
           thus
           upon
           the
           20
           of
           the
           
             Revel.
          
           
             But
             how
             are
             these
             
               thousand
               years
            
             to
             be
             interpreted
             ?
             shall
             they
             be
             said
             to
             be
             already
             past
             ,
             or
             yet
             to
             be
             expected
             ▪
             Here
             you
             will
             not
             easily
             clear
             your self
             ,
             seeing
             the
             expositions
             of
             this
             place
             are
             wondrously
             divers
             ;
             and
             yet
             I
             make
             a
             question
             of
             it
             ,
             Whether
             any
             either
             of
             the
             ancient
             or
             latter
             expositors
             ,
             have
             ever
             touched
             the
             genuine
             and
             true
             meaning
             of
             the
             place
             .
             In
             the
             first
             place
             indeed
             were
             the
             
               Chiliasts
               ,
            
             who
             Iudaizing
             ,
             and
             entertaining
             carnall
             conceits
             concerning
             divine
             matters
             ,
             did
             carnally
             also
             interpreted
             this
             place
             ;
             
             and
             say
             thus
             ;
             When
             six
             Millenaries
             ,
             or
             
               1000
            
             years
             ,
             shall
             be
             accomplished
             from
             the
             Creation
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             then
             Antichrist
             with
             all
             his
             forces
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             wicked
             ,
             and
             whosoever
             have
             obeyed
             his
             commands
             against
             Christ
             ▪
             shall
             be
             destroyed
             .
             Again
             ,
             say
             they
             ,
             For
             the
             whole
             
               7th
            
             Millenary
             ,
             Christ
             with
             his
             elect
             ,
             shall
             reign
             here
             on
             earth
             ,
             in
             all
             tranquility
             and
             peace
             ,
             and
             without
             any
             affliction
             at
             all
             ▪
             Satan
             in
             the
             mean
             while
             being
             bound
             in
             the
             bottomlesse
             pit
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             not
             any
             way
             disturb
             their
             peace
             .
             Now
             the
             thousand
             years
             of
             peace
             and
             tranquility
             being
             accomplished
             ,
             Satan
             shall
             be
             let
             loose
             again
             ,
             before
             Christs
             coming
             to
             Iudgement
             ,
             and
             shall
             stirre
             up
             Gog
             and
             Magog
             against
             the
             Godly
             ▪
             untill
             by
             the
             coming
             of
             Christ
             ,
             the
             
               Militia
            
             or
             strength
             of
             Satan
             shall
             be
             repressed
             ,
             and
             Satan
             shut
             up
             for
             ever
             into
             the
             bottomlesse
             pit
             .
             But
             this
             Doctrine
             ,
             because
             it
             hath
             many
             absurdities
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             avoided
             by
             all
             Christians
             .
          
           So
           
             Alfonsus
             ,
          
           in
           the
           place
           cited
           .
           Hence
           it
           appears
           then
           ,
           That
           the
           exposition
           hitherto
           brought
           and
           maintained
           ,
           is
           nothing
           else
           but
           the
           opinion
           of
           the
           
             Chiliasts
             ,
          
           in
           another
           dressing
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           the
           errour
           of
           new
           
             Chiliasts
             .
             Answ.
          
           1.
           
           In
           this
           opinion
           that
           is
           to
           be
           approved
           of
           which
           hath
           foundation
           in
           the
           Scripture
           ,
           as
           these
           three
           things
           in
           it
           have
           :
           1.
           
           That
           
             Antichrist
          
           shall
           be
           destroyed
           before
           these
           thousand
           years
           .
           2.
           
           That
           the
           Church
           shall
           be
           for
           these
           thousand
           yeers
           free
           from
           persecutions
           .
           3.
           
           That
           after
           these
           thousand
           years
           the
           Warre
           of
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
          
           shall
           begin
           .
           2.
           
           In
           the
           same
           opinion
           we
           dislike
           ,
           and
           disprove
           ,
           That
           it
           allows
           carnall
           security
           ,
           That
           it
           affirms
           that
           no
           ungodly
           men
           shall
           be
           remaining
           for
           those
           thousand
           years
           ;
           That
           it
           maintains
           that
           Christ
           shall
           reign
           visibly
           here
           on
           earth
           ;
           lastly
           ,
           That
           it
           doth
           precisely
           
           joyn
           this
           Millenary
           with
           the
           end
           of
           the
           sixth
           Millenary
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           which
           conceit
           is
           taken
           from
           the
           Traditions
           of
           the
           House
           ,
           or
           Family
           of
           
             Elias
             .
          
           3.
           
           He
           is
           not
           rashly
           to
           be
           accused
           of
           
             *
          
           
             Turcisme
             ,
          
           or
           
             Iudaisme
             ,
          
           who
           affirms
           any
           truth
           which
           a
           
             Turk
          
           or
           a
           
             Iew
             ,
          
           doth
           likewise
           maintain
           :
           as
           for
           example
           ,
           That
           there
           is
           but
           one
           God
           .
           
             *
          
           So
           in
           like
           manner
           he
           is
           not
           straightway
           a
           
             Chiliast
             ,
          
           who
           defends
           the
           truth
           of
           any
           thing
           which
           the
           
             Chiliasts
          
           also
           do
           rightly
           maintain
           out
           of
           Scripture
           .
           For
           this
           they
           do
           not
           hold
           ,
           and
           teach
           ,
           as
           
             Chiliasts
             .
          
        
         
           XX
           .
           
             Object
             .
          
           The
           Kingdom
           ,
           which
           
             Revel.
          
           20.4
           .
           is
           granted
           to
           the
           Martyrs
           consists
           herein
           ,
           That
           their
           souls
           shall
           reign
           in
           Heaven
           with
           Christ
           .
           For
           although
           the
           holy
           
             Martyrs
          
           and
           
             Confessors
             ,
          
           who
           poured
           out
           their
           lives
           ,
           and
           lost
           their
           fortunes
           ,
           under
           Tyrants
           ,
           and
           Antichrist
           ,
           for
           Christ's
           sake
           ,
           were
           judged
           by
           the
           world
           as
           miserable
           ,
           and
           wretched
           men
           ;
           yet
           the
           Spirit
           of
           God
           declares
           otherwise
           of
           them
           ,
           That
           they
           shall
           live
           and
           reign
           in
           happinesse
           with
           Christ
           in
           Heaven
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           1
           This
           Resurrection
           is
           granted
           to
           the
           souls
           of
           the
           Martyrs
           
             Synochdochically
             ,
          
           or
           
             totally
          
           ;
           because
           their
           souls
           shall
           so
           farre
           rise
           ,
           or
           be
           restored
           ,
           that
           they
           shall
           again
           be
           united
           to
           their
           bodies
           .
           For
           the
           dead
           bodies
           shall
           not
           rise
           again
           without
           their
           souls
           ;
           but
           every body
           again
           united
           to
           it's
           own
           soul
           .
           And
           to
           the
           
             souls
             ,
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             dead
          
           are
           opposed
           :
           of
           whom
           it
           is
           said
           ,
           That
           
             they
             lived
             not
             again
             till
             the
             thousand
             years
             were
             finished
             .
          
           Therefore
           ,
           whereas
           it
           is
           said
           of
           the
           souls
           of
           the
           
             Martyrs
             ,
          
           That
           they
           should
           live
           ,
           it
           is
           to
           be
           understood
           of
           their
           Resurrection
           in
           their
           bodies
           resumed
           ,
           or
           taken
           to
           them
           again
           .
           2.
           
           This
           is
           proper
           to
           the
           other
           elect
           
             Saints
             ,
          
           as
           well
           as
           to
           the
           
             Martyrs
             ,
          
           That
           their
           souls
           should
           reigne
           with
           Christ
           in
           Heaben
           .
           But
           in
           this
           place
           some
           prerogative
           is
           bestowed
           on
           the
           
             Martyrs
             ,
          
           which
           consists
           in
           this
           ,
           That
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           thousand
           years
           they
           shall
           rise
           again
           ,
           and
           reign
           with
           Christ
           .
           3.
           
           It
           is
           said
           ,
           This
           particular
           Kingdom
           shall
           continue
           
           for
           a
           thousand
           years
           ;
           which
           cannot
           be
           understood
           of
           eternall
           life
           .
           For
           the
           thousand
           years
           of
           
             Satans
          
           binding
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           kingdom
           of
           the
           
             Saints
          
           with
           Christ
           ,
           are
           the
           same
           ;
           as
           we
           have
           formerly
           proved
           .
        
         
           XXI
           
             Object
             .
          
           The
           War
           which
           Satan
           ,
           after
           his
           thousand
           appointed
           years
           being
           let
           loose
           ,
           hath
           made
           by
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           by
           the
           
             Turk
             ,
          
           
             *
          
           that
           
             Eastern
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           against
           the
           Camp
           of
           the
           Saints
           ,
           and
           the
           beloved
           City
           ,
           that
           is
           ,
           The
           Christian
           Church
           ,
           for
           500
           years
           and
           more
           ,
           with
           great
           successe
           even
           unto
           this
           day
           ,
           took
           it's
           beginning
           from
           the
           
             Holy
             Warre
             ,
          
           first
           raised
           by
           
             Gregory
          
           the
           7
           ,
           Pope
           of
           
             Rome
             ,
          
           by
           them
           who
           wore
           the
           
             Signe
             of
             the
             Crosse
          
           ;
           the
           end
           of
           which
           indeed
           shall
           not
           be
           before
           the
           last
           Judgement
           ,
           wherein
           the
           
             Beast
             ,
          
           with
           the
           
             false
             Prophet
          
           shall
           at
           length
           be
           cast
           into
           the
           Lake
           of
           fire
           :
           And
           the
           
             Catastrophe
             ,
          
           or
           issue
           ,
           shall
           prove
           lamentable
           to
           all
           the
           enemies
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           because
           the
           fire
           shall
           devour
           them
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           This
           idle
           
             Glosse
             ,
          
           or
           
             Exposition
             ,
          
           may
           be
           confuted
           out
           of
           what
           I
           have
           said
           in
           the
           
             Analysis
             ,
          
           or
           
             unfolding
          
           of
           this
           Chapter
           ,
           and
           in
           answer
           to
           the
           9
           
             Objection
             .
          
           This
           in
           brief
           .
           The
           Beast
           ,
           with
           the
           false
           Prophet
           ,
           is
           thrown
           into
           the
           Lake
           of
           fire
           before
           those
           thousand
           years
           :
           and
           those
           thousand
           yeers
           being
           finished
           ,
           the
           Warre
           of
           
             Gog
          
           begins
           .
           Compare
           
             Revel.
          
           19.20
           .
           with
           20
           ,
           7.
           
           Again
           ,
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
             ,
          
           do
           not
           signifie
           the
           Turke
           :
           But
           by
           this
           manner
           of
           speaking
           are
           figured
           out
           enemies
           of
           all
           kindes
           ,
           who
           by
           their
           incursions
           annoy
           ,
           or
           trouble
           ,
           the
           Church
           ;
           as
           before
           we
           have
           made
           it
           plain
           .
        
         
           XXIII
           
             Object
             .
          
           
           In
           every
           vision
           ,
           except
           the
           first
           ,
           the
           description
           of
           the
           last
           Judgement
           is
           set
           down
           in
           the
           
             Revelation
          
           ;
           more
           obscurely
           indeed
           in
           the
           former
           ,
           but
           in
           the
           latter
           more
           clearly
           ;
           
           because
           all
           the
           visions
           are
           terminated
           in
           the
           end
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           that
           the
           godly
           being
           injured
           may
           expect
           the
           day
           of
           their
           deliverance
           ,
           and
           occasion
           of
           security
           may
           quite
           be
           taken
           away
           from
           the
           mockers
           .
           Wherefore
           it
           makes
           nothing
           which
           they
           say
           ,
           that
           
             Revel.
          
           19.21
           .
           The
           peculiar
           destruction
           of
           Antichrist
           is
           described
           ,
           which
           shall
           not
           be
           in
           the
           last
           judgement
           ,
           but
           before
           those
           thousand
           years
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           1.
           
           The
           Antecedent
           is
           denyed
           .
           For
           in
           the
           
             second
             Vision
             ,
          
           which
           ends
           with
           the
           6.
           
             chapter
             ,
          
           a
           description
           of
           the
           last
           judgement
           is
           not
           set
           down
           ,
           but
           some
           particular
           judgement
           to
           be
           executed
           about
           that
           time
           ,
           which
           figures
           out
           the
           last
           judgement
           .
           2.
           
           The
           
             Text
          
           of
           
             Revel.
          
           19.
           and
           the
           
             last
             ,
          
           manifestly
           argueth
           ,
           that
           that
           vision
           is
           not
           terminated
           with
           the
           last
           judgement
           .
           3.
           
           If
           however
           in
           every
           vision
           ,
           except
           the
           first
           ,
           a
           description
           of
           the
           last
           judgement
           were
           set
           down
           ,
           yet
           it
           would
           not
           be
           otherwise
           then
           by
           interruption
           ,
           or
           breaking
           of
           the
           present
           discourse
           ,
           and
           so
           no
           essentiall
           part
           of
           the
           matter
           in
           hand
           :
           and
           consequently
           no
           way
           contradict
           ,
           or
           weaken
           ,
           this
           our
           opinion
           .
        
         
           XXIV
           
             Object
             .
          
           The
           20
           Chapter
           of
           the
           
             Revelation
          
           containeth
           a
           Vision
           ▪
           which
           is
           the
           summe
           of
           all
           the
           foregoing
           visions
           ,
           and
           a
           succinct
           and
           brief
           iteration
           of
           the
           whole
           prophesie
           so
           often
           repeated
           ;
           which
           is
           divided
           into
           three
           parts
           .
           In
           the
           
             first
          
           is
           the
           blessed
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           for
           a
           good
           space
           of
           time
           after
           the
           first
           coming
           of
           Christ
           ;
           which
           is
           expressed
           in
           the
           first
           
             Seal
             .
          
           In
           the
           
             second
          
           are
           described
           the
           painfull
           labours
           ,
           and
           calamities
           .
           wherewith
           the
           Church
           shall
           afterwards
           wrestle
           ;
           Of
           which
           in
           the
           third
           and
           fourth
           
             Seals
          
           ;
           and
           in
           the
           third
           ,
           fourth
           ,
           fifth
           ,
           and
           sixth
           
             Trumpets
             .
          
           In
           the
           
             third
          
           is
           set
           down
           the
           joyfull
           deliverance
           thereof
           ,
           and
           the
           destruction
           of
           her
           adversaries
           ,
           with
           the
           end
           and
           Consummation
           of
           all
           ;
           as
           before
           ,
           in
           the
           sixth
           
             Seal
             ,
          
           and
           the
           seventh
           
             Trumpet
             ,
          
           and
           seventh
           
             Viall
             .
          
           But
           especially
           in
           this
           Vision
           the
           punishment
           of
           the
           Devill
           himself
           is
           expressed
           ;
           when
           as
           in
           the
           former
           the
           destruction
           of
           his
           Ministers
           onely
           ,
           and
           his
           followers
           was
           set
           forth
           .
           Hence
           therefore
           we
           may
           perceive
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           wide
           ,
           the
           whole
           Heaven
           ,
           as
           they
           say
           ,
           who
           out
           of
           this
           Chapter
           do
           erect
           I
           know
           not
           what
           happynesse
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           which
           is
           yet
           to
           come
           here
           on
           earth
           for
           a
           thousand
           years
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           This
           whole
           distribution
           ,
           or
           disposition
           ,
           of
           the
           
             Revelation
             ,
          
           and
           namely
           of
           the
           20
           
             Chapter
             ,
          
           which
           is
           here
           
           proposed
           ,
           is
           absurd
           ,
           and
           manifestly
           obscures
           the
           
             Revelation
             .
          
           See
           what
           we
           have
           formerly
           discoursed
           up
           and
           down
           ,
           and
           namely
           the
           1.
           
             Sect.
             Of
             the
             connexion
             of
             this
          
           20
           
             Chapter
          
           with
           the
           whole
           
             Systeme
             ,
          
           or
           
             entire
             body
          
           of
           the
           
             Revelation
             .
          
           Briefly
           ,
           let
           this
           
             Maxime
          
           be
           observed
           :
           The
           Divine
           
             Revelation
             ,
          
           from
           the
           departure
           of
           
             Iohn
             ,
          
           to
           the
           end
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           distinctly
           figureth
           out
           the
           State
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           the
           Ages
           thereof
           ,
           by
           
             Se●ls
             ,
             Trumpets
             ,
             Vialls
             ,
          
           and
           the
           following
           visions
           ;
           So
           that
           all
           these
           succeed
           one
           another
           in
           a
           most
           beautifull
           order
           ;
           and
           not
           one
           and
           the
           same
           thing
           is
           represented
           by
           divers
           visions
           .
           For
           it
           doth
           not
           suite
           with
           that
           Majestique
           manner
           of
           teaching
           ,
           which
           the
           
             Holy
             Ghost
          
           observeth
           ,
           that
           in
           one
           and
           the
           same
           Prophesie
           he
           should
           propose
           so
           many
           visions
           of
           one
           and
           the
           same
           thing
           .
        
         
           XXV
           
             Object
             .
          
           No where
           in
           Scripture
           i●
           there
           any
           mention
           of
           these
           
             thousand
             years
             ,
          
           but
           in
           this
           place
           onely
           .
           Therefore
           it
           is
           very
           likely
           ,
           That
           these
           
             thousand
             years
          
           signifie
           meerly
           a
           
             Great
             time
          
           ;
           so
           that
           a
           certain
           number
           is
           put
           for
           an
           uncertain
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           1.
           
           Here
           is
           no
           consequence
           :
           It
           is
           but
           once
           mentioned
           in
           Scriptures
           ▪
           Therefore
           it
           must
           not
           be
           taken
           litterally
           .
           For
           also
           she
           Lxx.
           weeks
           of
           
             Daniel
          
           are
           but
           once
           mentioned
           ;
           and
           yet
           that
           number
           Lxx.
           is
           litterally
           expounded
           ;
           so
           that
           it
           is
           taken
           for
           a
           certain
           ,
           finite
           ,
           and
           determined
           number
           .
           2.
           
           This
           phrase
           ,
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           ,
           [
           
             the
             thousand
             years
             ,
          
           ]
           is
           severall
           times
           repeated
           in
           this
           place
           .
           Which
           repetition
           is
           not
           without
           some
           cause
           .
           3.
           
           From
           many
           testimonies
           of
           Scripture
           a
           a
           little
           before
           propounded
           ,
           and
           expounded
           ;
           from
           divers
           Arguments
           recited
           in
           the
           
             first
             Classis
             ,
          
           or
           
             distribution
             ,
          
           and
           compared
           with
           them
           places
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           it
           manifestly
           appears
           ,
           That
           the
           happy
           state
           of
           the
           Church
           for
           these
           thousand
           years
           ,
           is
           described
           in
           this
           
             Chapter
             .
          
        
         
           XXVI
           
             Object
             .
          
           The
           number
           of
           a
           thousand
           is
           the
           number
           of
           perfection
           ;
           Therefore
           ,
           these
           thousand
           years
           in
           this
           place
           do
           denote
           the
           fulnesse
           of
           time
           ;
           but
           are
           not
           to
           be
           taken
           literally
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           1.
           
           This
           is
           an
           Argument
           from
           
             a
             particular
             .
          
           A
           thousand
           sometimes
           denotes
           perfection
           ;
           Therefore
           in
           this
           place
           .
           2.
           
           That
           the
           letter
           is
           here
           to
           be
           retained
           ,
           it
           is
           more
           then
           abundantly
           already
           proved
           .
        
         
           XXVII
           
             Object
             .
          
           The
           division
           of
           the
           Church
           into
           
             Militant
             ,
          
           
           and
           
             Triumphant
             ,
          
           opposeth
           this
           opinion
           of
           the
           future
           happinesse
           of
           the
           Church
           here
           on
           earth
           for
           a
           thousand
           years
           :
           where
           by
           the
           
             Militant
          
           Church
           is
           understood
           that
           part
           thereof
           ,
           which
           in
           this
           life
           is
           subject
           to
           the
           Crosse
           and
           Persecution
           :
           By
           the
           
             Triumphant
          
           i●
           meant
           the
           whole
           Church
           ,
           in
           as
           much
           as
           after
           this
           life
           it
           shall
           reign
           with
           
             Christ
          
           in
           Heaven
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           1.
           
           The
           Warfare
           of
           the
           Church
           is
           not
           to
           be
           restrained
           to
           the
           persecution
           to
           which
           now
           it
           is
           subject
           :
           but
           it
           is
           to
           be
           extended
           to
           the
           Spirituall
           combate
           and
           wrestling
           ,
           which
           ,
           while
           it
           lives
           here
           ,
           it
           hath
           triall
           of
           from
           the
           lusts
           of
           the
           flesh
           .
           Although
           therefore
           for
           these
           thousand
           years
           it
           shall
           have
           no
           Warfare
           under
           the
           Banner
           of
           the
           
             Crosse
          
           ;
           yet
           the
           Spirit
           will
           have
           need
           to
           strive
           and
           War
           against
           the
           Flesh
           .
           2.
           
           The
           
             Triumph
          
           of
           the
           Church
           is
           either
           in
           part
           ,
           or
           totall
           ;
           particular
           ,
           or
           universall
           ;
           begun
           or
           consummate
           .
           For
           oftentimes
           it
           happeneth
           ,
           That
           we
           triumph
           in
           this
           life
           over
           the
           flesh
           ,
           the
           world
           ,
           and
           the
           devill
           .
           Neither
           are
           we
           therefore
           said
           to
           be
           in
           the
           
             Triumphant
          
           Church
           ;
           as
           which
           is
           so
           called
           from
           her
           totall
           ,
           universall
           ,
           and
           consummate
           Triumph
           .
           So
           although
           the
           Church
           for
           a
           thousand
           years
           have
           some
           kinde
           of
           Triumph
           here
           on
           earth
           ,
           yet
           it
           shall
           not
           be
           sincere
           and
           perpetuall
           ,
           and
           therefore
           by
           many
           degrees
           inferiour
           to
           that
           
             Triumph
             ,
          
           from
           whence
           the
           Church
           in
           the
           life
           to
           come
           is
           called
           
             Triumphant
             .
          
        
         
           XXVIII
           
             Object
             .
          
           The
           maintainers
           ,
           and
           Patrons
           ,
           of
           this
           opinion
           do
           
             Iudaiz●
             ,
          
           that
           is
           ,
           follow
           the
           Jewish
           Traditions
           ;
           therefore
           to
           be
           found
           fault
           with
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           Therefore
           also
           the
           Scripture
           doth
           
             Iudaiz●
             .
          
           See
           the
           
             Places
          
           a
           little
           before
           brought
           out
           of
           the
           Scripture
           .
           Moreover
           ,
           we
           generally
           entertain
           too
           mean
           a
           conceit
           of
           the
           conversion
           of
           the
           
             Iews
             ,
          
           because
           being
           over-much
           addicted
           ,
           and
           carried
           away
           with
           
             Scholasticall
          
           trifles
           ,
           we
           weigh
           not
           at
           all
           the
           
             Mysteries
             ,
          
           which
           are
           propounded
           in
           the
           Scriptures
           .
        
         
           XXIX
           
             Object
             .
          
           The
           Church
           ,
           as
           long
           as
           it
           is
           here
           on
           earth
           ,
           is
           under
           the
           Crosse
           .
           Therefore
           no
           such
           happinesse
           thereof
           can
           be
           expected
           ,
           as
           may
           last
           for
           a
           thousand
           years
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           The
           Antecedent
           is
           a
           vulgar
           
             Axiome
             ,
          
           or
           
             Position
          
           ;
           but
           not
           proved
           ,
           neither
           indeed
           is
           it
           to
           be
           proved
           ,
           as
           appears
           by
           what
           we
           have
           urged
           in
           severall
           places
           of
           this
           our
           Discourse
           .
        
         
           XXX
           
             Object
             .
          
           These
           thousand
           years
           begin
           in
           the
           year
           1517.
           
           For
           
           then
           began
           
             Antichrist
          
           to
           be
           revealed
           .
           Then
           also
           were
           the
           two
           
             Witnesses
          
           raised
           .
           Finally
           ,
           from
           that
           time
           the
           light
           of
           the
           Gospel
           hath
           been
           spread
           abroad
           far
           and
           wide
           ,
           and
           Satan
           bound
           up
           more
           and
           more
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           The
           Proeme
           ,
           or
           
             Prologue
             ,
          
           is
           confounded
           with
           the
           principall
           
             Act
          
           ;
           as
           it
           will
           appear
           ;
           if
           the
           
             History
          
           of
           that
           time
           be
           compared
           with
           
             Revel.
          
           20
           ,
           and
           our
           
             Exposition
             .
          
        
         
           XXXI
           
             Object
             .
          
           It
           is
           the
           common
           opinion
           of
           Divines
           ,
           That
           the
           last
           Judgement
           is
           even
           at
           the
           door
           .
           That
           opinion
           then
           of
           a
           thousand
           years
           is
           dangerous
           ,
           because
           it
           makes
           people
           secure
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           1.
           
           It
           is
           not
           the
           opinion
           of
           all
           Divines
           .
           2.
           
           This
           supposition
           is
           erroneous
           :
           And
           therefore
           I
           may
           use
           that
           saying
           ;
           
             *
          
           
             Not
             to
             enstave
             our selves
             to
             suppositions
             .
          
           3.
           
           No
           place
           of
           Scripture
           teacheth
           us
           that
           the
           last
           Judgement
           is
           at
           hand
           :
           Nay
           ,
           some
           places
           of
           Scripture
           teach
           quite
           the
           contrary
           .
           Hereto
           belongs
           what
           
             Cotterius
          
           saith
           upon
           the
           20
           
             chap.
          
           of
           the
           
             Revel.
             To
             the
             year
          
           of
           Christ
           1517
           ,
           
             adde
          
           1000
           ,
           
             so
             you
             shall
             make
          
           2517
           ▪
           
             at
             which
             time
             at
             length
             Satan
             shall
             the
             second
             time
             draw
             the
             Nations
             into
             abominable
             heresies
             .
             Neither
             is
             there
             any
             reason
             why
             this
             should
             trouble
             any
             ones
             minde
             ,
             as
             if
             we
             put
             off
             the
             day
             too
             long
             .
             For
             I
             demand
             out
             of
             what
             place
             of
             Scripture
             we
             have
             search
             it
             ,
             That
             this
             day
             shall
             be
             within
             these
             two
             or
             three
             Ages
             .
             Surely
             we
             have
             but
             perswaded
             our selves
             so
             ,
             because
             we
             would
             have
             it
             so
             .
             But
             I
             will
             beleeve
             the
          
           Revelation
           ,
           
             which
             verily
             not
             in
             one
             place
             puts
             the
             last
             day
             off
             for
             a
          
           thousand
           years
           .
           
             In
             the
          
           16
           chap.
           
             you
             have
          
           Vialls
           ,
           
             the
             first
             of
             which
             leaves
             behinde
             it
             the
          
           Epocha
           
             of
             the
             year
          
           1517
           ,
           
             as
             not
             finished
             .
             And
             these
          
           Vialls
           
             require
             some
             Ages
             for
             their
             pouring
             out
             ;
             and
             not
             fewer
             then
             tenne
             .
          
           In
           which
           words
           of
           
             Cotterius
          
           I
           do
           mightily
           approve
           of
           it
           ,
           that
           he
           weakens
           that
           vulgar
           opinion
           concerning
           the
           end
           of
           the
           world
           ,
           That
           it
           is
           at
           hand
           .
           But
           what
           is
           there
           said
           concerning
           the
           
             Epocha
             ,
          
           or
           beginning
           of
           our
           account
           of
           1000
           years
           ,
           as
           also
           of
           the
           
             Vialls
             ,
          
           may
           be
           confuted
           out
           of
           what
           hath
           gone
           before
           ▪
           It
           is
           an
           evill
           kinde
           of
           teaching
           ,
           either
           by
           way
           of
           exhorting
           ,
           or
           dehorting
           ,
           which
           is
           grounded
           upon
           a
           ruinous
           ,
           and
           false
           foundation
           ;
           as
           this
           which
           is
           drawn
           from
           the
           day
           of
           the
           last
           Judgement
           ,
           as
           if
           it
           were
           even
           at
           the
           door
           .
           Neither
           indeed
           do
           we
           reade
           ,
           That
           the
           
             Apostles
          
           ever
           argued
           in
           this
           manner
           .
        
         
           XXXII
           
             Object
             .
          
           This
           Opinion
           of
           the
           thousand
           years
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           
           here
           explained
           ,
           doth
           ,
           as
           it
           were
           ,
           l●ade
           us
           by
           the
           hand
           to
           the
           day
           of
           the
           last
           Judgement
           :
           yet
           notwithstanding
           Christ
           in
           the
           13
           of
           
             Mark
             ,
             v.
          
           32.
           affirms
           ,
           That
           
             of
             that
             day
             ,
             and
             that
             hour
             ,
             no
             man
             knoweth
             ,
             〈◊〉
             not
             the
             Angels
             which
             are
             in
             Heaven
             ,
             neither
             the
             Son
             himself
             ,
             but
             the
             Father
          
           onely
           .
           And
           
             Act.
          
           1.7
           .
           
             It
             is
             not
             for
             you
             to
             know
             the
             times
             ,
             or
             seasons
             ,
             which
             the
             Father
             hath
             put
             in
             his
             own
             power
             .
             Answ.
          
           1.
           
           No
           man
           can
           exactly
           set
           down
           or
           define
           the
           day
           of
           the
           last
           Judgement
           .
           For
           although
           by
           comparing
           
             Daniel
             ,
          
           and
           the
           
             Revelation
             ,
          
           it
           may
           appear
           ,
           That
           the
           last
           day
           shall
           not
           come
           before
           the
           2694
           yeer
           of
           Christ
           ;
           yet
           by
           no
           means
           or
           way
           possible
           can
           it
           be
           found
           out
           ,
           in
           what
           year
           after
           this
           
             Period
             ,
          
           or
           
             set
             time
             ,
          
           it
           shall
           come
           .
           2.
           
           What
           God
           hath
           reserved
           to
           himself
           alone
           ,
           we
           cannot
           ,
           nor
           ought
           not
           to
           search
           after
           ,
           or
           determine
           .
           But
           this
           
             Period
          
           of
           2694
           years
           ,
           he
           hath
           expressed
           in
           his
           Word
           .
        
         
           XXXIII
           .
           
             Object
             .
          
           It
           is
           absurd
           to
           thinke
           that
           the
           Martyrs
           shall
           rise
           again
           to
           this
           mortall
           life
           :
           for
           this
           will
           be
           but
           an
           ignoble
           change
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           worse
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           in
           the
           Proverbe
           ,
           
           
             gold
             for
             brasse
          
           :
           by
           reason
           that
           the
           souls
           of
           the
           Martyrs
           do
           now
           reign
           in
           Heaven
           ,
           and
           their
           bodies
           rest
           in
           the
           earth
           free
           from
           their
           labours
           .
           Now
           if
           they
           rise
           again
           to
           this
           mortall
           life
           ,
           they
           must
           endure
           the
           enterchange
           or
           vicissitude
           of
           times
           ,
           as
           of
           day
           ,
           and
           night
           ,
           Sommer
           ,
           and
           Winter
           ,
           and
           must
           be
           made
           subject
           to
           the
           necessity
           of
           eating
           ,
           drinking
           ,
           and
           the
           like
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           1.
           
           
             Lazarus
          
           and
           those
           
             Saints
          
           who
           rose
           again
           at
           the
           time
           of
           
             Christ's
          
           Passion
           ,
           were
           brought
           again
           after
           long
           absence
           here
           ,
           from
           life
           eternall
           ,
           into
           this
           mortall
           life
           ,
           notwithstanding
           they
           lost
           not
           their
           happinesse
           hereby
           .
           2.
           
           The
           state
           of
           the
           
             Martyrs
          
           shall
           consist
           of
           a
           happy
           Kingdom
           in
           this
           life
           ,
           which
           shall
           not
           any
           way
           be
           discommodated
           by
           those
           things
           which
           formerly
           are
           objected
           ,
           as
           we
           see
           the
           like
           things
           no
           way
           hindered
           
             Adam
          
           in
           the
           state
           of
           his
           innocency
           ,
           from
           the
           full
           enjoying
           of
           perfect
           happinesse
           .
        
         
           XXXIV
           .
           
             Object
             .
          
           Christ
           in
           the
           end
           of
           the
           world
           shall
           burn
           up
           the
           
             ●ares
          
           :
           therefore
           still
           in
           the
           Militant
           Church
           ,
           there
           s●●ll
           be
           the
           bad
           mingled
           with
           the
           good
           ,
           which
           is
           to
           be
           denyed
           in
           so
           happie
           a
           condition
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           for
           these
           thousand
           years
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           Nay
           rather
           not
           be
           denied
           .
           For
           neither
           shall
           the
           men
           ,
           who
           for
           all
           that
           time
           shall
           live
           on
           earth
           ,
           be
           so
           blessed
           ▪
           that
           either
           they
           themselves
           
           shall
           be
           voyd
           of
           sinnes
           ,
           or
           seperated
           from
           the
           company
           of
           sinners
           .
           It
           shall
           not
           be
           so
           .
           There
           shall
           be
           a
           great
           difference
           between
           the
           happinesse
           of
           these
           thousand
           years
           ,
           and
           that
           of
           everlasting
           life
           .
           The
           godly
           men
           then
           ,
           (
           except
           the
           Martyrs
           )
           for
           the
           whole
           space
           of
           these
           thousand
           years
           ,
           shall
           be
           subject
           both
           to
           sin
           and
           death
           ,
           and
           shall
           have
           the
           wicked
           intermix't
           with
           them
           .
           But
           there
           shall
           be
           no
           such
           matter
           in
           the
           life
           Eternall
           .
        
         
           XXXV
           .
           
             Object
             .
          
           The
           Church
           is
           sufficiently
           reformed
           .
           Therefore
           no
           other
           reformation
           ought
           to
           be
           expected
           .
           The
           Antecedent
           may
           be
           proved
           from
           hence
           ,
           because
           the
           Doctrine
           of
           the
           Fundamentalls
           of
           our
           Salvation
           is
           proposed
           so
           ,
           that
           it
           cannot
           be
           done
           more
           cleerly
           ,
           or
           with
           greater
           light
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           The
           great
           Reformation
           which
           we
           declare
           shall
           come
           to
           passe
           ,
           shall
           concerne
           matter
           of
           
             Life
             ,
          
           as
           well
           as
           
             Doctrine
             .
          
           As
           for
           matter
           of
           
             Doctrine
             ,
          
           the
           foundation
           thereof
           shall
           remain
           .
           But
           as
           for
           those
           infinite
           contentions
           ,
           whereby
           the
           Body
           of
           Christ
           is
           torn
           in
           pieces
           ,
           an
           end
           shall
           be
           put
           unto
           them
           .
           Again
           ,
           many
           places
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           whose
           expositions
           have
           hitherto
           troubled
           the
           most
           learned
           men
           ,
           shall
           more
           cleerly
           and
           better
           be
           understood
           .
           As
           for
           matter
           of
           
             life
             ,
          
           what
           should
           I
           say
           ?
           The
           matter
           it selfe
           speaks
           loud
           enough
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           whole
           course
           of
           our
           lives
           ,
           as
           good
           ,
           and
           as
           great
           as
           we
           are
           ,
           we
           have
           little
           or
           no
           
             Divinity
          
           at
           all
           .
           There
           is
           great
           need
           therefore
           of
           a
           
             Reformation
             .
          
        
         
           XXXVI
           .
           
             Object
             .
          
           It
           was
           an
           ancient
           
             Distinction
             ,
          
           that
           the
           kingdome
           of
           God
           is
           either
           of
           
             Power
             ,
             Grace
             ,
          
           or
           
             Glery
             .
          
           But
           this
           Distinction
           is
           taken
           away
           by
           this
           
             Millenary
             ,
          
           so
           much
           pleaded
           for
           :
           because
           it
           cannot
           be
           referred
           either
           to
           the
           Kingdom
           of
           Grace
           ,
           or
           to
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           Glory
           .
           
             Answ.
          
           It
           belongs
           to
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           
             Grace
             ,
          
           which
           doth
           consist
           of
           divers
           degrees
           .
           Neither
           is
           this
           opinion
           any
           way
           prejudiced
           ,
           because
           in
           the
           former
           discourse
           I
           have
           sometimes
           made
           mention
           of
           glory
           and
           Majesty
           ,
           as
           part
           of
           the
           happinesse
           of
           this
           
             Millenary
             .
          
           For
           this
           
             glory
          
           is
           only
           
             inchoative
          
           or
           in
           it's
           beginning
           ,
           and
           shall
           be
           broken
           off
           by
           the
           War
           of
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
             .
          
           But
           the
           
             Glory
          
           of
           the
           
             Life
             Eternall
          
           is
           perfect
           ,
           and
           never
           at
           all
           to
           be
           interrupted
           .
        
      
       
       
         
           V.
           The
           
             Doctrines
          
           arising
           out
           of
           this
           Chapter
           .
        
         
           
             1.
             
             According
             to
             the
             Order
             of
             the
             Heads
             in
             the
             
               Catechisms
               .
            
          
           
             I.
             THe
             XI
             and
             XII
             Articles
             of
             the
             
               Creed
               ,
            
             concerning
             the
             
               resurrection
            
             of
             the
             flesh
             ,
             as
             also
             concerning
             the
             last
             
               Iudgement
               ,
            
             and
             
               eternall
               life
               ,
            
             are
             treated
             of
             .
          
           
             II.
             The
             
               first
               ,
            
             and
             
               third
            
             precepts
             of
             the
             
               Decalogue
               ,
            
             or
             
               Tenne
               Commandments
               ,
            
             are
             here
             illustrated
             in
             the
             4
             
               verse
               ,
            
             where
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             Godly
             
               Confessors
               ,
            
             who
             worshipped
             not
             the
             Image
             of
             the
             Beast
             .
          
           
             III.
             The
             
               second
            
             and
             
               sixth
            
             Petitions
             of
             the
             
               Lords
               Prayer
            
             may
             be
             explained
             out
             of
             this
             Chapter
             .
          
        
         
           
             2.
             
             According
             to
             the
             Order
             of
             
               Common-places
               .
            
          
           
             This
             Chapter
             makes
             mention
             of
             
               Gods
               Providence
            
             ;
             of
             
               Angels
            
             ;
             of
             
               Predestination
            
             ;
             of
             the
             
               Church
               ,
            
             and
             it
             's
             
               enemies
            
             ;
             of
             
               Martyrdome
            
             ;
             of
             the
             
               Resurrection
            
             of
             the
             flesh
             ;
             of
             the
             
               last
               Iudgement
            
             ;
             of
             
               Life
               ,
            
             and
             
               Death
               Eternall
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             3.
             
             
               Doctrines
            
             out
             of
             the
             severall
             
               Verses
               .
            
          
           
             
               
                 Vers.
              
               1.
               
            
             
               1.
               
               God
               instructeth
               men
               sometimes
               ,
               and
               teacheth
               them
               extraordinarily
               by
               
                 Visions
                 ,
              
               as
               also
               by
               
                 divine
                 Extasies
                 ,
              
               or
               
                 Raptures
                 .
              
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               
                 Angels
              
               are
               ministring
               
                 Spritis
                 ,
              
               who
               receive
               their
               commands
               at
               
                 God's
              
               hands
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               Good
               
                 Angels
              
               are
               endowed
               with
               great
               power
               ,
               and
               strength
               .
            
          
           
             
               
                 Vers.
              
               2.
               
            
             
               1.
               
               Good
               
                 Angels
              
               have
               power
               over
               evill
               
                 Angels
                 ,
              
               or
               
                 Spirits
                 .
              
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               
                 Devill
              
               is
               stronge
               ,
               and
               crafty
               :
               as
               being
               both
               a
               
                 Dragon
                 ,
              
               and
               a
               
                 Serpent
                 .
              
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               onely
               ,
               and
               continuall
               work
               of
               the
               
                 Devill
              
               is
               to
               calumniate
               ,
               and
               falsly
               accuse
               both
               
                 God
              
               and
               
                 Man
              
               ;
               and
               to
               endeavour
               the
               
               hinderance
               of
               the
               
                 Glory
              
               of
               the
               one
               ,
               and
               the
               
                 Salvation
              
               of
               the
               other
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               
                 Militant
                 Church
              
               hath
               severall
               and
               differing
               times
               here
               on
               earth
               ,
               namely
               both
               of
               
                 oppression
                 ,
              
               and
               
                 refreshment
                 ,
              
               after
               the
               divers
               degrees
               thereof
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               dispensation
               ,
               and
               good
               pleasure
               of
               
                 God
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               
                 Vers.
              
               3.
               
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               
                 Devill
              
               is
               bound
               ,
               and
               tyed
               up
               by
               the
               reines
               of
               God's
               
                 Providence
                 .
              
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               
                 Devill
              
               is
               the
               author
               of
               the
               generall
               
                 seduction
              
               of
               mankinde
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               
                 Warres
              
               shall
               cease
               for
               a
               
                 thousand
                 years
                 .
              
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               
                 Warre
              
               which
               shall
               begin
               after
               these
               thousand
               yeers
               shall
               not
               last
               long
               .
            
          
           
             
               
                 Vers.
              
               4.
               
            
             
               1.
               
               
                 Christ
              
               is
               a
               
                 Iudge
              
               appointed
               by
               God
               ,
               to
               whom
               the
               holy
               Angels
               are
               joyned
               as
               
                 Assessors
                 ,
              
               or
               inferiour
               
                 Iudges
                 .
              
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               
                 Professors
              
               of
               the
               Gospel
               are
               hated
               in
               the
               sight
               of
               the
               world
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               
                 Constancy
              
               is
               required
               in
               the
               Profession
               of
               the
               Truth
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               They
               are
               
                 Idolators
                 ,
              
               who
               worship
               
                 Antichrist
                 ,
              
               and
               follow
               his
               doctrine
               .
            
             
               5
               The
               
                 Martyrs
              
               shall
               reign
               with
               Christ
               for
               a
               
                 thousand
                 years
              
               in
               the
               Militant
               Church
               .
            
          
           
             
               
                 Vers.
              
               5.
               
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               generall
               
                 resurrection
              
               shall
               be
               in
               the
               end
               of
               the
               world
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               
                 first
                 resurrection
              
               and
               particular
               of
               the
               
                 Martyrs
              
               is
               the
               
                 proeme
              
               unto
               the
               
                 second
                 ,
              
               or
               universall
               resurrection
               .
            
          
           
             
               
                 Vers.
              
               6.
               
            
             
               1.
               
               As
               the
               children
               of
               God
               in
               this
               life
               have
               one
               above
               another
               
                 prerogatives
              
               of
               
                 gifts
                 ,
                 works
                 ,
              
               and
               
                 sufferings
                 :
              
               so
               shall
               they
               also
               have
               
                 prerogatives
              
               of
               
                 blessings
                 ,
              
               both
               in
               this
               life
               ,
               and
               in
               that
               also
               which
               shall
               be
               hereafter
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               common
               happpnesse
               of
               the
               godly
               ,
               among
               other
               things
               ▪
               consists
               in
               this
               ,
               that
               the
               
                 second
                 death
              
               hath
               no
               power
               over
               them
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               We
               must
               certainly
               resolve
               ,
               that
               there
               is
               a
               
                 second
                 ,
              
               or
               
                 eternall
              
               Death
               .
            
             
             
               4.
               
               Though
               all
               
                 Christians
              
               are
               
                 Kings
              
               and
               
                 Priests
                 :
              
               yet
               in
               a
               mor●
               speciall
               manner
               the
               
                 Martyrs
              
               raised
               at
               the
               beginning
               of
               these
               
                 thousand
                 years
              
               shall
               be
               
                 Kings
              
               and
               
                 Priests
              
               in
               the
               Militant
               Church
               .
            
          
           
             
               
                 Vers.
              
               7.
               
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               
                 happynesse
              
               of
               the
               Church
               ,
               which
               shall
               continue
               for
               the●●thousand
               
                 years
                 ,
              
               must
               not
               be
               confounded
               with●
               or
               mistaken
               for
               the
               
                 happynesse
                 of
                 life
                 eternall
                 .
              
            
             
               2.
               
               
                 Satan
              
               can
               do
               nothing
               ,
               except
               ,
               by
               Gods
               leave
               ,
               he
               be
               let
               loose
               out
               of
               his
               prison
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               God
               alone
               can
               restrain
               
                 Satan
                 ,
              
               as
               if
               he
               had
               him
               shut
               up
               in
               some
               prison
               .
            
          
           
             
               
                 Vers.
              
               8.
               
            
             
               1.
               
               
                 Satan
                 ,
              
               when
               soever
               he
               gains
               power
               ,
               playes
               over
               his
               old
               pranks
               again
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               
                 Satan
              
               is
               delighted
               with
               the
               
                 shedding
                 of
              
               mans
               
                 bloud
                 ,
              
               especially
               of
               the
               Godly
               ▪
               and
               therefore
               useth
               to
               seduce
               ,
               and
               entice
               men
               to
               
                 Warre
                 .
              
            
             
               3.
               
               Whatsoever
               is
               said
               in
               the
               
                 Old
                 Testament
              
               of
               
                 Gog
              
               and
               
                 Magog
                 ,
              
               is
               to
               be
               understood
               partly
               
                 literally
                 ,
              
               partly
               
                 typically
                 .
              
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               
                 Enemies
              
               of
               the
               Church
               are
               in
               number
               many
               .
            
          
           
             
               
                 Vers.
              
               9.
               
            
             
               1.
               
               
                 Men
              
               seduced
               by
               the
               
                 Devill
              
               set
               slip
               no
               occasion
               ,
               so
               watchfull
               herein
               they
               are
               of
               
                 persecuting
              
               the
               
                 Godly
                 .
              
            
             
               2.
               
               The
               
                 Chur●h
              
               is
               the
               
                 beloved
                 City
              
               of
               God
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               It
               is
               the
               
                 duty
              
               of
               
                 Christians
              
               continually
               to
               be
               exercised
               in
               
                 Christ's
                 warfare
                 .
              
            
             
               4.
               
               God
               executes
               wonderfull
               
                 judgements
              
               against
               the
               
                 enemies
              
               of
               his
               Church
               .
            
          
           
             
               
                 Vers.
              
               10.
               
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               
                 Devill
                 ,
              
               and
               his
               Instruments
               are
               cast
               into
               
                 Hell
                 ,
              
               and
               shall
               be
               
                 tormented
              
               there
               for
               ever
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               
                 Eternity
              
               is
               nothing
               else
               ,
               then
               a
               
                 continuation
              
               of
               Age
               to
               Age
               for
               ever
               .
            
             
               3.
               
               
                 Hell
              
               is
               a
               place
               full
               of
               
                 horrour
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               
                 Vers.
              
               11.
               
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               M●jesty
               of
               
                 Christ
                 coming
                 to
                 Iudgement
              
               shall
               be
               very
               great
               .
            
             
             
               2.
               
               
                 Heaven
                 ,
              
               and
               
                 Earth
                 ,
              
               in
               the
               day
               of
               the
               last
               Judgement
               ,
               shall
               
                 passe
                 away
                 ,
              
               in
               respect
               of
               the
               
                 fashion
                 of
                 this
                 world
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               
                 Vers.
              
               12.
               and
               13.
               
            
             
               1.
               
               The
               
                 last
                 resurrection
              
               shall
               be
               
                 universall
                 .
              
            
             
               2.
               
               
                 Men
              
               in
               the
               last
               Judgement
               shall
               be
               
                 judged
              
               according
               to
               their
               
                 works
                 .
              
            
             
               3.
               
               The
               
                 Conscience
              
               of
               a
               man
               is
               like
               a
               
                 book
                 ,
              
               in
               which
               all
               his
               
                 thoughts
                 ,
                 words
                 ,
              
               and
               
                 deeds
              
               are
               as
               it
               were
               set
               down
               .
            
             
               4.
               
               The
               
                 book
              
               of
               
                 life
                 ,
              
               or
               
                 Predestination
              
               shall
               be
               opened
               in
               the
               last
               Judgement
               ,
               for
               then
               shall
               it
               appear
               plainly
               who
               are
               the
               
                 Elect
                 ,
              
               and
               who
               the
               
                 reprobate
                 :
              
               who
               have
               
                 truely
              
               beleeved
               in
               Christ
               ,
               who
               
                 hypocritically
                 :
              
               who
               have
               
                 truely
              
               worshipped
               God
               ,
               who
               according
               to
               
                 appearance
              
               onely
               .
            
             
               5.
               
               The
               last
               Judgement
               shall
               be
               
                 universall
                 ,
                 infallible
                 ,
              
               and
               
                 just
                 .
                 Vniversall
                 ,
              
               because
               it
               shall
               be
               of
               the
               dead
               ,
               and
               living
               ;
               of
               great
               ,
               and
               small
               .
               
                 Infallible
                 ,
              
               because
               God
               is
               all-knowing
               ▪
               and
               hath
               chosen
               his
               own
               from
               Eternity
               .
               The
               
                 Omnisciency
                 ,
              
               or
               
                 all-knowledge
              
               of
               God
               is
               signified
               by
               the
               
                 books
                 ,
              
               in
               which
               the
               works
               of
               every
               particular
               man
               are
               written
               .
               His
               
                 Election
              
               is
               signified
               by
               the
               
                 book
                 of
                 life
                 .
                 Iust
                 ,
              
               because
               God
               shall
               judge
               according
               to
               every
               mans
               works
               ,
               without
               
                 acceptance
              
               of
               persons
               .
            
             
               6.
               
               God
               knoweth
               
                 in
                 what
                 place
              
               the
               particular
               body
               of
               every
               dead
               man
               is
               reserved
               .
            
          
           
             
               
                 Vers.
              
               14.15
               .
            
             
               1.
               
               
                 Hell
              
               is
               a
               place
               full
               of
               horrour
               .
            
             
               2.
               
               
                 Reprobation
              
               from
               life
               eternall
               is
               nothing
               else
               ,
               but
               a
               
                 not-writing
              
               in
               the
               
                 book
                 of
                 life
                 .
                 Election
              
               to
               eternall
               life
               ,
               is
               a
               writing
               of
               our
               names
               in
               the
               book
               of
               Life
               .
            
          
        
      
       
         
           An
           Appendix
           .
        
         
           BEcause
           in
           the
           handling
           of
           this
           Chapter
           ,
           I
           proposed
           to
           my self
           not
           onely
           to
           maintain
           that
           which
           mine
           own
           
             Conscience
          
           witnessed
           with
           me
           to
           be
           
             true
          
           ;
           but
           withall
           to
           furnish
           these
           times
           also
           with
           this
           ,
           not
           the
           least
           
             Consolation
          
           ;
           it
           was
           needfull
           for
           me
           to
           use
           this
           
             Method
             ,
          
           which
           in
           the
           Explanation
           of
           holy
           Scripture
           ,
           
           without
           doubt
           exceeds
           all
           others
           .
           It
           will
           not
           be
           amisse
           therefore
           ,
           if
           I
           set
           down
           this
           
             Method
          
           in
           the
           following
           
             Table
             .
          
        
         
           In
           every
           Chapter
           ,
           yea
           Verse
           ,
           of
           holy
           Scripture
           ,
           there
           are
           to
           be
           considered
           .
        
         
           
             The
             Prolegomena
             ,
             or
             Praecognita
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             the
             foregoing
             matter
             ,
             or
             things
             to
             be
             known
             before
             hand
             ;
             and
             they
             are
             either
             of
             the
             
               
                 Author
                 ,
                 and
                 authority
                 thereof
                 .
              
               
                 Subject
                 ,
                 or
                 matter
                 .
              
               
                 Connexion
                 ,
                 or
                 Coherence
                 .
              
            
          
           
             The
             Text
             it self
             ,
             in
             which
             are
             to
             be
             considered
             the
             
               
                 Argument
                 ,
                 or
                 Summe
                 thereof
                 .
              
               
                 Analysis
                 ,
                 or
                 Resolution
                 ,
                 either
                 
                   
                     Philologically
                     ,
                     and
                     Theologically
                     ,
                     or
                  
                   
                     Logically
                     ,
                     and
                     Theologically
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 Paraphrase
                 ,
                 or
                 larger
                 upholding
                 thereof
                 .
              
               
                 Questions
                 ,
                 either
                 
                   
                     Fundamentall
                     ;
                     proper
                     to
                     that
                     place
                     ,
                     and
                     necessarily
                     arising
                     ;
                     or
                     ,
                  
                   
                     Lesse
                     principall
                     ;
                     common
                     with
                     other
                     places
                     ,
                     and
                     honorary
                     ,
                     or
                     accessory
                     ,
                  
                
              
               
                 Doctrines
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 
                   
                     The
                     order
                     of
                     the
                     Heads
                     in
                     the
                     Catechisme
                     .
                  
                   
                     Common
                     Places
                     .
                  
                   
                     The
                     order
                     of
                     the
                     Context
                     .
                  
                
              
            
          
        
         
           Of
           these
           the
           Argument
           ,
           Paraphrase
           ,
           and
           Doctrines
           ,
           belong
           to
           the
           handling
           of
           the
           sacred
           Text
           in
           the
           way
           of
           Preaching
           ;
           the
           Analysis
           ,
           or
           Questions
           ,
           to
           the
           Scholasticall
           part
           of
           Divinity
           .
        
         
           
             Glory
             be
             to
             God
             alone
             .
          
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
       
       
         
           Testimonies
           concerning
           this
           worke
           of
           Alstedius
           .
           Dr.
           
             Hukewill
          
           in
           his
           
             Apology
             ,
          
           &c.
           
             lib.
          
           4.
           
             cap.
          
           12.5.6
           .
        
         
           
             ALstedius
          
           a
           famous
           Professour
           at
           
             Herborne
             ,
          
           
           in
           his
           
             Diatribe
             d●
             mille
             annis
             Apocalypticis
             ,
          
           published
           about
           two
           yeares
           since
           ,
           is
           of
           this
           opinion
           ;
           as
           also
           that
           the
           
             thousand
             years
          
           mention●d
           in
           the
           20.
           of
           the
           
             Revel.
          
           (
           during
           which
           time
           
             Satan
          
           should
           be
           bound
           )
           is
           yet
           to
           come
           ,
           which
           assertion
           he
           first
           builds
           upon
           a
           litterall
           interpretation
           of
           the
           number
           ,
           in
           as
           much
           as
           it
           is
           five
           severall
           times
           repeated
           within
           the
           compasse
           of
           seven
           verses
           ,
           and
           the
           foure
           last
           with
           a
           special
           article
           added
           ,
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           (
           the
           thousand
           year●s
           .
           )
           Secondly
           ,
           upon
           a
           supposition
           that
           
             Satan
          
           as
           yet
           hath
           not
           been
           bound
           up
           a
           thousand
           yeares
           together
           ,
           since
           the
           delivery
           of
           that
           Prophecie
           by
           the
           Angell
           to
           St.
           
             Iohn
             ,
          
           and
           by
           him
           to
           the
           Church
           ;
           considering
           that
           ever
           since
           ,
           much
           and
           grosse
           idolatrie
           hath
           raigned
           among
           the
           
             Pagans
             ,
          
           obstinate
           blindenesse
           among
           the
           
             Iewes
             ,
          
           since
           the
           rising
           of
           
             Mahomet
             ,
          
           pittyfull
           defection
           ,
           &
           seduction
           among
           the
           
             Saracens
             ,
          
           strang
           errors
           a●d
           heresies
           ,
           sects
           and
           schisms
           among
           the
           
             Christians
             ,
          
           and
           since
           the
           rising
           of
           
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           wonderfull
           ignorance
           sup●rstition
           ,
           and
           persecution
           of
           the
           ●aints
           ,
           together
           with
           a
           generall
           prophanesse
           ,
           and
           corruption
           in
           matter
           of
           manners
           ;
           all
           which
           saith
           he
           ,
           cannot
           stand
           with
           the
           binding
           up
           of
           
             Sathan
             ,
          
           (
           the
           principall
           actor
           of
           all
           these
           )
           for
           a
           thousand
           yeares
           ,
           and
           consequently
           ,
           that
           the
           performance
           of
           that
           promise
           is
           yet
           to
           be
           expected
           :
           and
           for
           confirmation
           of
           this
           opinion
           (
           though
           the
           booke
           it selfe
           be
           but
           little
           (
           he
           alleadgeth
           66.
           passages
           of
           Scripture
           ,
           inforceth
           many
           reasons
           ,
           answereth
           36.
           
           
             Objections
             ,
          
           p●oduceth
           the
           testimonies
           of
           sundry
           learned
           men
           ,
           either
           expresly
           defending
           it
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           wise
           favouring
           ●t
           .
           And
           they
           are
           ,
           
             
               
                 Iustus
                 Heurnius
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Ioannes
                 Keplerus
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Petrus
                 Curaeus
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Ioannes
                 D●bricus
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Ioannes
                 Piscator
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Petrus
                 Molinaeus
                 .
              
            
             
             
             
             
               
                 Ioannes
                 Ferus
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Seraph
                 Firmianus
              
            
             
               
                 Remalcus
                 d●
                 Vaulx
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Martinus
                 Cellarius
                 .
                 vid
                 apud
                 Alst●dium
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Christoph
                 .
                 B●soldus
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Cael
                 Sec.
                 Curio
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Alf.
                 Con
                 Mantuanus
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Lucas
                 Osiander
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Matthaeus
                 Cotterias
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Michael
                 S●ndivoga●●
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 Stephanus
                 Pan
                 〈…〉
              
            
             
               
                 Quos●mnes
                 su●si
                 〈…〉
              
            
          
        
         
           The
           Auth●r
           of
           a
           book
           ,
           lat●ly
           published
           in
           latine
           ,
           and
           inscribed
           
             Nuncius
             Proph●icus
             ,
          
           who
           in
           modesty
           conceales
           his
           name
           .
           
             pag.
          
           34.42
           .
           
             Diatribe
             de
             mille
             ●nnis
             ,
             Ap●ca●
             quem
             tractatum
             ,
             &c.
          
           th●t
           is
           ,
           the
           treatise
           of
           
             Alstedium
          
           concerni●g
           the
           
             thousand
             yeares
          
           in
           the
           
             Revelation
             ,
          
           ●
           est●eme
           above
           the
           value
           of
           gold
           and
           precious
           stones
           ,
           it
           being
           full
           of
           secret
           wisedome
           .
        
         
           
           And
           
             pag.
          
           42
           ,
           
             Als●ed
          
           in
           his
           t●uely
           golden
           little
           work
           of
           the
           
             th●usand
             yeares
          
           in
           the
           
             Ap●calypse
             .
          
        
         
           
             Which
             work
             though
             small
             ,
             yet
             full
             of
             great
             sedul●tie
          
           ▪
           takes
           away
           all
           scruple
           of
           doubt
           herein
           ;
           And
           it
           is
           much
           to
           be
           de●ired
           ,
           that
           some
           one
           or
           other
           that
           delights
           himselfe
           in
           
             Theologicall
          
           misteries
           so
           we●
           worthy
           of
           our
           knowledge
           would
           translate
           it
           out
           of
           the
           
             Latine
             ,
          
           and
           make
           it
           speak
           
             English
             .
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ▪
             Thou
             wilt
             straightway
             thinke
             Reader
             ,
             that
             this
             was
             no
             small
             inciteme●t
             to
             me
             to
             goe
             on
             with
             this
             Translation
             ,
             having
             before
             the
             edition
             of
             this
             booke
             taken
             it
             into
             mine
             hands
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           Testimonies
           concerning
           the
           
             Opinion
             it selfe
             ,
          
           approved
           by
           some
           famous
           
             English
          
           Divines
           .
           And
           first
           Dr.
           
             H●kewill
          
           of
           Oxford
           
             in
             his
             Book
             intituled
             ,
          
           An
           Apology
           of
           the
           power
           and
           providence
           of
           God
           in
           the
           governement
           of
           the
           world
           .
           
             Lib.
          
           6.
           
           
             Cap.
          
           12.
           
             v.
          
           6.
           
        
         
           AS
           wee
           neede
           not
           doubt
           that
           
             Antichrist
          
           is
           long
           ●ince
           come
           into
           the
           world
           ,
           so
           many
           passages
           of
           holy
           
             Scripture
          
           and
           testimonies
           of
           learned
           men
           ,
           make
           us
           more
           then
           hope
           that
           (
           notwithstanding
           his
           late
           victories
           ,
           and
           triumphs
           )
           his
           downefall
           is
           not
           farre
           off
           ,
           and
           that
           thereupon
           the
           Church
           of
           
             Christ
          
           shall
           flourish
           more
           in
           peace
           ,
           and
           
           power
           ,
           in
           doctrine
           and
           manners
           ,
           in
           lustre
           and
           glory
           ,
           then
           hitherto
           at
           any
           time
           in
           former
           ages
           it
           hath
           done
           To
           instance
           in
           all
           the
           passages
           in
           Scripture
           ,
           which
           to
           this
           purpose
           are
           alleadged
           ,
           would
           prove
           ,
           I
           doubt
           me
           tedious
           ,
           and
           in
           some
           perchance
           impertinent
           ,
           mine
           endeavour
           then
           shall
           be
           to
           pick
           out
           the
           choisest
           ,
           and
           among
           them
           specially
           those
           which
           seeme
           to
           point
           at
           a
           fuller
           calling
           as
           well
           of
           the
           
             Gentiles
             ,
          
           as
           the
           
             Iews
             ,
          
           then
           heretofore
           hath
           been
           .
        
         
           
             The
             particular
             places
             for
             brevitie
             I
             have
             set
             downe
             ,
             which
             ,
             Reader
             ▪
             p●ruse
             at
             thy
             leasure
             .
             Psal.
          
           22.27
           .
           
             Esay
          
           2.2
           
             Matth.
          
           24.14
           .
           
             Rom.
          
           52.26
           .
           2.
           
             Cor.
          
           3.15
           .
           
             Micah●
          
           .
           3
           .
           
             Esay
          
           30.26
           .
           
             and
          
           54.11
           .
           
             But
             you
             shall
             have
             them
             all
             in
             this
             treatise
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           The
           Doctor
           goes
           on
           .
        
         
           ANd
           all
           this
           peace
           ●nd
           glory
           shall
           arise
           from
           the
           subversion
           of
           
             Rome
          
           and
           
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           a●d
           his
           adherents
           ,
           so
           eviden●ly
           described
           in
           the
           14.18
           .
           and
           19.
           of
           the
           
             Revelation
             ,
          
           that
           the
           very
           
             Iesuits
          
           themselves
           ,
           
             Ribera
          
           and
           
             Vegas
          
           cannot
           possibly
           devise
           any
           jugling
           conveyance
           how
           to
           shift
           i●
           off
           .
           And
           if
           for
           the
           effecting
           of
           this
           great
           worke
           ,
           we
           should
           grant
           ,
           (
           that
           which
           all
           antiquity
           both
           
             Iewish
          
           and
           
             Christian
          
           much
           beates
           upo●
           )
           that
           
             Elias
          
           shall
           come
           and
           restore
           all
           things
           ,
           I
           cannot
           see
           what
           great
           absurdity
           can
           from
           thence
           be
           inferre●
           ,
           or
           what
           
             Article
          
           of
           
             Christian
          
           faith
           it
           imp●gneth
           .
           Indeed
           our
           
             Saviour
          
           telleth
           his
           
             Disciples
          
           that
           
             Elias
          
           was
           then
           come
           meaning
           
             Iohn
          
           the
           
             Baptist
             ,
          
           whom
           he
           tear●eth
           
             E●ias
          
           in
           regard
           of
           his
           zeale
           ,
           his
           aust●rity
           of
           life
           ,
           his
           suffering
           for
           the
           Truth
           ,
           and
           his
           preparing
           a
           way
           to
           reformation
           ;
           but
           how
           the
           
             Baptist
          
           restored
           all
           things
           he
           tells
           them
           not
           ,
           neither
           can
           those
           words
           (
           as
           I
           conceive
           )
           bee
           prop●rly
           u●derstood
           of
           him
           ,
           nor
           yet
           those
           of
           the
           Prophet
           
             Malachy
             ,
          
           that
           
             Elias
          
           the
           Prophet
           fo●
           the
           turning
           of
           the
           hearts
           of
           men
           each
           to
           other
           ,
           and
           all
           to
           God
           ,
           shal
           be
           sent
           before
           the
           comming
           of
           the
           great
           and
           dreadfull
           day
           of
           the
           
             Lord
          
           ;
           where
           by
           the
           day
           of
           the
           first
           comming
           of
           our
           
             Lord
          
           in
           the
           flesh
           cannot
           well
           be
           mea●t
           ,
           in
           as
           much
           as
           that
           was
           rath●r
           good
           and
           gracious
           ,
           then
           great
           and
           dreadfull
           :
           It
           should
           seeme
           then
           that
           either
           
             Elias
          
           himself
           ,
           or
           some
           other
           great
           
             Heroical
          
           spui●
           matchable
           
           to
           him
           ,
           ●s
           yet
           to
           bee
           sent
           ,
           for
           the
           accomplishing
           of
           this
           gr●at
           businesse
           in
           the
           restoring
           of
           all
           things
           .
           I
           am
           sure
           
             Alstedius
             ,
          
           a
           famous
           professour
           a●Herborne
           
             ,
          
           is
           of
           that
           opinion
           &c.
           
             ut
             supra
             .
          
        
         
           Thus
           Doctor
           
             Hakewill
             ,
             providentīae
             divinae
             ex●urius
          
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
        
      
       
         
           Doctor
           
             Twisse
          
           in
           his
           Preface
           to
           Mr.
           
           
             Medes
          
           Book
           intituled
           ,
           The
           Apostasie
           of
           the
           latter
           times
           .
        
         
           THe
           beginning
           of
           my
           acquaintance
           with
           Master
           
             Mede
          
           was
           occasioned
           by
           a
           rumour
           spread
           of
           his
           opinion
           ,
           concerning
           the
           glorious
           kingdome
           of
           
             Christ
          
           here
           on
           earth
           ,
           which
           many
           hundred
           yeares
           agoe
           was
           cried
           downe
           ,
           as
           the
           errour
           of
           the
           
             Millenaries
          
           :
           and
           i●
           seemed
           wondrous
           strange
           to
           us
           ,
           that
           such
           an
           opinion
           should
           after
           so
           many
           hundred
           yeares
           bee
           revived
           ;
           and
           that
           in
           so
           strange
           a
           manner
           as
           now
           we
           finde
           ,
           both
           amongst
           us
           ,
           and
           amongst
           out-landish
           
             Divines
             .
          
           Neverthelesse
           my selfe
           being
           firmely
           set
           upon
           studies
           of
           another
           nature
           ,
           I
           had
           no
           great
           edge
           so
           much
           as
           to
           hearken
           to
           it
           ,
           much
           lesse
           to
           take
           it
           into
           consideration
           .
           But
           a
           friend
           in
           the
           country
           sometimes
           urged
           mee
           to
           write
           to
           an
           acquaintance
           in
           
             London
          
           ;
           and
           to
           enquire
           of
           Master
           
             Mede
             ,
          
           whether
           he
           were
           of
           the
           same
           opinion
           with
           
             Piscator
          
           and
           
             Alstedius
          
           concerning
           the
           first
           resurrection
           ,
           and
           the
           glorious
           kingdome
           of
           
             Christ
             .
          
           And
           hereupon
           shortly
           after
           word
           was
           sent
           me
           ,
           that
           hee
           did
           agree
           with
           
             Piscator
          
           in
           this
           ,
           that
           some
           shall
           rise
           a
           thousand
           yeares
           before
           others
           ,
           but
           he
           differed
           from
           him
           in
           this
           ,
           that
           
             Piscator
          
           thought
           this
           reigne
           o●Christ
           should
           bee
           in
           heaven
           ;
           but
           I
           (
           said
           Master
           
             Mede
          
           )
           agree
           rather
           with
           
             Alstedius
          
           and
           conceive
           ,
           that
           the
           
             thousand
             yeares
          
           reigne
           of
           
             Christ
          
           shall
           bee
           on
           earth
           ,
           yet
           herein
           he
           differed
           from
           
             Alstedius
          
           ;
           that
           whereas
           
             Alstedius
          
           was
           of
           opinion
           that
           the
           
             thousand
             yeares
          
           reigne
           of
           
             Christ
          
           should
           be
           after
           the
           day
           of
           judgement
           ,
           Master
           
             Medes
          
           opinion
           was
           that
           it
           should
           be
           
             in
             et
             durante
             die
             judicij
             ,
          
           in
           and
           during
           the
           day
           of
           judgement
           ;
           which
           day
           of
           judgement
           should
           continue
           a
           
             thousand
             yeares
             ,
          
           beginning
           with
           the
           ruine
           of
           
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           and
           ending
           with
           the
           destr●ction
           of
           
             Gog
          
           and
           
             Magog
             .
          
        
         
           When
           I
           heard
           this
           ,
           my
           spirit
           was
           stirred
           up
           in
           mee
           to
           lay
           aside
           
           for
           a
           while
           my
           ordinarie
           studies
           ,
           and
           to
           take
           this
           into
           consideration
           ,
           and
           I
           prayed
           Master
           
             Mede
          
           to
           give
           me
           leave
           to
           propose
           my
           reasons
           against
           this
           opinion
           of
           his
           .
           And
           the
           truth
           is
           ,
           the
           improbability
           of
           it
           seemed
           very
           pregnant
           unto
           naturall
           reason
           ,
           and
           divers
           arguments
           that
           way
           offered
           themselvs
           ,
           which
           seemed
           to
           be
           of
           very
           diff●cult
           (
           if
           at
           all
           possible
           )
           solution
           ,
           and
           over
           and
           above
           it
           seemed
           very
           contradictious
           to
           divers
           plaine
           passages
           of
           holy
           Scripture
           .
           Mr.
           
             Mede
          
           very
           readily
           entertained
           the
           motion
           ,
           and
           prescribed
           me
           a
           time
           after
           which
           he
           should
           bee
           at
           leisure
           for
           me
           ,
           and
           in
           a
           letter
           after
           this
           ,
           in
           his
           familiar
           manner
           asked
           me
           saying
           ;
           when
           come
           your
           
             Quaerios
             ?
          
           I
           accepted
           his
           courteous
           answer
           ,
           and
           sent
           up
           unto
           him
           ,
           first
           and
           last
           ,
           twelve
           arguments
           against
           that
           opinion
           of
           his
           ;
           and
           at
           the
           first
           I
           sent
           him
           with
           an
           answer
           devised
           by
           my selfe
           to
           nine
           of
           them
           ,
           for
           so
           I
           had
           promised
           him
           ,
           namely
           ,
           that
           I
           would
           bethinke
           my
           wits
           of
           what
           possibly
           might
           bee
           said
           in
           the
           solution
           of
           them
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           straight●esse
           of
           my
           invention
           ,
           leaving
           it
           to
           him
           to
           approve
           ,
           or
           correct
           ,
           or
           adde
           ,
           as
           he
           thought
           good
           .
           And
           whereas
           I
           could
           devise
           nothing
           at
           all
           in
           answer
           to
           my
           tenth
           argument
           ,
           he
           sent
           me
           a
           large
           answer
           thereunto
           in
           three
           sides
           of
           a
           sheet
           of
           paper
           ,
           whereby
           I
           well
           perceived
           ,
           .
           that
           my
           best
           arguments
           had
           been
           known
           to
           him
           and
           examined
           before
           I
           devised
           them
           .
        
         
           After
           this
           ,
           I
           came
           acquainted
           with
           ma●y
           discourses
           upon
           the
           same
           argument
           ,
           one
           printed
           at
           
             Hanow
          
           in
           
             Germani
             ,
             de
             die
             novissimo
             ,
          
           of
           the
           last
           day
           ;
           a
           few
           onely
           were
           printed
           ,
           two
           copies
           (
           and
           no
           more
           )
           were
           brought
           into
           
             England
             ,
          
           Master
           
             Med
             ,
          
           bought
           them
           both
           ,
           and
           sent
           me
           one
           of
           them
           to
           copy
           it
           out
           ,
           which
           we
           did
           .
           After
           this
           ,
           no
           lesse
           then
           seven
           manu-scripts
           were
           sent
           me
           from
           one
           Divine
           ,
           treating
           of
           this
           and
           other
           mysteries
           .
           Now
           here
           I
           cannot
           but
           confesse
           my
           corruption
           ,
           for
           I
           received
           them
           by
           way
           of
           a
           bribe
           ,
           and
           indeed
           I
           was
           to
           doe
           him
           a
           favour
           ,
           and
           I
           dealt
           plainely
           with
           him
           ,
           and
           told
           him
           I
           would
           not
           sell
           my
           favours
           
             Gratis
             ,
          
           I
           would
           be
           well
           payed
           for
           them
           .
           And
           therefore
           whereas
           
             I
          
           heard
           hee
           had
           strange
           n●●ions
           upon
           the
           
             Revelation
             ,
          
           and
           touching
           the
           mysteries
           of
           the
           first
           resurrection
           ;
           and
           
             Christs
          
           Kingdome
           ,
           I
           looked
           to
           bee
           fee'd
           with
           the
           communication
           of
           them
           ,
           with
           promise
           to
           returne
           them
           safely
           ,
           after
           I
           had
           suck't
           the
           hony
           out
           of
           them
           ,
           though
           he
           had
           never
           a
           whit
           the
           lesse
           for
           that
           ,
           such
           is
           the
           nature
           of
           spirituall
           commodities
           .
           The
           good
           man
           sent
           me
           word
           ,
           that
           such
           bribs
           should
           never
           make
           me
           rich
           :
           
           but
           I
           returned
           answer
           ,
           that
           they
           could
           
             make
             me
             the
             more
             rich
             then
             the
             enjoying
             of
             all
             the
             treasures
             of
          
           Ae●hopia
           ,
           
             and
             the
             hill
          
           Amara
           
             to
             boote
             :
             And
             here
             I
             found
             rich
             mines
             inde●d
             ,
             even
             a●l
             the
             mysteries
             belonging
             to
             Christs
             glorious
             Kingdome
          
           set
           downe
           a
           part
           ,
           by
           wayd
           question
           ,
           and
           a
           solemne
           resolution
           thereon
           ,
           with
           proofes
           adjoyned
           out
           of
           the
           holy
           Scripture
           .
           Since
           t●at
           ,
           I
           have
           met
           with
           divers
           choice
           pieces
           of
           the
           same
           argument
           ,
           some
           prosecuting
           a
           few
           parts
           thereof
           onely
           ,
           and
           others
           more
           .
        
         
           So
           farre
           Doctor
           
             Twisse
             ,
             S●mi
             .
             Pelagianorum
             bujus
             seculi
             acenimus
             inpugn●tor
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           Master
           
             Mede
          
           of
           
             Cambridge
             ,
             Commena
             tionum
             Apocalypticarum
             .
          
           
           Part.
           
             II.
          
           pag.
           
             276.
          
           et
           seqq
           .
        
         
           
             IDadeo
             proximi
             post
             Apostolo●
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           This
           opinion
           was
           so
           approved
           by
           the
           
             Christians
          
           in
           the
           age
           next
           to
           the
           
             Apostles
             ,
          
           that
           
             Iusti●e
             Martyr
          
           doth
           witnesse
           that
           not
           onely
           himselfe
           ,
           but
           the
           
             Christian
          
           of
           that
           time
           in
           all
           respects
           
             Orthodox
          
           did
           with
           a
           joynt
           and
           unanimous
           consent
           beleive
           it
           .
           Which
           opinion
           notwithstanding
           of
           the
           fi●st
           
             Christians
             ,
          
           afterward
           deformed
           with
           some
           additions
           ,
           or
           (
           as
           I
           conceive
           )
           amisse
           understood
           ,
           posterity
           did
           after
           an
           age
           or
           two
           reject
           .
           Yet
           so
           farre
           did
           the
           heate
           of
           this
           contention
           encrease
           (
           which
           deservedly
           you
           may
           wonder
           at
           ,
           and
           grieve
           for
           )
           before
           it
           could
           be
           composed
           ,
           that
           they
           who
           could
           ●ot
           otherwise
           get
           free
           from
           the
           power
           of
           the
           adverse
           opinion
           ,
           established
           by
           the
           
             Revelati●n
             ,
          
           would
           rather
           call
           in
           question
           the
           authority
           of
           that
           divine
           Prophecy
           ,
           confirmed
           by
           all
           the
           schollers
           of
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           and
           their
           next
           successours
           ,
           and
           openly
           and
           boldly
           slight
           it
           ,
           then
           yeeld
           to
           this
           opinion
           :
           till
           at
           length
           happening
           upon
           some
           other
           likely
           interpretation
           o●
           these
           
             thousan●
             y●ares
             ,
          
           permitting
           to
           the
           
             Revelation
          
           it's
           divine
           authority
           ,
           they
           ceased
           from
           their
           attempt
           ,
           which
           could
           by
           no
           meanes
           be
           freed
           from
           the
           censure
           of
           impiety
           .
        
         
           Conceive
           thus
           them
           ,
           that
           the
           
             Seaventh
             Trumpet
             ,
          
           with
           the
           whole
           space
           of
           those
           thousand
           yeares
           ,
           and
           other
           predictions
           belonging
           
           thereto
           ,
           doth
           set
           forth
           that
           great
           day
           of
           judgement
           ,
           so
           much
           spoken
           of
           by
           the
           ancient
           
             Church
             ,
          
           as
           also
           by
           
             Christ
             ,
          
           and
           his
           Apostles
           ,
           and
           is
           not
           the
           short
           space
           of
           a
           few
           houres
           ,
           as
           commonly
           it
           is
           beleives
           ,
           but
           according
           to
           the
           manner
           of
           the
           
             H●brewes
             ,
          
           
           using
           a
           
             day
          
           for
           a
           
             time
             ,
          
           the
           continued
           intervall
           of
           many
           yeares
           ,
           and
           circums●ribed
           with
           
             two
             resurrections
             ,
          
           as
           with
           two
           set
           or
           limitted
           t●rmes
           :
           I
           say
           that
           this
           
             day
          
           shall
           bee
           begun
           first
           with
           the
           part●cul●r
           and
           t●mely
           judgement
           of
           
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           and
           oth●r
           ene●ies
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           then
           remaining
           alive
           with
           the
           glorious
           appearance
           of
           our
           Lord
           
             Christ
          
           in
           flames
           of
           fire
           ;
           and
           that
           at
           length
           after
           the
           Kingdome
           of
           a
           thousand
           yeares
           granted
           to
           his
           holy
           Spouse
           the
           
             New
             Ierusal●m
          
           here
           on
           earth
           ,
           and
           others
           that
           shall
           afterward
           be
           borne
           this
           great
           day
           now
           drawing
           to
           an
           end
           ,
           shall
           bee
           finish●d
           ,
           aft●r
           the
           letting
           loose
           of
           
             Satan
          
           and
           u●ter
           destruction
           of
           the
           Churches
           e●emies
           ,
           with
           the
           generall
           resurrection
           and
           judgement
           of
           all
           the
           dead
           :
           which
           being
           performed
           ,
           the
           wicked
           shall
           be
           thrust
           downe
           i●to
           
             Hell
          
           to
           bee
           torm●nted
           eternally
           ,
           and
           the
           
             Saints
          
           translated
           into
           
             Heaven
          
           to
           live
           with
           
             Christ
          
           there
           for
           ever
           .
        
         
           This
           indeed
           is
           the
           
             Time
          
           of
           the
           anger
           of
           God
           upon
           the
           Nations
           ,
           and
           avenging
           the
           cause
           of
           them
           who
           dyed
           for
           
             Christ
             ,
          
           for
           which
           after
           the
           blast
           of
           the
           seaventh
           Trumpet
           ,
           chapter
           ele●enth
           ,
           the
           
             El●ers
          
           give
           thankes
           with
           triumph
           ,
           because
           therein
           God
           was
           to
           g●ve
           a
           reward
           to
           his
           servants
           the
           Prophets
           and
           Saints
           ,
           and
           to
           them
           that
           feared
           his
           ●ame
           ,
           small
           and
           great
           ;
           
             and
             would
             destroy
             th●m
             who
             destroy
             the
             earth
             .
          
        
         
           This
           is
           that
           day
           of
           judgement
           ,
           and
           destruction
           of
           wicked
           men
           ,
           of
           which
           
             Peter
          
           2.
           
             Ep.
          
           3.8
           .
           having
           spoken
           ,
           pr●sently
           addes
           :
           
             But
             (
             beloved
             )
             be
             not
             ignorant
             of
             this
             one
             thing
             ,
          
           (
           for
           before
           I
           shewed
           it
           was
           called
           a
           day
           )
           
             that
             one
             day
             is
             with
             the
             Lord
             as
             a
             thousand
             yeares
             ,
             and
             a
             thousand
             yeares
             as
             one
             day
             .
          
           In
           which
           very
           day
           the
           Apostle
           with
           his
           brethren
           and
           kinsfolk
           ,
           the
           Iewes
           (
           to
           whom
           he
           writeth
           )
           doth
           expect
           a
           new
           fashion
           of
           things
           to
           happen
           ,
           of
           which
           hee
           saith
           Presen●ly
           BVT
           WEE
           EXPECT
           A
           NEW
           HEAVEN
           AND
           A
           NEW
           EARTH
           ;
           
           according
           to
           his
           Promise
           where
           in
           dwelleth
           righteousnes
           .
           Take
           notice
           ;
           
             according
             to
             his
             promise
             .
          
           Now
           where
           was
           this
           promise
           to
           be
           found
           of
           a
           
             new
             Heaven
             ,
          
           and
           
             new
             Earth
          
           (
           seeing
           
             Iohn
          
           had
           not
           yet
           had
           this
           Revelation
           )
           but
           
             Esaya
          
           65.17
           .
           and
           66.22
           .
           
           which
           promise
           whosoever
           shall
           reade
           ,
           I
           should
           wonder
           if
           he
           think
           that
           it
           is
           to
           be
           accomplished
           anywhere
           else
           but
           vpon
           Earth
           .
        
         
           This
           is
           also
           that
           Kingdome
           ,
           which
           is
           ioyned
           with
           Christs
           appearance
           heere
           on
           Earth
           to
           Iudge
           the
           world
           ,
           of
           which
           
             Paul
          
           to
           
             Timothy
          
           2.
           
             Ep.
          
           4
           1.
           
           I
           
             charge
             thee
             before
             god
             and
             the
             lord
          
           Iesus
           Christ
           
             〈◊〉
             shall
             Iudge
             the
             quicke
             and
             the
             dead
             at
             his
          
           APPEARING
           
             and
          
           HIS
           KINGDOME
           .
           For
           after
           the
           last
           and
           Vniuersall
           Resurrection
           ,
           the
           same
           
             Paul
          
           being
           witnesse
           1.
           
             Cor.
          
           15.24
           :
           Christ
           
             having
             destroyed
             the
             last
             enemy
             death
             ,
             shall
             deliver
             up
             the
             Kingdome
             to
             the
             Father
             ,
             that
             he
             himselfe
             may
             be
             subiect
             to
             him
             that
             put
             all
             things
             vnder
             him
             ;
             so
             little
             can
             he
             be
          
           said
           to
           enter
           upon
           a
           new
           kingdome
           .
           The
           Kingdome
           therefore
           ,
           which
           neither
           was
           before
           the
           App●arance
           of
           the
           Lord
           neither
           shall
           be
           after
           the
           last
           Resurrection
           must
           necessarily
           be
           concluded
           to
           be
           batweene
           them
           both
           .
        
         
           This
           is
           the
           kingdom
           of
           the
           son
           of
           man
           ,
           which
           
             Dan.
          
           saw
           ,
           the
           times
           of
           the
           
             Antichristian
          
           HORNE
           being
           finished
           ,
           or
           the
           times
           of
           the
           
             Gentiles
          
           (
           
             Luke
          
           21.24
           )
           being
           accomplished
           ;
           who
           shall
           appeare
           in
           the
           clouds
           ,
           when
           power
           ,
           and
           glory
           ,
           and
           the
           Kingdome
           shall
           be
           given
           to
           him
           ,
           that
           all
           people
           ,
           nations
           ,
           and
           languages
           may
           serve
           him
           for
           when
           (
           as
           the
           
             Angel
          
           streight
           expoundeth
           it
           )
           
             the
             Kingdom
             and
             Dominion
             ,
          
           
           
             and
             greatnesse
             of
             the
             Kingdome
             under
             the
             whole
             heaven
          
           (
           mark
           it
           well
           )
           
             shall
             be
             given
             to
             the
             people
             of
             the
             Sai●ts
             of
             the
             most
             high
             .
          
           For
           neither
           as
           I
           sayd
           before
           ,
           shall
           this
           Kingdome
           be
           after
           the
           last
           Resurrection
           ,
           seeing
           then
           the
           Sonne
           of
           man
           shall
           not
           enter
           upon
           a
           Kingdome
           ,
           but
           as
           
             Paul
          
           saith
           ,
           he
           must
           lay
           it
           downe
           ,
           and
           deliver
           to
           his
           Father
           .
           Now
           that
           the
           same
           kingdome
           is
           spoken
           of
           by
           
             Daniel
          
           and
           
             Iohn
          
           may
           from
           hence
           be
           evinced
           .
           First
           ,
           because
           both
           Kingdom●
           begin
           with
           the
           ruine
           of
           the
           fourth
           ,
           or
           
             Roman
             Beast
             ,
          
           that
           of
           
             Daniel
             ,
          
           when
           the
           Beast
           under
           the
           last
           command
           of
           the
           Horne
           which
           had
           eyes
           ,
           
           was
           slaine
           and
           his
           body
           given
           to
           the
           burning
           flame
           ;
           that
           in
           th●Revelation
           
             ,
          
           when
           the
           Beast
           and
           false
           Prophet
           (
           that
           wicked
           Horne
           is
           
             Dani●l
          
           having
           mouth
           and
           eyes
           like
           a
           head
           )
           were
           taken
           and
           both
           cast
           alive
           into
           the
           lake
           of
           fire
           burning
           with
           brimstone
           .
           Secondly
           ,
           from
           the
           same
           sitting
           in
           judgement
           ,
           which
           went
           before
           both
           :
           for
           that
           one
           place
           is
           borrowed
           from
           the
           other
           ,
           and
           both
           ente●d
           the
           same
           thing
           ,
           will
           appeare
           from
           the
           comparing
           of
           the
           descriptions
           of
           both
           .
        
         
         
           
             
               
                 DAN.
                 
                   Cap.
                
                 VII
                 .
              
               
                 APOC.
                 XX
                 .
                 4
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 
                   Ver.
                
                 9.
                 
                 
                   I
                   beheld
                   till
                   the
                   Thrones
                   were
                   placed
                   .
                
                 For
                 so
                 it
                 must
                 be
                 rendred
                 with
                 the
                 Vulgar
                 ,
                 LXX
                 .
                 and
                 
                   Theodor
                   ,
                
                 and
                 so
                 
                   {non-Roman}
                   {non-Roman}
                   {non-Roman}
                   {non-Roman}
                   {non-Roman}
                
                 or
                 
                   {non-Roman}
                   {non-Roman}
                   {non-Roman}
                   {non-Roman}
                   {non-Roman}
                
                 is
                 used
                 of
                 a
                 Throne
                 in
                 the
                 
                   Targum
                
                 on
                 
                   Ier.
                
                 1.15
                 .
              
               
                 
                   And
                   I
                   saw
                   Thrones
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   Ver.
                
                 10.
                 
                 
                   And
                   judgement
                   was
                   set
                   .
                
                 That
                 is
                 ,
                 Judges
                 ,
                 as
                 in
                 the
                 great
                 
                   Sanbedrim
                
                 or
                 Councell
                 of
                 the
                 Jewes
                 ,
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 manner
                 of
                 which
                 this
                 whole
                 description
                 is
                 fitted
                 .
              
               
                 
                   And
                   they
                   sate
                   upon
                   them
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   Ver.
                
                 22.
                 
                 
                   And
                   judgement
                   was
                   given
                   to
                   the
                   Saints
                   of
                   the
                   most
                   High
                   .
                
                 That
                 is
                 ,
                 Power
                 to
                 Judge
                 ,
                 whence
                 is
                 that
                 of
                 
                   Paul
                   .
                   The
                   just
                   shall
                   judge
                   the
                   Earth
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   And
                   judgement
                   was
                   given
                   unto
                   them
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   And
                   the
                   Saints
                   possessed
                   the
                   Kingdome
                   .
                
                 That
                 is
                 ,
                 with
                 the
                 Sonne
                 of
                 man
                 who
                 came
                 in
                 the
                 clouds
                 of
                 Heaven
                 .
              
               
                 
                   And
                   the
                   Saints
                   lived
                   &
                   reigned
                   with
                   Christ
                   a
                   thousand
                   yeares
                   .
                
              
            
          
        
         
           Moreover
           I
           would
           advise
           the
           Reader
           of
           this
           ;
           whatsoever
           wholesome
           truth
           almost
           is
           delivered
           by
           the
           
             Iewes
             ,
          
           or
           by
           our
           
             Saviour
          
           in
           the
           
             Gospel
             ,
          
           or
           anywhere
           in
           the
           
             new
             Testament
             ,
          
           by
           the
           
             Apostles
             ,
          
           concerning
           the
           day
           of
           the
           
             Great
             Iudgement
             ,
          
           is
           taken
           out
           of
           this
           vision
           of
           
             Daniel
          
           ;
           namely
           ,
           the
           Judgement
           which
           shall
           be
           by
           fire
           ,
           Christs
           comming
           in
           the
           Cloudes
           of
           Heaven
           ,
           his
           comming
           in
           the
           glory
           of
           his
           Father
           with
           a
           multitude
           of
           Angels
           ,
           the
           judging
           of
           the
           world
           by
           him
           with
           his
           Saints
           ,
           the
           abolishing
           of
           
             Antichrist
             ,
          
           by
           the
           glorious
           appearance
           of
           his
           comming
           ,
           &c.
           
           So
           that
           they
           goe
           about
           to
           take
           away
           a
           pillar
           of
           our
           Evangelicall
           faith
           ,
           who
           neglecting
           this
           ancient
           tradition
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           goe
           about
           to
           carry
           this
           Prophecy
           another
           way
           .
        
         
           Lastly
           ,
           to
           make
           an
           end
           :
           This
           is
           that
           most
           great
           Kingdome
           ,
           which
           ,
           as
           
             Daniel
          
           interprets
           it
           ,
           was
           shewed
           to
           
             Nebuchadnezzar
          
           in
           that
           representative
           Statue
           of
           the
           foure
           Kingdomes
           :
           
           Not
           that
           of
           the
           STONE
           ,
           which
           (
           the
           succession
           of
           the
           IV
           Monarchies
           yet
           remaining
           )
           was
           cut
           out
           of
           the
           Mountaine
           ,
           (
           for
           this
           is
           the
           present
           state
           of
           
             Christs
          
           Kingdom●
           )
           but
           of
           the
           
             Stone
             ,
          
           which
           (
           those
           
           Monarchies
           being
           dissolved
           and
           overthrowne
           )
           became
           a
           Mountain●
           and
           filled
           the
           whole
           earth
           .
        
         
           
             
               Hactenus
               Medeus
               ,
               
                 {non-Roman}
                 {non-Roman}
                 {non-Roman}
                 {non-Roman}
                 {non-Roman}
              
               ,
               in
               m
               sticis
               Prophetiis
               ,
               si
               quis
               alius
               ,
            
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           
             
               
                 
                   The
                   Learned
                   Authour
                   of
                   a
                   Latine
                   Treatise
                   lately
                   Printed
                   in
                   
                     London
                     ,
                  
                   and
                   Inscribed
                   NVNC
                   IVS
                   PROPHETICVS
                   .
                
                 
                   DE
                   
                     millenariâ
                     felicitate
                     doctrinam
                     non
                     esse
                     novam
                     ,
                     besternam
                     ,
                     &c.
                     
                  
                   The
                   future
                   felicity
                   of
                   the
                   Saints
                   and
                   servants
                   of
                   God
                   here
                   on
                   earth
                   for
                   the
                   space
                   of
                   1000.
                   yeares
                   is
                   no
                   novell
                   conceit
                   ,
                   new
                   broached
                   fancy
                   ,
                   or
                   an
                   opinion
                   started
                   up
                   yesterday
                   ;
                   but
                   a
                   Truth
                   to
                   be
                   reverenced
                   for
                   its
                   antiquity
                   and
                   seniority
                   ,
                   
                   it
                   being
                   countenanced
                   and
                   maintained
                   above
                   14.
                   or
                   1500.
                   yeares
                   agoe
                   ,
                   yea
                   even
                   in
                   the
                   infancy
                   of
                   the
                   
                     Christian
                     Church
                     .
                  
                   Many
                   reverend
                   men
                   ,
                   famous
                   for
                   their
                   sanctity
                   ,
                   and
                   learning
                   ,
                   who
                   lived
                   whilest
                   the
                   blood
                   of
                   
                     Christ
                  
                   was
                   yet
                   warme
                   ,
                   taught
                   freely
                   ,
                   and
                   fully
                   with
                   applause
                   of
                   all
                   ,
                   and
                   contradiction
                   of
                   none
                   ,
                   concerning
                   a
                   great
                   
                     Sabbath
                  
                   and
                   time
                   of
                   
                     Rest
                     ,
                  
                   which
                   should
                   in
                   after
                   ages
                   come
                   upon
                   the
                   Earth
                   .
                   Some
                   of
                   them
                   maintained
                   then
                   a
                   twofold
                   Resurrection
                   .
                   1.
                   
                   
                     Particular
                     ,
                  
                   of
                   some
                   choyce
                   Saints
                   ,
                   especially
                   
                     Martyrs
                  
                   and
                   
                     Confessors
                     ,
                  
                   whose
                   lives
                   were
                   shortned
                   and
                   imbittered
                   for
                   the
                   testimony
                   of
                   
                     Iesus
                     .
                  
                   2.
                   
                   
                     Vniversall
                     ,
                  
                   of
                   the
                   residue
                   of
                   the
                   Saints
                   with
                   all
                   the
                   Reprobates
                   ,
                   which
                   is
                   a
                   principall
                   flower
                   in
                   the
                   Garland
                   of
                   every
                   
                     Christians
                     Creed
                     ,
                  
                   and
                   betwixt
                   both
                   ,
                   a
                   truely
                   
                     Golden
                     Age
                  
                   of
                   1000.
                   yeares
                   continuance
                   .
                   Peruse
                   and
                   ponder
                   ,
                   good
                   Reader
                   ,
                   
                     Revel.
                  
                   5.10
                   .
                   and
                   
                     ch.
                  
                   20.4
                   ,
                   5
                   ,
                   6.
                   where
                   the
                   premises
                   (
                   if
                   my
                   interpretation
                   may
                   ●eare
                   sway
                   )
                   are
                   so
                   manifestly
                   asserted
                   ,
                   as
                   if
                   they
                   were
                   written
                   with
                   a
                   
                     Sunne
                     beame
                     .
                  
                   Neither
                   let
                   any
                   scruple
                   at
                   the
                   raising
                   of
                   any
                   particular
                   Saints
                   before
                   their
                   Brethren
                   ,
                   seeing
                   we
                   
                   have
                   a
                   president
                   hereof
                   in
                   sacred
                   Writ
                   ,
                   or
                   the
                   first
                   
                     Good
                     Friday
                     ,
                  
                   (
                   or
                   as
                   I
                   rather
                   conceive
                   )
                   on
                   the
                   first
                   
                     Easter
                     day
                  
                   :
                   for
                   at
                   that
                   time
                   there
                   arose
                   with
                   
                     Christ
                  
                   our
                   first
                   Parents
                   ,
                   holy
                   
                     Patriarches
                  
                   and
                   
                     Matriarchs
                     ,
                  
                   with
                   many
                   religious
                   Kings
                   ,
                   and
                   inspired
                   Prophets
                   ,
                   by
                   name
                   ,
                   
                     Adam
                     ,
                     Eve
                     ,
                     Noah
                     ,
                     Abraham
                  
                   and
                   his
                   
                     Sarah
                     ,
                     Isaac
                     ,
                     Iacob
                     ,
                     Iob
                     ,
                     Moses
                     ,
                     David
                  
                   :
                   or
                   at
                   least
                   ,
                   
                     Iohn
                     Baptist
                     ,
                     Zachary
                     ,
                     Elizabeth
                     ,
                     Simeon
                     ,
                     Anna
                     ,
                     Ioseph
                  
                   Christs
                   Foster-father
                   ,
                   with
                   others
                   who
                   saw
                   and
                   conversed
                   with
                   Christ
                   in
                   the
                   flesh
                   .
                
                 
                   Moreover
                   not
                   a
                   few
                   eminent
                   and
                   ancient
                   
                     Fathers
                  
                   were
                   strongly
                   opinionated
                   that
                   
                     Christ
                  
                   himselfe
                   should
                   then
                   descend
                   from
                   Heaven
                   ,
                   and
                   here
                   Reigne
                   in
                   a
                   visible
                   shape
                   with
                   great
                   glory
                   and
                   tranquillity
                   amongst
                   his
                   Saints
                   and
                   holy
                   ones
                   ,
                   That
                   eloquent
                   and
                   
                     *
                  
                   
                     candid
                  
                   writer
                   
                     Lactantius
                     ,
                  
                   the
                   
                     Cicero
                  
                   of
                   the
                   Christians
                   shall
                   be
                   the
                   mouth
                   of
                   the
                   rest
                   .
                   
                     The
                     Sonne
                     of
                     the
                     highest
                     ,
                     and
                     great
                     God
                     shall
                     come
                     to
                     judge
                     the
                     living
                     and
                     dead
                     ,
                     and
                     he
                     shall
                     dwell
                     among
                     men
                     
                       1000.
                    
                     yeares
                     ,
                     and
                     he
                     shall
                     governe
                     them
                     under
                     a
                     most
                     just
                     command
                     ;
                     and
                     they
                     shall
                     live
                     with
                     their
                     bodies
                     ,
                     they
                     shall
                     not
                     dye
                     ;
                     but
                     for
                     those
                     
                       1000.
                    
                     yeares
                     they
                     shall
                     encrease
                     into
                     an
                     infinite
                     multitude
                     ,
                     and
                     their
                     issue
                     shall
                     be
                     holy
                     ,
                     and
                     beloved
                     of
                     God
                     .
                     Now
                     they
                     that
                     are
                     raised
                     from
                     the
                     dead
                     shall
                     as
                     Iudges
                     be
                     placed
                     over
                     them
                     that
                     are
                     alive
                     .
                     
                       And
                       a
                       little
                       after
                       :
                    
                     The
                     Moone
                     shall
                     receive
                     the
                     brightnesse
                     of
                     the
                     Sun
                     ,
                     and
                     shall
                     lose
                     her
                     light
                     no
                     more
                     .
                     And
                     the
                     Sun
                     shall
                     be
                     seven
                     times
                     more
                     glorious
                     then
                     now
                     it
                     is
                     .
                     The
                     earth
                     shall
                     expresse
                     her
                     fruitfulnesse
                     ,
                     and
                     bring
                     forth
                     of
                     its
                     owne
                     accord
                     plentifull
                     store
                     of
                     corne
                     :
                     The
                     cliffes
                     of
                     the
                     Mountaines
                     shall
                     sweat
                     out
                     honey
                     ,
                     the
                     Springs
                     and
                     rivers
                     shall
                     flow
                     with
                     wine
                     and
                     milke
                     .
                     
                     
                       And
                       presently
                       againe
                       ,
                    
                     There
                     shall
                     be
                     no
                     ravenous
                     beasts
                     in
                     this
                     time
                     ,
                     no
                     birds
                     of
                     prey
                     ;
                     but
                     all
                     things
                     shall
                     be
                     quiet
                     and
                     peaceable
                     .
                     The
                     Lyon
                     and
                     Calfe
                     shall
                     feed
                     at
                     the
                     same
                     stall
                     ;
                     the
                     Wolfe
                     shall
                     not
                     devoure
                     the
                     Sheepe
                     ,
                     neither
                     shall
                     the
                     dogge
                     hunt
                     after
                     his
                     prey
                     .
                     The
                     Eagle
                     and
                     Hawke
                     shall
                     doe
                     no
                     harme
                     :
                     The
                     Infan●
                     shall
                     play
                     with
                     Seapents
                     .
                     Lastly
                     ,
                     all
                     those
                     things
                     shall
                     come
                     to
                     passe
                     which
                     the
                     Poets
                     fable
                     to
                     have
                     beene
                     in
                     those
                     golden
                     times
                     of
                     Saturnes
                     reigne
                     .
                     Men
                     shall
                     live
                     therefore
                     a
                     most
                     quiet
                     and
                     plentifull
                     life
                     ,
                     and
                     they
                     shall
                     reigne
                     together
                     with
                     God
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     Kings
                     of
                     the
                     earth
                     shall
                     bring
                     in
                     their
                     gifts
                     and
                     presents
                     to
                     worship
                     and
                     honour
                     the
                     great
                     King
                     ,
                     &c.
                     
                  
                   This
                   is
                   the
                   doctrine
                   of
                   the
                   holy
                   Prophets
                   ,
                   which
                   we
                   Christians
                   follow
                   :
                   This
                   is
                   Christian
                   wisdome
                   .
                   These
                   are
                   the
                   words
                   of
                   
                     Lactantius
                     ,
                  
                   which
                   though
                   plausible
                   at
                   the
                   first
                   view
                   (
                   being
                   most
                   part
                   Scripture
                   phrase
                   )
                   yet
                   may
                   here
                   and
                   there
                   I
                   grant
                   ,
                   if
                   minutely
                   
                   examined
                   ,
                   be
                   justly
                   liable
                   to
                   exception
                   ,
                   as
                   bordering
                   neere
                   upon
                   the
                   
                     Heresy
                  
                   of
                   
                     Cerinibus
                     ,
                  
                   
                   and
                   the
                   old
                   condemned
                   
                     Millmarians
                     ,
                  
                   except
                   we
                   yeeld
                   them
                   spoken
                   (
                   as
                   Saint
                   
                     Paul
                  
                   speakes
                   in
                   another
                   case
                   )
                   
                     after
                     the
                     manner
                     of
                     men
                     .
                  
                   Howbeit
                   the
                   Authour
                   may
                   be
                   excused
                   ,
                   he
                   having
                   only
                   amplified
                   that
                   in
                   transcendent
                   expressions
                   and
                   flourishing
                   streames
                   ,
                   which
                   many-many
                   Lights
                   of
                   the
                   East
                   and
                   West-Churches
                   delivered
                   in
                   downeright
                   termes
                   .
                   But
                   why
                   doe
                   I
                   single
                   out
                   one
                   
                     Lactantius
                     ,
                  
                   or
                   insist
                   thus
                   on
                   his
                   
                     Rhetorique●
                     Papias
                  
                   a
                   Bishop
                   ,
                   and
                   Saint
                   
                     Iohns
                  
                   Scholar
                   ,
                   
                     Irenaeus
                  
                   and
                   
                     Iustine
                     ,
                  
                   stiled
                   the
                   
                     Martyr
                     ,
                  
                   both
                   which
                   lived
                   in
                   the
                   next
                   age
                   to
                   the
                   Apostles
                   ,
                   
                     Tertullian
                  
                   also
                   and
                   
                     Hilarius
                     ,
                  
                   men
                   of
                   admirable
                   endowments
                   ,
                   yea
                   ,
                   I
                   had
                   almost
                   said
                   ,
                   and
                   in
                   part
                   blessed
                   
                     Augustine
                  
                   himselfe
                   and
                   his
                   contemporary
                   Saint
                   
                     *
                  
                   
                     Hierome
                     ,
                  
                   (
                   all
                   which
                   were
                   stars
                   of
                   the
                   first
                   magnitude
                   in
                   the
                   firmament
                   of
                   the
                   
                     Primitive
                     Church
                  
                   )
                   most
                   willingly
                   have
                   afforded
                   their
                   
                     places
                  
                   and
                   suffrages
                   to
                   this
                   comfortable
                   Doctrine
                   ,
                   I
                   meane
                   for
                   the
                   maine
                   of
                   it
                   .
                   
                     After
                     a
                     good
                     pause
                     the
                     same
                     Author
                     proceeds
                     thus
                     .
                  
                   Lastly
                   ,
                   In
                   what
                   yeare
                   this
                   new
                   world
                   shall
                   begin
                   ,
                   wherein
                   holy
                   men
                   and
                   women
                   shall
                   rejoyce
                   and
                   live
                   together
                   in
                   a
                   most
                   blessed
                   and
                   heavenly
                   manner
                   ,
                   is
                   one
                   of
                   the
                   great
                   secrets
                   of
                   Heaven
                   ,
                   all
                   which
                   are
                   unknowne
                   to
                   us
                   mortals
                   (
                   Alas
                   !
                   our
                   dimme
                   eyes
                   ,
                   the
                   
                     Caleb
                  
                   and
                   
                     Ioshua
                     ,
                  
                   fellow
                   spies
                   in
                   this
                   Isle
                   of
                   man
                   ,
                   cannot
                   pierce
                   those
                   tenfold
                   Orbes
                   of
                   Heaven
                   .
                   )
                
                 
                   Indeed
                   so
                   many
                   men
                   so
                   many
                   mindes
                   :
                   One
                   Author
                   assignes
                   this
                   yeare
                   ,
                   another
                   that
                   ,
                   a
                   third
                   differs
                   in
                   his
                   account
                   from
                   both
                   .
                   But
                   it
                   is
                   agreed
                   on
                   all
                   hands
                   that
                   this
                   thrice
                   happy
                   and
                   golden
                   age
                   is
                   now
                   at
                   hand
                   .
                   
                     Alstedius
                  
                   the
                   Champion
                   of
                   the
                   late
                   
                     Millenarians
                     ,
                     and
                     a
                     maine
                     prop
                     of
                     this
                     new
                     revised
                     Doctrine
                     ,
                  
                   names
                   and
                   confidently
                   determines
                   the
                   yeare
                   of
                   
                     Christ
                  
                   1694.
                   (
                   being
                   52
                   yeares
                   hence
                   )
                   for
                   the
                   first
                   yeare
                   of
                   this
                   triumphant
                   Reigne
                   of
                   the
                   Saints
                   here
                   on
                   earth
                   .
                   Others
                   judge
                   the
                   time
                   uncertaine
                   ,
                   and
                   certainly
                   their
                   judgment
                   (
                   in
                   my
                   judgement
                   )
                   is
                   most
                   certaine
                   .
                   I
                   will
                   turne
                   my
                   private
                   opinion
                   into
                   a
                   prayer
                   ,
                   O
                   that
                   the
                   
                     Almighty
                  
                   would
                   hasten
                   ,
                   I
                   againe
                   and
                   againe
                   I
                   wish
                   it
                   ,
                   this
                   glorious
                   Kingdome
                   ,
                   that
                   so
                   it
                   may
                   come
                   in
                   our
                   times
                   before
                   we
                   be
                   lodged
                   in
                   the
                   silent
                   grave
                   ,
                   and
                   moulder
                   into
                   our
                   principles
                   ,
                   dust
                   and
                   ashes
                   .
                   And
                   now
                   I
                   will
                   seale
                   this
                   delightfull
                   contemplation
                   with
                   the
                   words
                   of
                   Saint
                   
                     Iohn
                  
                   surnamed
                   the
                   
                     Divine
                  
                   ;
                   or
                   rather
                   
                   not
                   of
                   the
                   P●●man
                   ,
                   but
                   of
                   the
                   thrice
                   blessed
                   Spirit
                   which
                   guided
                   his
                   pen
                   ,
                   
                     Rev.
                  
                   20.6
                   .
                   
                     Blessed
                     is
                     he
                     that
                     hath
                     his
                     part
                     in
                     the
                     first
                     Resurrection
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Sweet
                     Jesus
                     ,
                     grant
                     a
                     part
                     in
                     the
                     first
                     Resurrection
                     ,
                     to
                     Thy
                     servant
                     and
                     Sonne
                     of
                     thine
                     Handymayd
                     ,
                     
                       T.
                       B.
                       
                    
                  
                
                 
                   
                     I
                     wholly
                     submit
                     my selfe
                     and
                     opinion
                     to
                     the
                     determination
                     of
                     our
                     long
                     expected
                     Venerable
                     Synod
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                       Its
                       Auctori●●e
                       in
                       libello
                       Docto
                       ,
                       Iupiter
                       ,
                       &
                       laborioso
                       !
                    
                  
                
              
            
          
        
         
           
             There
             is
             extant
             also
             in
             Print
             this
             last
             yeare
             a
             Treatise
             of
             one
             Master
          
           John
           Archer
           ,
           
             sometimes
             Preacher
             of
          
           All-hallows
           
             in
          
           Lombardstreet
           ,
           
             Intituled
             ,
          
           The
           Personall
           Reigne
           of
           Christ
           upon
           Earth
           .
           
             The
             Author
             ,
             as
             I
             ●eare
             ,
             is
             with
             God
             ,
             but
             his
             Booke
             thou
             maist
             have
             on
             every
             stall
             .
          
           But
           so
           farre
           out
           of
           some
           of
           
             our
             English
             Divines
             .
             Let
             us
             now
             heare
             the
             Incomparable
          
           Tycho
           Brahe
           .
        
         
           
             
               
                 
                   Tycho
                   Brahe
                   :
                   
                     {non-Roman}
                     {non-Roman}
                     {non-Roman}
                     {non-Roman}
                     {non-Roman}
                  
                   ,
                   His
                   Testimony
                   taken
                   out
                   of
                   his
                   first
                   
                     Tome
                  
                   Astronomicorum
                   Progymnasmatum
                   not
                   farre
                   from
                   the
                   end
                   .
                
                 
                   IT
                   is
                   worthy
                   our
                   best
                   observation
                   ,
                   
                   that
                   as
                   all
                   the
                   former
                   uneven
                   
                     Revolutions
                  
                   of
                   the
                   
                     Fiery
                     Trigon
                     ,
                  
                   (
                   namely
                   the
                   first
                   ,
                   third
                   ,
                   and
                   fifth
                   )
                   have
                   ever
                   beene
                   auspicious
                   to
                   the
                   world
                   ,
                   as
                   having
                   ushered
                   in
                   some
                   great
                   and
                   singular
                   favours
                   of
                   the
                   Almighty
                   to
                   mankind
                   :
                   so
                   it
                   is
                   probable
                   that
                   this
                   seventh
                   
                     Revolution
                  
                   which
                   now
                   Reignes
                   ever
                   since
                   the
                   yeare
                   of
                   our
                   Lord
                   1603.
                   is
                   the
                   forerunner
                   of
                   a
                   more
                   happy
                   and
                   glorious
                   state
                   then
                   all
                   the
                   afore
                   p●ssed
                   ages
                   have
                   eve●
                   yet
                   enjoyed
                   .
                   Neither
                   doth
                   this
                   disagree
                   with
                   the
                   most
                   ancien●
                   prophecies
                   of
                   the
                   wisest
                   men
                   ,
                   and
                   enlightned
                   by
                   the
                   Holy
                   Ghost
                   ,
                   who
                   have
                   foretold
                   that
                   before
                   the
                   generall
                   conflagration
                   of
                   all
                   things
                   ,
                   that
                   there
                   shall
                   be
                   a
                   certaine
                   quiet
                   and
                   peaceable
                   age
                   for
                   some
                   good
                   space
                   of
                   time
                   upon
                   Earth
                   ,
                   wherein
                   the
                   tumults
                   and
                   
                   confusions
                   happening
                   〈◊〉
                   politique
                   States
                   ,
                   and
                   by
                   reason
                   of
                   varieties
                   of
                   Religions
                   shall
                   be
                   setled
                   and
                   appeased
                   ,
                   and
                   at
                   length
                   be
                   made
                   more
                   conformable
                   to
                   the
                   Divine
                   Will
                   ,
                   
                   and
                   pleasure
                   .
                   
                     
                       Which
                       we
                       may
                       also
                       not
                       abscurely
                       collect
                       from
                       the
                       Prophets
                       themselves
                       ,
                       who
                       foretold
                       that
                       some
                       golden
                       age
                       should
                       be
                       for
                       a
                       time
                       on
                       Earth
                       ,
                       in
                       which
                       men
                    
                     should
                     beate
                     their
                     swords
                     into
                     Plough-shares
                     ,
                     and
                     their
                     Speares
                     into
                     pruning-hookes
                     :
                     neither
                     should
                     Nation
                     lift
                     up
                     a
                     sword
                     against
                     Nation
                     ,
                     nor
                     learn●
                     warre
                     any
                     more
                     :
                     But
                     they
                     shall
                     sit
                     every
                     man
                     under
                     his
                     Vine
                     ,
                     and
                     ●nder
                     his
                     Figure●
                     ,
                     and
                     none
                     shall
                     make
                     them
                     afraid
                     ,
                     
                       as
                    
                     Micah
                     
                       the
                       Prophet
                       hath
                       it
                       ,
                    
                     ch.
                     
                       4.
                       and
                    
                     Esay
                     ch.
                     
                       II.
                       prophecyeth
                       of
                       the
                       same
                       in
                       this
                       manner
                       :
                    
                     The
                     Wolfe
                     shall
                     dwell
                     with
                     the
                     Lambe
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     Leopard
                     shall
                     lie
                     downe
                     with
                     the
                     Kid
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     Galfe
                     and
                     the
                     young
                     Lion
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     ●atling
                     together
                     ,
                     and
                     a
                     little
                     childe
                     shall
                     leade
                     them
                     .
                     And
                     the
                     Co●
                     and
                     the
                     Beare
                     shall
                     feed
                     ,
                     their
                     young
                     ones
                     shall
                     lie
                     downe
                     together
                     :
                     and
                     the
                     Lyon
                     shall
                     eate
                     straw
                     like
                     the
                     Oxe
                     .
                     And
                     the
                     sucking
                     childe
                     shall
                     play
                     on
                     the
                     hole
                     of
                     the
                     Aspe
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     weaned
                     childe
                     shall
                     put
                     his
                     hand
                     on
                     the
                     Cockatricuden
                     .
                     They
                     shall
                     not
                     hurt
                     in
                     all
                     my
                     holy
                     Mountaine
                     :
                     For
                     the
                     earth
                     shall
                     be
                     full
                     of
                     the
                     knowledge
                     of
                     the
                     Lord
                     ,
                     as
                     the
                     waters
                     cover
                     the
                     Sea
                     .
                  
                   And
                   that
                   passage
                   also
                   ,
                   
                     Esay
                  
                   60.
                   is
                   to
                   be
                   referred
                   to
                   the
                   
                     Mysticall
                     Hierusalem
                     ,
                  
                   or
                   more
                   perfect
                   state
                   of
                   Christianity
                   then
                   hath
                   beene
                   hitherto
                   .
                   
                     For
                     Brasse
                     I
                     will
                     bring
                     gold
                     ,
                     and
                     for
                     Iron
                     I
                     will
                     bring
                     Silver
                     ,
                     and
                     for-Wood
                     Brasse
                     ,
                     and
                     for
                     Stones
                     Iron
                     :
                     I
                     will
                     also
                     make
                     thy
                     Officers
                     ,
                     peace
                     ,
                     and
                     thy
                     exactors
                     righteousnesse
                     :
                     Violence
                     shall
                     no
                     more
                     be
                     heard
                     in
                     thy
                     Land
                     ,
                     wasting
                     nor
                     destruction
                     within
                     thy
                     borders
                     ;
                     but
                     thou
                     shalt
                     call
                     thy
                     wals
                     salvation
                     ,
                     and
                     thy
                     gates
                     praise
                     .
                  
                   And
                   what
                   goes
                   before
                   and
                   followes
                   ;
                   where
                   at
                   length
                   lie
                   thus
                   concludes
                   :
                   
                     I
                     the
                     Lord
                     will
                     hasten
                     it
                     in
                     his
                     time
                     .
                  
                   More
                   places
                   are
                   likewise
                   to
                   be
                   found
                   as
                   well
                   in
                   the
                   Prophets
                   ,
                   as
                   in
                   the
                   
                     *
                  
                   
                     Revelation
                     ,
                  
                   promising
                   an
                   unusuall
                   and
                   unexpected
                   happynesse
                   of
                   earthly
                   things
                   ,
                   such
                   as
                   never
                   hath
                   beene
                   in
                   any
                   age
                   of
                   the
                   world
                   hitherto
                   .
                   The
                   truth
                   therefore
                   of
                   this
                   Prophecy
                   shall
                   be
                   fulfilled
                   before
                   the
                   generall
                   destruction
                   of
                   all
                   things
                   ,
                   (
                   for
                   it
                   cannot
                   faile
                   ,
                   proceeding
                   wholly
                   from
                   the
                   infallible
                   Spirit
                   of
                   God
                   )
                   and
                   it
                   is
                   probable
                   that
                   the
                   accomplishment
                   thereof
                   is
                   at
                   hand
                   .
                   Why
                   then
                   may
                   not
                   all
                   these
                   things
                   obtaine
                   an
                   expected
                   event
                   within
                   the
                   compasse
                   of
                   this
                   renewed
                   Revolution
                   of
                   the
                   fiery
                   
                     Trigon
                     ,
                  
                   and
                   of
                   the
                   other
                   three
                   ensuing
                   ,
                   which
                   compleate
                   800.
                   yeares
                   ?
                   
                     Hactenus
                  
                   Atlas
                   
                     ille
                     Coeli
                     Mathematici
                     .
                  
                
              
            
          
        
         
           
             
               
               
                 
                   The
                   Testimony
                   of
                   
                     Carolus
                     Gallus
                  
                   ;
                   out
                   of
                   
                     Dr
                     Hakewill
                     ,
                  
                   in
                   his
                   Advertisement
                   to
                   
                     pag.
                  
                   476.
                   for
                   I
                   have
                   not
                   the
                   Booke
                   by
                   me
                   .
                
                 
                   A
                   Booke
                   written
                   by
                   
                     Carolus
                     Gallus
                  
                   a
                   Professour
                   of
                   Divinity
                   in
                   the
                   University
                   of
                   
                     Leyden
                     ,
                  
                   published
                   in
                   the
                   yeare
                   1592
                   ▪
                   and
                   intituled
                   
                     Clavis
                     prophetica
                     nova
                     Apocalypseos
                     Iohannis
                     Apostoli
                     &
                     Evangeliographi
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     In
                     his
                     Epistle
                     Dedicatory
                     to
                     the
                     Prince
                     of
                  
                   Orenge
                   ,
                   
                     and
                     the
                     States
                     of
                     the
                  
                   Netherlands
                   ,
                   
                     he
                     professeth
                     it
                     was
                     a
                     worke
                     ,
                  
                   
                     In
                     quo
                     
                       (
                       saith
                       he
                       )
                    
                     jam
                     inde
                     a
                     viginti
                     quinque
                     annis
                     ,
                     &c.
                     
                       that
                       is
                    
                     In
                     which
                     for
                     these
                     
                       XXV
                       .
                    
                     yeares
                     ,
                     I
                     have
                     very
                     much
                     laboured
                     ,
                     by
                     reading
                     ,
                     meditating
                     ,
                     searching
                     ,
                     writing
                     ,
                     disputing
                     ,
                     and
                     publiquely
                     teaching
                     both
                     in
                     Churches
                     and
                     Schooles
                     ,
                     seeking
                     out
                     and
                     letting
                     slip
                     nothing
                     ,
                     which
                     seemed
                     to
                     concerne
                     the
                     finding
                     out
                     of
                     this
                     Divine
                     Treasure
                     .
                  
                   Now
                   this
                   man
                   after
                   all
                   this
                   travell
                   ,
                   search
                   ,
                   and
                   study
                   ,
                   thus
                   concludes
                   his
                   eight
                   Observation
                   upon
                   the
                   20.
                   
                   
                     Chapter
                  
                   of
                   that
                   Booke
                   .
                   
                     Breviter
                     spiritus
                     propheticus
                     in
                     hac
                     Iohannis
                     Apocalypsi
                     ,
                     &c.
                     
                       that
                       is
                       ,
                    
                     Briefely
                     ,
                     the
                     Spirit
                     in
                     this
                     
                       Revelation
                    
                     of
                     
                       John
                    
                     Prophecyeth
                     concerning
                     the
                     particular
                     and
                     wonderfull
                     Resurrection
                     ,
                     renovation
                     ,
                     and
                     restitution
                     of
                     the
                     Church
                     ,
                     that
                     it
                     ,
                     in
                     this
                     last
                     Age
                     ,
                     shall
                     appeare
                     made
                     one
                     of
                     
                       Jewes
                    
                     and
                     
                       Gentiles
                       ,
                    
                     both
                     living
                     and
                     dead
                     ,
                     and
                     more
                     gloriously
                     then
                     ever
                     heretofore
                     ,
                     in
                     a
                     wonderfull
                     manner
                     shall
                     live
                     againe
                     from
                     the
                     dead
                     ,
                     or
                     first
                     death
                     ,
                     and
                     shall
                     be
                     renewed
                     ,
                     restored
                     ,
                     and
                     flourish
                     againe
                     .
                  
                
              
            
          
        
      
       
       
         
           
             I
             THESS
             .
             IV.
             
               Commate
            
             16.
             
          
           
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             THE
             DEAD
             IN
             CHRIST
             [
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ,
             
               for
               Christ
               ,
            
             that
             is
             ,
             
               The
               Martyrs
            
             ]
             SHALL
             RISE
             FIRST
             .
          
        
         
           THe
           interpretation
           will
           not
           seeme
           strange
           to
           any
           one
           who
           knowes
           ,
           that
           the
           same
           
             Paul
             ,
          
           who
           in
           his
           owne
           words
           ,
           is
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           ,
           
             Ephe.
          
           4.1
           .
           was
           a
           prisoner
           ,
           on
           bound
           for
           the
           Lords
           sake
           ,
           the
           
             preposition
             ,
          
           as
           fea●he●
           men
           know
           ,
           sometimes
           signifying
           the
           cause
           
             propter
             q●●●
          
           ▪
           That
           place
           also
           
             Rev.
          
           14.13
           .
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           ,
           
             They
             that
             dye
             in
             the
             Lord
             ,
          
           is
           no
           otherwise
           interpreted
           by
           some
           Learned
           men
           ;
           for
           the
           whole
           
             pericope
          
           or
           passage
           there
           seemes
           plainely
           to
           point
           at
           the
           
             Martyrs
             ,
          
           who
           
             verse
          
           4.
           are
           more
           elegantly
           called
           
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
             {non-Roman}
          
           
             The
             first
             fruites
             unto
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Lambe
             ,
          
           as
           purchased
           by
           a
           particular
           prerogative
           
             from
             among
             men
             .
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A25221e-300
           
             
               Io.
               Bodimus
               method
               Hist.
               cap.
            
             7
             
          
           
             Epist.
             ad
             Paulinum
             
               Quot
               babet
               verb●
               ,
               t●●
               Sacram●nt●
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               D●●tate
               exuperant
               latae
               contra
               ingra●os
               leges
               .
            
             Amm.
             Marcell
             .
             lib.
             23.
             
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
             Themi●t
             .
             Orat.
             3.
             
          
           
             *
             Xenophon
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ,
             ●
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A25221e-850
           
             
               Cic.
               Academ.
               Qu●st
               .
               l.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             Acts
             xvii
             .
             ●●
             .
             19
             .
          
           
             
               L●ers
               .
               de
               libr●s
               He●selit●
            
             Anthol
             .
             lib.
             g●●p
             .
             33.
             
          
           
             *
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             O
             〈…〉
             dict●
             .
             vide
             .
             Ep●cterum
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
             2
             Tim.
             4.3
             .
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
             2
             Tim.
             1
             .
             1●
             .
          
           
             *
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             
               Marc.
               Antontum
            
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             
               lib.
            
             6.5.10
             .
          
           
             a
             
               Contra
               Matcion
               .
            
          
           
             b
             
               Tract
               at
               contra
               omnes
               haereses
               .
            
          
           
             c
             Dialog
             .
             cum
             
               Tryphone
               Iudaeo
               .
            
          
           
             d
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ,
             &c.
             
               Iustine
               .
               ●
               .
               ●
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ,
             
               cap.
            
             65.
             
               vers.
            
             17.
             
          
           
             e
             
               Augustin
               .
               de
               Haeresib
               .
               cap.
            
             8.
             
          
           
             f
             
               Epiphanius
               de
               Heresib
               .
            
          
           
             g
             
               Irenaeus
               .
               Tertullianus
               .
            
          
           
             h
             Dialog.
             cum
             
               Trypbone
               .
            
          
           
             i
             
               Hieron.
               in
               Hierem.
               cap.
            
             19.
             
               v.
            
             10.
             
          
           
             k
             
               Quae
               licet
               non
               sequamur
               ,
               damnare
               non
               possu●●u
               :
               unulquisque
               in
               suo
               sensu
               abundee
               .
            
             Hieron.
             
               d.
               l.
               
            
          
           
             l
             
               Malens
               aliena
               verecu●de
               discere
               ,
               quam
               sua
               impudenter
               ingerere
               .
            
             Hieron.
             
               de
               Platone
            
             Epist.
             ad
             Paulinam
             .
          
           
             m
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
             
               Anton.
               lib.
            
             xi
             .
             §
             6.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A25221e-2670
           
             Lib.
             
               4
            
             cap.
             
               43
               Omnis
               Prophetia
               priusquaro
               impleatur
               aenigm●
               est
               .
               Quanda
               impleto
               fuerit
               ,
               manifestam
               habet
               expositionem
               &
               intelligentiam
               .
            
          
        
         
           Notes for div A25221e-3170
           
             *
             
               A●●t●d
            
             follows
             that
             Greek
             Copy
             which
             admits
             〈◊〉
             the
             preposicion
             ,
             oth●rwise
             th●n
             our
             
               English
            
             renders
             it
             .
             
               Eccles.
               Histor.
               lib.
            
             3
             
               cap.
            
             16
             
          
           
             *
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
          
           
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             
               Vide
               Io●a●em
               Buxlorf
               in
            
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
          
           
             
               Object
               .
            
          
           
             
               Sol.
               
            
          
           
             
               Heurnius
               .
               Keplerus
               .
            
          
           
             
               Ioan.
               Feru●
            
             explicat
             .
             in
             Gen.
             c.
             21
             ,
             27
             ,
             &
             38.
             
             Seraphin
             .
             Firmian
             Enarrat
             .
             Apocal
             cap.
             14.
             
             Remalc
             de
             .
             Vaulx
             .
             in
             Harpocrate
             Divino
             ,
             fol.
             339
             Martin
             Cellar
             .
             Tractat.
             de
             Operib
             .
             Dei
             Coel.
             Secund.
             Curio
             de
             Amplitud
             .
             Beati
             Regni
             Dei
             ,
             lib.
             1.
             Petr.
             Cunaeus
             lib
             1.
             de
             Repub.
             Iudzor
             .
             18.
             
             Iust.
             Heurnius
             de
             Legat
             Evangelica
             ad
             Indos
             c
             4.
             
             Ioan
             Dobrieius
             in
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             seu
             
               Interprete
               Temparum
               ,
            
             Christoph
             .
             Besold
             .
             in
             Pentade
             .
             Et
             omnes
             Theol.
             v●teres
             &
             recentes
             super
             11.
             cap.
             Epist.
             ad
             Romanos
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A25221e-8220
           
             *
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ▪
             yet
             some
             copies
             have
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ,
             
               he
               bound
               him
               .
            
             I
             cannot
             tell
             whether
             as
             properly
             ,
             by
             reason
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             followeth
             .
          
           
             *
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
             But
             some
             Copies
             have
             the
             simple
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             foregoing
             verse
             .
          
           
             *
             For
             the
             article
             ●●
             ,
             being
             doubled
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             pressed
             more
             ,
             then
             we
             see
             it
             is
             in
             our
             English
             Translation
             .
          
           
             *
             Read
             2
             King
             17.22
             .
             2
             King.
             4.35
             ▪
             2
             King.
             13.21
             .
             Matth.
             9.25
             .
             Luk.
             7
             .
             1●
             ,
             Iohn
             11.44
             .
             Matth
             27.52.28.6
             .
             Act.
             9.41
             .
             ●0
             .
             9
             .
          
           
             Exek
             .
             3●
             and
             39.
             
          
           
             
               Object
               .
            
          
           
             
               Sol.
               
            
          
           
             *
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
          
           
             Phil
             4.3
             .
             Revel.
             3
             5
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A25221e-12940
           
             Ezek.
             38.
             and
             39.
             ch.
          
        
         
           Notes for div A25221e-14010
           
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A25221e-14450
           
             *
             ERAT
             ,
             saith
             
               Alsted
               .
            
             The
             Originall
             wa●rs
             the
             verbe
             set
             down
             .
             But
             our
             
               English
            
             useth
             the
             present
             
               are
               .
            
             The
             
               Vulgar
               edition
            
             is
             most
             dissonant
             from
             the
             
               Greek
               ,
               —
               in
               stagnum
               Ignis
               &
               sulphuris
               ,
               ubi
               &
               bestia
               &
               pseudoprop●e●a
               cruciabuntu●
               di●
               a●
               nocte
               .
            
             The
             
               Author
            
             thereof
             qui●e
             mispl●ced
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             the
             Copulative
             before
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ,
             putting
             it
             before
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             collectively
             ,
             omitting
             also
             the
             interpun●●ion
             after
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
             Notwithstanding
             he
             is
             followed
             by
             the
             
               Geneva
            
             Translators
             .
             
               Rob.
               Steph●n
               .
               Vbi
               ERAT
               &
            
             bestia
             ,
             &
             ille
             Pseudopropheta
             :
             &
             cruciab
             .
             The
             
               Orientall
            
             ▪
             Translation
             ,
             both
             
               Arabique
               ,
            
             and
             
               Syriaque
               ,
            
             〈◊〉
             not
             from
             the
             received
             
               Greek
            
             ;
             The
             latter
             of
             which
             ,
             in
             this
             〈◊〉
             and
             some
             other
             places
             of
             the
             
               ●
               .
               T.
            
             we
             owe
             to
             an
             old
             copy
             in
             the
             Library
             of
             that
             〈…〉
             of
             all
             Learning
             and
             Piety
             ,
             D●Vsher
             
               ,
            
             and
             to
             the
             exact
             pains
             of
             M●
             〈…〉
             of
             the
             
               Arabique
            
             in
             
               Oxford
               ,
            
             who
             from
             thence
             supplied
             the
             former
             defects
             in
             this
             Transl●●ion
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Al●●eds
            
             word
             is
             
               Battalogus
               ,
            
             from
             the
             verb
             used
             by
             Christ
             ,
             
               Mat.
            
             6.7
             .
             Of
             the
             various
             interpretations
             therof
             ,
             see
             the
             most
             learned
             
               Fuller
               .
               Miscell
               Sa●ror
               .
            
             Lib.
             2.
             cap.
             16.
             
          
           
             This
             is
             called
             
               receptior
               sententia
               ,
            
             by
             Dr.
             
               Prideaux
               .
               in
               Orat.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             Psal.
             90.4
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A25221e-15960
           
             A
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             
               paries
               .
            
             The
             Participle
             of
             the
             Verb
             in
             this
             place
             is
             also
             used
             
               Isai
            
             22
             5.
             
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             
               Dellruens
               parietem
               .
            
          
           
             
               De
               Legatione
               Evangelic●
               ad
               Indes
               .
               fol.
            
             144.
             
          
           
             
               Fol.
            
             175.
             
          
           
             Heurn
             .
             de
             legit
             .
             Evang
             fol.
             157
             &
             Seqq.
             ●●●m
             ●ol
             .
             165.
             
          
           
             *
             
               Hyd●nutum
               in
               Apuliaiurat
               caesis
               millib
               .
               Christian●
               〈◊〉
               .
            
          
           
             a
             
               Belgrade
            
             taken
             by
             
               Soly●an
               ,
            
             A.
             1522.
             
             It
             is
             plac●d
             by
             
               Plinie
            
             in
             the
             utmost
             bounds
             of
             
               Pannonia
               .
            
             So
             called
             in
             the
             declining
             time
             of
             the
             Easterne
             Empire
             .
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             
               Constantino
               Porphyrogen
               de
               Administr
               .
               Imp.
               〈◊〉
               .
            
             40.
             
             Of
             late
             also
             called
             
               AlbaGraec●
               ,
            
             but
             most
             anciently
             
               Taur●num
               ,
            
             as
             appears
             by
             old
             Coins
             found
             there
             ,
             mentioned
             by
             
               Busboquius
               ,
               Ep.
            
             1
             
               Leg.
               Turcicae
               .
            
             In
             
               Antoninus
            
             the
             name
             is
             corrupted
             in
             some
             Copies
             to
             
               Au●inum
               ,
            
             in
             others
             ,
             
               Taurinum
            
             ;
             as
             it
             is
             likewise
             in
             
               Ptolomie
               ,
            
             where
             you
             have
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ,
             for
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
             Plurima
             antem
             apud
             
               Ptolemeum
            
             corrupta
             Urbium
             nostrarum
             nomina
             ,
             ●em
             apud
             〈◊〉
             ,
             in
             Xrquae
             ad
             Britanniam
             pertinent
             Itineribus
             foede
             lux●●a
             loca
             ,
             atque
             pessimè
             à
             libr●lis
             habita
             ,
             restituta
             ,
             &
             nostris
             Annotationibus
             explicata
             ,
             publico
             ,
             jamdudum
             exhibuif●emus
             ,
             nisi
             dulciffimae
             patriae
             intesti●ae
             tu●bae
             paratam
             editionem
             praevortissent
             .
             Deus
             malum
             ,
             quod
             immi●e●
             averruncet
             .
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
          
           
             b
             
               Rhodes
            
             also
             taken
             by
             〈◊〉
             ,
             An.
             1525
             ,
             cum
             400
             t●i●emibus
             ,
             &
             200000
             hominum
             .
          
           
             *
             Renascentibus
             bonis
             literis
             Religionis
             eti●m
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             contigle
             M.D.XVII
             .
             
               Lather●
            
             per
             G●rmaniam
             
               Leo●i●●
            
             Indulgenti●s
             impugnante
             .
          
           
             
               Conradus
               Graserus
               .
            
          
           
             *
             Matth.
             14.21
             .
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             Mar.
             13
             19
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
          
           
             *
             Some
             refer
             this
             to
             the
             Statue
             of
             
               Adrian
            
             the
             Emperour
             placed
             in
             the
             
               Temple
               ,
            
             and
             ●●ken
             away
             from
             the
             〈◊〉
             by
             those
             Iews
             who
             escaped
             from
             the
             destruction
             of
             the
             City
             by
             〈◊〉
             .
             See
             
               S●idas
            
             in
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             a
             1359
             Quo
             ●e●pore
             incipient
             pii
             contradicere
             impierati
             Antichristianae
             quae
             t●
             ▪
             ad
             tempus
             a
             liqued
             perdurabis
             ,
             verùm
             ita
             ,
             ut
             semper
             ●int●uturi
             pii
             ,
             qui
             se
             oppon●n●
             voce
             ,
             scriptis
             ,
             martyri●
             Et
             sane
             usque
             ab
             hoc
             anno
             ad
             hanc
             〈…〉
             ,
             &
             〈…〉
             Nam
             circa
             An
             1359.
             
             
               Pet●archa
            
             qui
             obiit
             1374
             
               Taulerus
            
             qui
             ob
             .
             13●9
             .
             
               Wi●●●fus
            
             qui
             ob
             .
             1387.
             caeperunt
             in
             os
             contradicere
             Antichristo
             Romano
             .
             
               Alsted
               .
               Cl●●nol
               .
               Tit.
            
             12.
             
             Sect
             ▪
             
          
           
             b
             Su●duc
             annos
             mille
             ,
             relinquitur
             A.
             Ch.
             1694
             Epocha
             millenarii
             Apocalyptic●
             〈◊〉
             
               A●●●●d
               .
            
          
           
             c
             Perhaps
             the
             number
             is
             false
             printed
             .
             In
             the
             edit
             ▪
             1637.
             (
             which
             I
             use
             )
             it
             is
             〈◊〉
             1●6
             .
          
           
             *
             This
             word
             
               T●raphim
               ,
            
             observe
             ●it
             by
             the
             way
             for
             them
             ,
             who
             meeting
             with
             it
             in
             this
             ,
             and
             other
             places
             ,
             know
             not
             what
             so
             make
             of
             〈◊〉
             which
             by
             the
             〈…〉
             ,
             they
             here
             〈…〉
             Theod
             〈…〉
             by
             the
             same
             〈…〉
             which
             they
             expresse
             〈…〉
             the
             high
             Priest
             ▪
             had
             in
             〈…〉
             of
             Iudgement
             .
             〈…〉
             of
             what
             was
             to
             come
             .
             
               Moses
            
             blessing
             the
             Holy
             tribe
             〈…〉
             Syris
             .
             
               cap.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             Theodor
             .
             in
             locum
             .
             
               Hac
               quidem
            
             Zo●●
             〈◊〉
             I
             
               attributerunt
               ●i
               〈…〉
               .
               Propheti●
               autem
               ae●e●norum
               bo●●rum
               continet
               promis●●onem
               ,
               &
               omn●●
               gentes
               cognitur●n
               〈…〉
               .
            
          
           
             *
             So
             
               Symmachus
            
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
             But
             
               Aquila
            
             &
             
               Theodo●
               .
               
                 {non-Roman}
                 {non-Roman}
                 {non-Roman}
                 {non-Roman}
                 {non-Roman}
              
               a
               chosen
               Language
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             
               Sym.
               
            
          
           
             
               Mat.
            
             17.11
             .
             As
             well
             the
             old
             Iewish
             Church
             ,
             as
             the
             Christian
             ,
             beleeved
             that
             
               Elias
            
             should
             be
             the
             fore●unner
             of
             the
             Day
             of
             Iudgement
             as
             appears
             by
             
               Tertull.
               de
               〈◊〉
               .
               cap.
            
             2●
             .
             As
             
               Iohn
            
             was
             fore●unne●
             of
             Christs
             ●irst
             coming
             ,
             so
             
               Elias
            
             of
             his
             last
             .
             The
             Iews
             talk
             idlely
             of
             restoring
             his
             soul
             to
             his
             body
             .
             What
             need
             that
             ,
             seeing
             he
             was
             taken
             up
             into
             Heaven
             with
             both
             ?
             Therefore
             
               Tertullian
               〈◊〉
               Anima
               ,
               cap.
            
             35.
             saith
             
               Elias
            
             shall
             come
             ,
             
               〈…〉
               ,
               de
               quo
               non
               est
               exemptus
               ,
               sed
               mundo
               reddendum
               ,
               de
               quo
               est
               translatus
               .
            
             Quod
             ut
             ver●
             〈◊〉
             divinitus
             dictum
             ;
             saith
             the
             learned
             
               Ios.
               Scaliger
               .
            
          
           
             *
             De
             considerat
             .
             Evangel
             lib.
             1
             cap
             21.
             
             
               Theodoret
            
             in
             his
             own
             language
             (
             not
             yet
             printed
             )
             out
             of
             the
             
               M.
            
             of
             the
             publike
             Lib●ary
             in
             
               Oxford
            
             is
             this
             :
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
             Paulo
             post
             .
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
             Where
             by
             the
             way
             take
             na●ion
             ,
             That
             in
             this
             
               Ma.
               s.
            
             the
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             :
             Hosea
             ,
             Hab
             〈◊〉
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             
               Mit●●
               ,
            
             are
             
               Theo
               〈◊〉
               :
            
             the
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             upon
             the
             other
             vii
             are
             
               Theodoret
               .
            
             When
             at
             the
             printed
             La●ine
             of
             
               〈◊〉
               Gillius
            
             (
             whose
             Translation
             
               Alsled
            
             made
             use
             of
             )
             they
             all
             go
             under
             
               Theodorets
            
             name
             .
             And
             yet
             which
             I
             wonder
             at
             )
             the
             Inscription
             of
             the
             Gr
             Copy
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             book
             is
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             I
             owe
             the
             Transcription
             to
             my
             learned
             and
             worthy
             friend
             〈◊〉
             
               Henry
               〈◊〉
            
             of
             
               Oxford
               .
            
          
           
             See
             D'
             
               Frideaux
               ,
               Orat.
               de
               Vocations
               Iudeorum
               .
            
             Sect.
             6.
             concerning
             this
             place
             .
          
           
             *
             Reade
             ,
             were
             hardned
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             Out
             
               English
            
             Interpreters
             as
             well
             as
             others
             ,
             confound
             these
             verbs
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             and
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ●ut
             none
             of
             the
             ancients
             ,
             exci●●Su●●●
             (
             whose
             authority
             ,
             as
             learned
             men
             know
             ,
             in
             many
             things
             is
             to
             be
             suspected
             )
             use
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             for
             〈◊〉
             .
             See
             〈◊〉
             ●
             .
             4
             .
             
               Rom.
            
             117.
             
          
           
             *
             Either
             
               Alsled
            
             forgot
             him●self
             ,
             or
             else
             the
             Printer
             oversaw
             the
             43.
             
             
               Place
            
             in
             ▪
             this
             number
             .
             For
             that
             being
             left
             out
             ,
             as
             it
             appears
             it
             is
             there
             are
             in
             all
             but
             Lxv.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A25221e-24490
           
             Philo
             Iudeus
             lib.
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
          
           
             *
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
          
           
             See
             
               Tycho
               ●r●he●
            
             Iudgement
             concerning
             this
             life
             Revolution
             of
             the
             
               Fiery
               Trig
            
             on
             which
             you
             have
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             this
             book
             .
          
           
             
               Esdras
               .
            
          
           
             *
             Whither
             these
             ten
             Tribes
             were
             carryed
             is
             at
             this
             day
             a
             great
             question
             .
             
               Esdras
            
             tells
             us
             that
             they
             entred
             
               Euphrates
            
             by
             the
             narrow
             passages
             of
             the
             River
             ,
             and
             so
             travelled
             a
             vast
             Country
             of
             a
             year
             and
             halfs
             journey
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             Countryes
             called
             
               A●sareth
               .
            
             I
             finde
             indeed
             in
             
               Ptolemy
               lib.
            
             5.
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ;
             a
             City
             of
             the
             Greater
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ,
             not
             farre
             from
             the
             place
             where
             
               Araxes
            
             exposeth
             〈◊〉
             self
             into
             the
             
               Caspian
            
             Sea
             :
             Perhaps
             an
             Israelitish
             Colony
             .
             But
             how
             all
             this
             can
             stand
             good
             compared
             with
             a
             
               King.
            
             17.6
             .
             and
             
               Geography
            
             it self
             ,
             viderine
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
             See
             Doctor
             
               Reinold
               De
               libri●
               Apocryphis
               ,
               ad
               locum
               .
            
             Bretowoods
             Enquir
             .
             
               cap.
            
             13.
             
             The
             Sibylls
             ▪
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
             The
             
               Sibylls
            
             verse
             runnes
             thus
             ,
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             —
             The
             former
             verse
             in
             
               Tertullians
            
             Latin
             is
             
               Nulla
               jam
               Delos
               ,
               harenae
               Sa●●os
               ,
               ut
               Sibylla
               non
               mendax
               .
            
             Lib.
             de
             Pallio
             ,
             Vide
             
               Ioan.
               Obsopai
            
             edit.
             Sibyll
             .
             Carminum
             ,
             Gr.
             lat
             .
             Parisus
             .
          
           
             
               Alfonsus
               Conradus
               Mantuanus
               .
            
          
           
             
               Lucas
               Osiander
               .
            
          
           
             
               Matthaeus
               Cotterius
               .
            
          
           
             
               Ioannes
               Piscator
               .
            
          
           
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
             
               On
               the
               earth
            
          
           
             Io.
             Piscatoris
             
               De
               futura
               in
               tertis
               Ecclesie
               ,
               ●elicitate
            
             Tractatus
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
          
           
             
               Theophrastus
               Paracelsus
               .
            
          
           
             
               Michael
               Sendivogius
               .
            
          
           
             Stephanus
             Pannonius
             .
          
           
             Ioannes
             Dobricius
             .
          
           
             *
             In
             
               Serpenta●●
            
             De
             quâ
             scrip
             sit
             
               Ioan
               Keplerus
            
             ▪
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             quem
             vide
             ,
             &
             nuperum
             item
             ,
             tractatum
             apud
             nos
             editum
             
               Nuncius
               Propheticus
            
             inscriptum
             ,
             
               pag.
            
             14.
             
             
               Petrus
               Molinaeus
               .
            
          
        
         
           Notes for div A25221e-27070
           
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
          
           
             *
             He
             shall
             not
             finde
             faith
             indeed
             
               adeo
               frequentem
               in
               cordibus
               justificatorum
               ,
               quam
               natantem
               in
               libris
               hypocritarum
               ,
            
             as
             Doctor
             
               Prideaux
               Orat.
               de
               Vocat
               .
               Iudaerum
               ,
            
             where
             he
             explains
             this
             place
             .
             Sect.
             7.
             
          
           
             *
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ,
             
               secula
               ,
            
             (
             
               per
               Enallagen
               pro
            
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             )
             in
             this
             place
             ,
             as
             also
             in
             the
             
               Hebrew●
               ,
            
             chap
             1.
             vers
             2.
             and
             chapter
             11.
             vers.
             3.
             is
             used
             for
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             ,
             because
             in
             
               Hebrew
            
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             signifieth
             bat
             .
          
           
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
          
           
             See
             
               Plutarchs
            
             profound
             and
             learned
             Book
             ,
             
               De
               defectu
               O●●cul●rum
            
          
           
             
               See
               for
               the
               Greek
               of
               of
               these
               verses
               in
            
             Io
             Obsopaeus
             
               his
               Edition
               of
               the
            
             Ancient
             Oracles
             .
             
               The
               book
               is
               not
               now
               under
               my
               hands
               .
            
          
           
             *
             Some
             begin
             these
             1000
             yeers
             at
             Christs
             
               Incarnation
               ,
            
             and
             end
             them
             in
             
               S●●●ester
            
             2.
             
             Some
             at
             his
             
               Passion
               ,
            
             and
             end
             them
             in
             
               Benedict
            
             9
             ▪
             Some
             at
             the
             destruction
             of
             
               Hierusalem
               ,
            
             and
             end
             them
             in
             
               Hildebrand
               ,
            
             or
             
               Gregory
            
             7.
             which
             is
             
               receptio
               feutenti●
               ,
            
             as
             D.
             
               Prideaux
               
                 {non-Roman}
                 {non-Roman}
                 {non-Roman}
                 {non-Roman}
                 {non-Roman}
              
               ,
               Orat
               de
               Gog
               &
               Magog
               .
            
             Sect.
             1.
             
             Others
             begin
             them
             in
             
               Constantine
            
             the
             
               Great
               ,
            
             and
             terminate
             them
             in
             
               B●nisa●t
            
             8.
             about
             the
             year
             1300.
             
          
           
             
               Cerinthus
            
             being
             a
             
               Iew
               ,
            
             had
             his
             fond
             conceits
             concerning
             these
             1000
             years
             from
             
               I●d●isme
               .
            
             Yet
             observe
             this
             ,
             That
             I
             
               renaus
            
             and
             
               Tertullian
               ,
            
             who
             professedly
             wrote
             of
             
               Cerinthus
            
             Heresies
             ,
             make
             not
             any
             mention
             of
             this
             his
             opinion
             to
             be
             one
             .
          
           
             *
             Lib.
             de
             Haeresious
             ,
             cap
             8.
             vide
             
               Epithanium
            
             &
             ▪
             
               Philastrium
               .
            
          
           
             *
             Which
             thousand
             years
             of
             pleasure
             we
             no
             more
             maintain
             ,
             then
             those
             1000
             years
             mentioned
             in
             
               Virgils
               Purgatory
               .
               Aen.
            
             6.
             
          
           
             
               Alfonsus
               Conradus
               .
            
          
           
             
               Concerning
               this
               seventh
            
             Millenary
             ,
             
               and
               what
               the
               Iewes
               thought
               thereof
               ,
               see
            
             Hierome
             
               upon
               the
               65
               of
            
             Esay
             ,
             
               and
            
             Camerarius
             
               in
            
             Alcinoum
             Flitonis
             ;
             Carpentarius
             
               also
               upon
               the
               same
            
             Dialogue
             .
             pag.
             
               322.
               
            
          
           
             *
             See
             the
             stupid
             〈◊〉
             of
             the
             
               T●rks
            
             opinion
             hereabout
             in
             the
             
               Alcoran
               Az●●●a
            
             28.
             and
             31.
             
             Some
             rejected
             the
             authority
             of
             the
             
               Revelation
               ,
            
             because
             it
             seemed
             to
             favour
             the
             heresie
             of
             the
             
               Cerinthians
               ,
            
             or
             
               Chilias●s
            
             But
             here
             
               de
            
             1000
             
               a●nis
               nihil
               corum
               narratur
               que
            
             Cerin●hus
             
               〈…〉
               .
               Vbi
               enim
               luxus
               ille
               :
               ubi
               cibus
               &
               poius
               ?
               ubi
               nuptie
               &
               〈◊〉
               sacrificia
               &
               di●sfesti
               Hierusalem
               agen
               .
            
             saith
             
               Trem.
               
            
             Besides
             ,
             
               Cerinthus
            
             affirmed
             
               Christ
            
             to
             be
             begotten
             at
             other
             men
             ;
             he
             denied
             God
             to
             be
             creator
             of
             the
             world
             ;
             he
             separated
             
               Christ
            
             and
             
               Iesus
               ,
            
             as
             two
             distinct
             persons
             .
             
               Et
               que
               nescires
               melius
               .
            
          
           
             *
             See
             the
             stupid
             〈◊〉
             of
             the
             
               T●rks
            
             opinion
             hereabout
             in
             the
             
               Alcoran
               Az●●●a
            
             28.
             and
             31.
             
             Some
             rejected
             the
             authority
             of
             the
             
               Revelation
               ,
            
             because
             it
             seemed
             to
             favour
             the
             heresie
             of
             the
             
               Cerinthians
               ,
            
             or
             
               Chilias●s
            
             But
             here
             
               de
            
             1000
             
               a●nis
               nihil
               corum
               narratur
               que
            
             Cerin●hus
             
               〈…〉
               .
               Vbi
               enim
               luxus
               ille
               :
               ubi
               cibus
               &
               poius
               ?
               ubi
               nuptie
               &
               〈◊〉
               sacrificia
               &
               di●sfesti
               Hierusalem
               agen
               .
            
             saith
             
               Trem.
               
            
             Besides
             ,
             
               Cerinthus
            
             affirmed
             
               Christ
            
             to
             be
             begotten
             at
             other
             men
             ;
             he
             denied
             God
             to
             be
             creator
             of
             the
             world
             ;
             he
             separated
             
               Christ
            
             and
             
               Iesus
               ,
            
             as
             two
             distinct
             persons
             .
             
               Et
               que
               nescires
               melius
               .
            
          
           
             *
             
               Christoph
               .
               Angelus
               ,
            
             a
             
               Grecian
               ,
            
             whom
             I
             have
             been
             acquainted
             withall
             here
             in
             
               England
               ,
            
             some
             years
             agoe
             wrote
             a
             Book
             in
             Greek
             ,
             to
             prove
             that
             
               Mahomet
            
             was
             that
             
               Antichrist
            
             mentioned
             by
             S.
             
               Paul
               .
            
             2
             
               Thes.
            
             13.
             under
             the
             termes
             of
             the
             
               Man
               of
               si●ne
               ,
            
             and
             
               sonne
               of
               Perdition
               .
            
             His
             book
             is
             ent●tu●ed
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             &c.
             
             I
             cannot
             blame
             the
             poor
             Greek
             for
             thinking
             so
             ,
             considering
             the
             horrid
             Tyranny
             and
             slavery
             his
             Countrymen
             live
             under
             ,
             being
             vassals
             to
             the
             
               Great
               Turke
               ,
            
             the
             admirer
             of
             
               Mahomet
               :
            
             I
             rather
             wonder
             that
             there
             should
             be
             found
             among
             us
             learned
             men
             ,
             who
             are
             ab●tters
             of
             this
             opinion
             ,
             when
             as
             the
             Apostle
             
               Paul
            
             teacheth
             us
             expressely
             ,
             that
             
               Antichrist
            
             shall
             sit
             in
             the
             
               Temple
               of
               God
               as
               God
            
             ;
             2
             
               Thes.
            
             2.4
             .
             and
             
               Dominus
            
             DEUS
             
               noster
               Papa
            
             is
             a
             thing
             taken
             notice
             of
             in
             the
             world
             before
             yesterday
             .
          
           
             The
             XXII
             
               Objection
               ,
            
             it
             appears
             ,
             is
             left
             out
             .
             I
             know
             not
             by
             what
             chance
             ,
             if
             not
             by
             the
             Printers
             negligence
             .
          
           
             *
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
             
               v.
               Arislot
               .
               Analys.
               Post
               lib.
            
             1.
             
               cap.
            
             16
             
               M.
               Cotterius
            
          
           
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             He
             alludes
             to
             
               Glaucus
               ,
            
             changing
             his
             golden
             Armour
             with
             *
             
               Diomedis
            
             for
             brasse
             Armo●r
             ,
             in
             1.
             of
             the
             
               Rhapsody
               of
               Ho●●s
               Ilias
               .
            
             
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
               {non-Roman}
            
             .
             Besides
             the
             Antients
             ,
             
               Iustim●n
            
             useth
             it
             proverbically
             ,
             
               P●o●m
               .
               F.
               
            
          
        
         
           Notes for div A25221e-35490
           
             
               Concerning
               Elias
               comming
               .
            
          
           
             
               Parvum
               sed
               magnae
               sedulitatis
               opus
               .
               Als●edius
               .
               Sedalitas
               ▪
            
          
        
         
           Notes for div A25221e-37410
           
             
               Dialog
               cum
               Tryphone
               .
               Part
               of
               which
               Dialogue
               so
               farre
               south
               as
               it
               con
               c●●●s
               the
               Millenary
               Reigne
               of
               Christ
               ,
               Mr.
               Mede
               hath
               bo●h
               corrected
               ,
               and
               illustrated
               with
               notes
               ,
               in
               the
            
             281
             
               pag.
               &c.
               of
               this
               wo●k
               ,
               where
               hee
               hath
               also
               published
               the
               opinions
               of
               the
               Iewish
               Doctors
               concerning
               the
               kingdome
               of
               the
               Messias
               .
            
          
           
             
               Every
               whe●e
               in
               the
               Prophets
               ,
               as
               when
               they
               say
               in
               that
               day●
               and
               e●sewhere
               in
               the
               O.T.
               A●
               a●so
               ●he
               N.
               as
               Mat.
            
             6.11
             
               Luk.
            
             11.13
             .
             
               &
            
             8
             2
             
               Pet.
            
             3.18
             
               The
               day
               of
               an
               Age
               ,
               whi●h
               wee
               rende●
               ,
               for
               ever
               and
               ev●r
               .
            
          
           
             
               verse
            
             13.
             
          
           
             
               Dan.
            
             13.14
             18.22.26.27
             .
          
           
             
               Dan.
            
             7.21
             .
             
               vers
            
             8.
             
          
           
             Dan.
             11.34.35
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A25221e-38880
           
             
               Multi
               Ecclesiaricorum
               virorū
               &
               Martyrum
               ista
               di●erunt
               ,
            
             Hieron.
             in
             Hierem
             .
             lib.
             4.
             
          
           
             *
             Lactant.
             Institut
             .
             l.
             7.
             
          
           
             Lactantius
             
               expresseth
               this
               Prophecy
               in
            
             Virgils
             
               verses
               ,
               changing
               the
               order
               thus
               ,
               38.39.40.41.28.29.30.42.43.44.45.21.22
               .
            
          
           
             
               Cerinthius
            
             and
             his
             followers
             the
             
               Millenaries
            
             were
             branded
             for
             Heretiques
             by
             reason
             of
             their
             carnall
             conceit
             of
             a
             meere
             temporall
             felicity
             :
             That
             the
             earth
             during
             these
             1000.
             yeare●
             should
             be
             ,
             not
             a
             paradise
             of
             spirituall
             delights
             ,
             but
             a
             stewes
             of
             all
             impure
             pleasures
             ,
             and
             a
             stage
             ef
             libertinisme
             ,
             not
             unlike
             the
             phantasticall
             heaven
             the
             
               Turkes
            
             dreame
             of
             .
             This
             is
             also
             the
             fond
             fancy
             of
             the
             circumcised
             
               Iewes
               ,
            
             and
             our
             late
             rebaptized
             Heretiques
             .
          
           
             *
             
               Hieron.
               de
               VV.
               
               M.
               numerosum
               antiquorum
               Pa●●●m
               Catalogum
               in
               banc
               sententi●m
               recenset
               .
            
          
           
             The
             first
             revolution
             of
             the
             fiery
             
               Trigon
               ,
            
             happened
             in
             
               Enco
            
             and
             in
             the
             then
             flourishing
             estate
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             The
             third
             in
             
               Moses
            
             and
             the
             freedome
             from
             Egyptian
             slavery
             .
             The
             fifth
             in
             
               CHRIST
               ,
            
             and
             the
             restoring
             of
             us
             to
             Gods
             ●avourby
             his
             Passion
             .
          
           
             〈…〉
             SABBATISMI
             
               qu●●da●●●cculta●
               rationē
               ob●inet
               ,
               &
               praecaeteris
               peculiare
               ,
               &
               magni
               momenti
               quid
               denunciat
               .
            
             Tycho
             Brahe
             d.
             l.
             
          
           
             *
             Without
             doubt
             he
             meanes
             the
             20
             Chapter
             .